JP7647484B2 - Cooking device and cooking system - Google Patents

Description

The present disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats an object to be heated, such as a pot placed on a top plate, and a cooking system that uses the cooking device.

Generally, cooking appliances are roughly divided into three types based on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type" which is installed inside kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is the "free-standing type" which is placed in a specific position on kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas-burning table"). The third type is the small and portable "tabletop type" which is placed in a desired position on a dining table, etc.

There are many "built-in" cooking appliances that are multi-purpose cooking appliances equipped with multiple types of heat sources, and they are popular as they can handle a variety of cooking methods. However, because they are installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed to match the standards of general kitchen furniture, and there is much less freedom in design compared to "freestanding" or "tabletop" appliances, making it difficult to turn them into practical products.

As a typical combined cooking device that can expand the range of cooking methods, a device has been proposed that has a grill chamber (also called an "oven chamber" or "heating chamber", but hereafter referred to as the "heating chamber") inside the main body that is heated by a heat source, and that introduces microwaves from a microwave heating source into the heating chamber (see Patent Document 1).

In the combined cooking device shown in Patent Document 1, for example, cooking can be performed using different types of heating means above the top plate (first location) and in the internal space of the heating chamber (second location). This has the advantage of being able to handle a variety of foods. The convenience of this cooking device can be further improved if cooking condition data (recipe data) for the food desired by the user can be obtained from outside via a network or communication terminal device.

Meanwhile, a cooking system has been proposed in the past in which communication is performed between a communication terminal such as a smartphone and a cooking appliance, and recipe data corresponding to a cooking recipe selected on the communication terminal is transmitted from the communication terminal to the cooking appliance to perform cooking (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Patent Document 2 proposes a configuration in which, although not a combined cooking device, it is a cooking device (gas-fired cooking device) that has multiple heating sections (e.g., right burner, left burner, rear burner) and a communication function, and when a user operates a communication terminal to select a specific recipe from a cooking menu, the cooking device acquires heating condition data for the multiple heating sections all at once.

Furthermore, Patent Document 3 proposes a menu creation support device that efficiently supports the creation of healthy menus that contain nutrients suitable for the user and can be made with existing ingredients.

Furthermore, Patent Document 4 proposes a nutritional component display system that includes a server device and a client device (such as a personal computer) connected to a network. This is a system that analyzes and displays the amount of nutritional components for each ingredient in response to user input.

Furthermore, Patent Document 5 proposes a voice recognition device that enters a voice input state when a button is pressed and ends the voice input state when the button is released.

JP 2021-68598 A (page 1, FIG. 44) JP 2017-106685 A JP 2001-243326 A JP 2006-139554 A JP 2001-42890 A

In recent years, interest in various cooking methods and the need for dietary management have increased among households and individuals.
In cooking appliances, especially in combination cooking appliances, the setting of control conditions (e.g., heat power, heating time, etc.) becomes more complicated as the number of heating means increases. Therefore, if the user can select a cooking menu, obtain cooking condition data (recipe data), and use this data easily, convenience will be improved.
However, the technologies described in Patent Documents 3 and 4 only show a large-scale (for professional businesses) menu information extraction system and a nutrient content search (information processing) system, and do not take into consideration reducing the input of cooking devices. Therefore, even the technologies described in Patent Documents 3 and 4 do not fully meet users' expectations of reducing the input operation load.
Furthermore, the technology described in Patent Document 5 also requires that one input button be kept pressed for the entire duration of voice input, and so cannot reduce the burden of user operations.

The primary objective of the present disclosure is to provide a highly convenient cooking device and cooking system that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods by enabling voice input and improving user operability.

A first heating means;
A second heating means;
A first input operation unit that receives a user's command regarding the first heating means;
A second input operation unit that receives a user's command regarding the second heating means;
A communication unit that receives recipe data from an external device;
A notification unit having a display unit;
A control device,
The first input operation unit has a touch-type input key A for selecting cooking contents,
The second input operation unit has a touch-type input key B for selecting cooking contents,
The input key A and the input key B are dual-purpose keys that support both voice input and touch input,
the one-input operation unit instructs the control device to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key A;
the two-input operation unit instructs the control device to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key B;
The voice input mode is a voice input mode 1, and the voice input mode 1 can be selected from a voice input mode 1A in which touch input is restricted and a voice input mode 1B in which touch input is maintained,
when receiving a command to start the voice input mode from the second input operation unit, the control device enables acquisition of recipe data related to the second heating means via the communication unit, and accepts a command to set control conditions for the recipe data;
canceling the voice input mode setting for the second input operation unit when a command is given from the second input operation unit to start cooking using the recipe data;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can perform cooking using recipe data acquired from outside via a network.
In addition, according to the cooking system disclosed herein, when selecting a cooking menu, the touch state of the touch-type input keys can be determined and the mode can be automatically changed to voice input mode, making it possible for the user to input control conditions by voice during input operations, thereby contributing to improving the efficiency of input operations and reducing the input load on the user.

FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram of a heating and cooking system according to a first embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of the heating and cooking system according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram of the heating and cooking system according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure. 1 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system (information processing network) between one house according to a first embodiment and the outside. FIG. 1 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view showing the configuration of a kitchen in one of the houses shown in FIG. 4 . FIG. 2 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view showing the configuration of a kitchen in one of the houses shown in FIG. 4 . 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of home appliances and a home gateway in one house shown in FIG. 4. 1 is a perspective view of an installed state of a cooking device according to a first embodiment of the present disclosure; FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . FIG. 9 is a schematic plan view of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . FIG. 9 is an enlarged plan view of a central display unit and a central operation unit of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . 9 is an enlarged plan view of a left display unit, a left heating power display unit, and a left operation unit of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . 9 is an enlarged plan view of a right display unit, a right heating power display unit, and a right operation unit of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . 9 is an enlarged plan view of a central display unit, a central operation unit, and a central heating status display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . 9 is an enlarged plan view showing an example of the operation of the central display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . 9 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of a control device and an input operation unit (central operation unit) of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . 9 is an explanatory diagram showing all the types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . 9 is a control menu classification table for the cooking device of FIG. 8 . 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage structure of various cooking control menus in a coordinated cooking mode or a combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 8 and a correspondence relationship between input keys. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the central display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 8 in a composite cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the operation of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 8 in a composite cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the operation of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 8 in a composite cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooking device of FIG. 8 in a composite cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 8 . FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 8 . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 8 . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram 1 of a modified example showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 8 . 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit and the display of the associated cooking menu in the associated cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 8 . FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the central display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 8 in a coordinated cooking mode. 9 is a table showing various cooperative cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking device of FIG. 8 . FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 1 of the coordinated preheating cooking mode among the coordinated cooking modes shown in FIG. 31 . FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 2 of the coordinated preheating cooking mode among the coordinated cooking modes shown in FIG. 31 . FIG. 32 is a step explanatory diagram showing the operation of the coordinated cooking mode shown in FIG. 31 . 32 is a flowchart showing the operation of the coordinated cooking mode shown in FIG. 31 . 9 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a coordinated cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is a flowchart 1 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is a flowchart showing main input steps for three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 40 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a coordinated cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 39 . 40 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a combined cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 39. 40 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a single cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 39. 9 is a flowchart 1 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is a flowchart 2 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is a flowchart showing a basic operation of a control device in a voice input mode in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 8 . 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing transitions of the initial standby screen of the central display unit at the time of start-up in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is an explanatory diagram of a central display section showing a state before cooking by a first heating means is started in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 9 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation before switching to the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the central display unit and the central operation unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 before acquiring recipe data from the outside and transitioning to a cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a chronological relationship between cooking steps of an integrated cooking menu and operations of an input operation unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 8 . 9 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in the composite cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 52 is a time chart showing a first modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. 51 . 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data for the cooperative cooking mode is acquired in the cooking device shown in FIG. 8 . 52 is a time chart showing a second modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. 51 . 13 is a flowchart showing the operation of displaying food ingredients and nutritional components before transitioning to a heat cooking operation in the linked cooking mode using recipe data acquired from an external source. FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram of a heating and cooking system according to a second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device shown in FIG. 57 . A block diagram showing the functional configuration of a control device and an input operation unit (central operation unit) of the heating cooker shown in Figure 57. A block diagram showing the main functional configuration of a communication terminal (information processing terminal) used in the heating and cooking system shown in Figure 57. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an operation when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 . FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining an operation when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 . 58 is an enlarged plan view illustrating the operation of the central operating unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 57. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the central operating unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 57. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the operation of the central operating unit and the central display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 . FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the central operating unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 57 . FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the central operating unit and the central display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps of a coordinated cooking menu and the operation of the input operation unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 . FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the terminal display screen of a communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the terminal display screen of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the terminal display screen of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the terminal display screen of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the terminal display screen of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the terminal display screen of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the terminal display screen of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a terminal display screen of a communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the terminal display screen of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a terminal display screen of a communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a terminal display screen of a communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a display form of a central display portion of a cooking device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the central display unit after start-up of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 81. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the central display unit after start-up of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 81 . FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a cooking device according to a fourth embodiment, illustrating the operation steps of a control device from when the cooking device 1 is started up until just before cooking begins. A flowchart showing the operation before transitioning to a cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device shown in Figure 84. A plan view showing the operation of the central operating unit and central display unit of the cooking device shown in Figure 84. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation of a communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system of embodiment 4. FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram of a heating and cooking system according to a fifth embodiment. A block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker shown in Figure 88. FIG. 89 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the central display unit and its surrounding area of a cooking device that constitutes the cooking system shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 1 is an operation explanatory diagram showing the central display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88. An explanatory diagram showing input operation steps and display steps for the heating cooker shown in Figure 88. FIG. 10 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the central display unit in the modified example of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 94 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the central display unit of the modified example shown in FIG. 93. FIG. 94 is an operation explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the central display unit in the modified example shown in FIG. 93 . FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing a part of the input operation unit and the control device in the modified example of FIG. 93. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a second modified example of the display operation of the central display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing yet another display state of the modified example shown in FIG. 97. FIG. 13 is an operation explanatory diagram showing a central display section of a cooking device according to a sixth embodiment. Operation explanatory diagram 2 of the central display unit and central operating unit of the heating cooker shown in Figure 99. An explanatory diagram showing the input operation steps and display steps of the heating cooker shown in Figure 99. FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram of a heating and cooking system according to a seventh embodiment. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device shown in FIG. 102 . An explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the main operational steps of the control device of the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 102 and the operational steps on the external information processing network side. FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram of a heating and cooking system according to an eighth embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the main operational steps of the control device of the cooking device shown in Figure 105 and the operational steps on the external information processing network side. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing, in chronological order, the main operational steps of a cooking device and the operational steps of an external information processing network in a cooking system according to a ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing the terminal display screen of a communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system shown in Figure 107. An operational explanatory diagram showing the recipe data reception process of the central operating unit and central display unit of a cooking appliance used in the cooking system shown in Figure 107. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing, in chronological order, the operational steps of the cooking appliance and the external information processing network in the cooking system shown in FIG. 107.

The cooking device and cooking system according to the present disclosure will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description, terms indicating directions (e.g., "up," "down," "right," "left," "front," "rear," etc.) are used to facilitate understanding, but these are for explanatory purposes only. In addition, in each drawing, items with the same reference numerals are the same or equivalent, and this is common throughout the entire specification.

Furthermore, in the following description, a composite cooking device equipped with multiple types of heating means will also be referred to simply as a "cooking device."

In the following explanation, when we say "a heated object placed on the top plate," it means that it includes both cases where the heated object, such as a pot, is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 3 (described below) and heated, and cases where the heated object is placed on a supporting member, such as a trivet, that is arranged above the top plate, such as a gas burner, and heated.

In the first embodiment, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 6, which will be described later. It may also be one that uses radiant heat or steam.

In the first embodiment, a magnetron is used as the microwave heating source, but there are no limitations on the microwave oscillation principle or method, such as a microwave oscillator. Multiple heating sources may also be provided.

In this embodiment 1, the "third heating means" HM3 is called "third" to indicate the difference from the second heating means HM2, but does not imply a superiority/inferiority relationship.
In addition, in embodiment 1, a heat source using a radiant electric heat source (such as a sheath heater, mica heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.) is used, but a heat source that generates heat in other forms or methods may also be used.

The third heating means HM3 is capable of cooking in one heating chamber 6. It may be a combination of multiple heating sources with different heating principles, such as a heating source made up of an electric heater and a gas burner (burner). An induction heating source may also be used as the heating source for heating the heating chamber 6. It may also be a steam generator 550 (boiler) (not shown) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam).

Furthermore, the third heating means may be either a heat source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or a heat source that is installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 6 and heats the atmosphere in the internal space to a high temperature.
In addition, a heat-generating member that becomes hot by induction heating may be placed in the heating chamber, and this heat-generating member may heat the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or may heat the air inside the heating chamber 6.

A representative example of the induction heating coil (IH coil) referred to in this embodiment 1 is one formed by bundling about 30 thin copper or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm, twisting several of these bundles together and winding them into a spiral shape. Alternatively, there is also one formed by winding about 1,000 to 1,500 wires of about 0.05 mm. There has also been a proposal to form the coil from a ring-shaped conductor made of a flat conductive material.
Any of these forms corresponds to an "IH coil" which is the main part of an induction heating source.

In this embodiment 1, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single cooked item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions can be set independently.

The above-mentioned "coordinated cooking" refers to the use of multiple heating means with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing a single dish, after preheating with a microwave heating source, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, where it is heated with an induction coil to complete the dish, which is a type of "coordinated cooking" as referred to here.

Another type of "cooperative cooking" is to heat the food inside the heating chamber 6 with a gas burner (burner), and then move the food onto the top plate 3 and heat it with the gas burner (burner) or an induction heating source to improve the cooking quality.

The "voice input mode" refers to a control mode in which the user US inputs by speaking, without touching or pressing the buttons or operation surfaces of the input switches (input keys).
The types of "voice input mode" include "voice input mode 1" and "voice input mode 2".

The "voice input mode 1" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter referred to as a "combined key") that supports both voice input and touch (including pressing) input.
The "voice input mode 2" is selected by operating an input key 180 dedicated to voice input (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "voice input dedicated key").

When an input operation unit has multiple input keys, including the "dual-purpose key," and the mode is changed to "voice input mode 1" using the dual-purpose key, there are two cases: the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 156M) other than the dual-purpose key are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1A"), and they are not disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1B"). Either case corresponds to "voice input mode 1" as referred to here.

When the "dedicated voice input key" 180 is pressed during touch input using an input key (e.g., 153M or 153L) in one input operation unit, "voice input mode 2" is selected. In this case, after voice input mode 2 is selected, there are two cases: one in which the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 156M) other than the dedicated voice input key 180 are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 2A"), and one in which they are not disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 2B"). Either case corresponds to "voice input mode 2" as referred to here.

"Recipe data" CD refers to data used in controlling the cooker 1 to heat-cook one food item.
One form of recipe data CD includes data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process and order, and control conditions during heating (including, but not limited to, heat power, target temperature, heating and cooking time, etc.).

Another form of the recipe data CD does not include data specifying a heating means or data defining the heating steps or order, but includes only a portion of the data required to execute a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak).
For example, when cooking in the collaborative cooking mode described below, it does not include information specific to the heating means that executes one cooking menu (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means and information about the heating port, etc.), information about the cooking process, information indicating the order in which the heating means are driven, etc.
In this case, the data mainly consists of instructions and data (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time. In this case, if the recipe data CD held by the cooking device 1 is configured on the premise of cooking one serving of food, for example, the cooking device may be adapted to two or four servings by changing the control conditions (for example, one parameter called heating time) by a built-in program in response to an external command.

In the following embodiments, no special distinction will be made between the types of recipe data described above.

Embodiment 1.
(1. Configuration of the Heat Cooking System)
A first embodiment according to the present disclosure is shown in FIGS.
Referring to FIG.
The cooking system of the present embodiment 1 is configured to include a cooking appliance 1, a smartphone 200 (also called a "communication terminal") having a function of wirelessly communicating with the cooking appliance 1, and a cloud server 300. Note that, in addition to the smartphone 200, a tablet terminal or a personal computer with a communication function may also be used. These devices and the smartphone 200 are collectively referred to as an "information processing terminal" 200.

The smartphone 200 performs wireless communication using a communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) with a wireless router 340 (not shown) installed in a house (not shown) in which the cooking appliance 1 is used.

The cooking appliance 1 can acquire at least recipe data CD2 through wireless communication 400 with the smartphone 200. The recipe data CD2 will be described later.
The smartphone 200 performs wireless communication 400 with the cooking appliance 1 using a communication method such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

The smartphone 200 accesses the cloud server 300 in an external space via the wireless router 340 (not shown) and a network 201 such as the Internet. The cloud server 300 has at least one recipe data providing server 301.

The recipe data providing server 301 is equipped with a recipe DB (database) 302 that holds data on recipes for performing various cooking methods, and the smartphone 200 accesses a recipe providing site operated by the recipe data providing server 301 and acquires (downloads) various recipe data CD1 from the recipe DB 302.

The recipe data CD1 and CD2, which will be described in detail later, contain commands (command data) that specify the heating means and control conditions (including at least one of heat, heating time, temperature, etc., but are not limited to these) so that a specific food item can be cooked in the cooking appliance 1. However, as described above, the data may be unique data that identifies the recipe data CD1 and CD2.

In the following explanation, recipe data (cooking condition data) may be described with reference numbers such as CD1, CD2, etc., but the contents of the recipe data do not necessarily differ depending on the reference number, and may even be the same. These reference numbers (CD1, CD2) are used based on the sender of the recipe data to make it easier to understand. When using a unified reference number for recipe data, "CD" is used. Also, the name "recipe data" will be used for the explanation.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes a first heating means HM1 arranged below a top plate 3 (described in FIG. 8 and subsequent figures) that covers the top surface of the cooking device 1, a second heating means HM2 that supplies microwaves to the inside of a heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 9) formed inside the cooking device 1, and a third heating means HM3 that is located inside or outside the heating chamber 6 and that raises the temperature of the internal space of the heating chamber 6 to heat it.

If the upper surface of the top plate 3 is defined as the "first location," then in order to heat the object to be heated (a magnetic metal pan) placed in this first location, an induction heating means is used as the first heating means HM1. Alternatively, a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating a pan made of magnetic metal or non-magnetic metal can be used as the first heating means HM1.

If a closed space located away from the first location is defined as a "second location," then the interior of the heating chamber 6 (see Figure 5) is the second location.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing an "independent cooking mode" KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven independently.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing a "composite cooking mode" KM2 in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously, or one of them is driven first and the other is driven automatically later, as a method of cooking one food item. Even when the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously, both cases in which the heating ends at the same time and cases in which they end at different times are one operation pattern belonging to the "composite cooking mode" KM2.

The "combined cooking mode" KM2 has at least a pattern (RG control mode 1) in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously from the beginning, a pattern (RG control mode 2) in which the third heating means HM3 starts to be driven after the second heating means HM2, and a pattern (RG control mode 3) in which the third heating means HM3 is driven first and then automatically switched to the second heating means HM3. In these RG control modes 1 to 3, switching between the heating means is automatically performed when cooking begins in the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 9).

The "composite cooking mode" KM2, unlike the linked cooking mode KM3, does not have a "cooking menu" corresponding to a specific food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak). In other words, it provides a "control menu" for each pattern for driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3.

For example, one of the "control menus" is the "RG control mode 1." In the RG control mode (RG composite cooking mode), various foods can be cooked. One of the "control menus," for example, the "RG control mode 1," is controlled by recipe data that defines the control mode, but is not set for each specific food to be cooked.

In other words, the operation pattern in which two or more heating sources (the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3) are operated in a predetermined sequence is the composite cooking mode KM2, which has multiple "control menus."

In contrast to this, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 having a cooperative cooking menu applies recipe data (corresponding to specific foods) to heat and cook foods placed inside the heating chamber 6 and above the top plate 3 in a predetermined order.
In other words, the contents of the recipe data are different between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

In the following description, when a type of control mode, such as a driving pattern of a heat source, is indicated, it is called a "control menu." For example, "thawing" is one of the control menus.
On the other hand, when specifying foods that can be cooked by heating, names of dishes, etc., they are called "cooking menus." For example, "hamburger steak" is one of the cooking menus.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing a "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time difference determined depending on the operation of the user US (user).

The "combined cooking mode" KM3 has a pattern in which cooking process 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1, and a pattern in which cooking process 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2.
For example, in order to move to cooking step 2 after cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1, the food to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 6, and then the drive of the second heating means HM2 is started, so there is a "heating pause period" (transition period TR) during which no heating operation is performed between cooking step 1 and cooking step 2. This heating pause period will be described with reference to FIG.

In this "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, the recipe data CD is prepared for each specific food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak, roast beef, gratin).
The recipe data CD specifies the heating means to be used, the order in which the heating means are driven, and the control conditions for the heating means (including at least one of heating power, heating time, temperature, etc.).

The recipe data CD is stored in both the cooking appliance 1 and the recipe DB 302. The type of recipe data CD in the recipe DB and the type of recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance 1 do not have to be the same. For example, recipe data CD for new linked cooking mode KM3 may be added sequentially to the recipe DB 302, and the recipe data CD for composite cooking menus may be accumulated sequentially.

When the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD for executing the collaborative cooking mode KM3 from the smartphone 200, the data is one cooking menu unit selected by the user US on the smartphone 200. This is not limited to the "collaborative cooking mode" KM3, but is also common to the "combined cooking mode" KM2 and the "single cooking mode" KM1.

As described above, the smartphone 200 requests the recipe data providing server 301 to provide recipe data CD for the desired food to be cooked, and downloads the recipe data CD1 corresponding to the desired recipe.

The smartphone 200 can transmit recipe data CD2 corresponding to one recipe acquired from the recipe data providing server 301 to the cooking appliance 1.
In order to utilize such recipe data acquisition function, a user US of the cooking appliance 1 accesses a recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs an application for recipe selection (hereinafter referred to as the “recipe selection app”) on the smartphone 200.

When the user US installs the recipe selection app, the user US performs an operation to register identification information, such as the model name of the cooking appliance, as the initial setting. This registration allows the user US to obtain recipe data CD corresponding to the rated specifications of the cooking appliance 1 (such as the heating capacity of each of the heating means HM1 to HM3) from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

The user US also uses the recipe selection app to pair the smartphone 200 with the cooking appliance 1, and establishes wireless communication 400 between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1. Note that this wireless communication may use a near field communication (NFC) method.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
The cooking system in Fig. 2 differs from that in Fig. 1 in the role of the smartphone 200. Also, it is the cooker 1, not the smartphone 200, that accesses a recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and obtains an application for selecting a recipe (referred to as a "recipe selection app").

The smartphone 200 and the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) are connected via a network 202 such as the Internet.
The recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and the cooking appliance 1 are connected via a network 203 such as an internet line. A wireless router (not shown) may be interposed between the smartphone 200 and the cloud server 300. Similarly, a wireless router 340 (not shown) may be interposed between the cooking appliance 1 and the cloud server 300.

As described above, in the cooking system shown in FIG. 2, recipe data CD3 (corresponding to one recipe) created by the user US can be sent to a recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) using the smartphone 200, temporarily stored in the recipe DB 302, and provided to the cooking appliance 1. In other words, if the smartphone 200 is located far away from the house in which the cooking appliance 1 is installed (e.g., when outside), the recipe data CD3 of the smartphone 200 can be conveniently stored in the recipe data providing server 301.

The cooking appliance 1 downloads recipe data CD4 corresponding to a specific recipe stored in the recipe data providing server 301 via the network 203 between the cooking appliance 1 and the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301). In this case, the recipe data CD4 may be the recipe data CD2 provided by the smartphone 200.

To use the recipe data CD acquisition function, the user US of the cooking appliance 1 accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs a recipe selection application (hereinafter referred to as the "recipe selection application") in advance on the cooking appliance 1. It is convenient to make this installation possible to be easily performed on the cooking appliance 1 as one menu of the "function setting mode" described below.

When the user US installs the recipe selection app, the user US performs an operation to register identification information, such as the model name of the cooking appliance, as an initial setting. This registration allows the user US to obtain recipe data CD corresponding to the specifications of the cooking appliance 1 (such as the heating capacity of each of the heating means HM1 to HM3) from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

In the cooking system of FIG. 2, the user US acquires recipe data CD1 (corresponding to a recipe) as described in FIG. 1, displays and checks the contents of the recipe data CD1 on the display screen of the smartphone 200, and may modify a portion of the recipe data CD1 to store it as recipe data CD3 on the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) as described in FIG. 2.

In the cooking system shown in FIG. 1, when the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1 are located close to each other, recipe data CD2 can be provided from the smartphone 200 to the cooking appliance 1. However, for example, when the smartphone 200 is taken to a remote outdoor location, the cooking appliance 1 cannot directly acquire the recipe data CD2.
In contrast, in the cooking system shown in Figure 2, regardless of the location of the smartphone 200, as long as the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) can be accessed, the recipe data CD4 can be downloaded and used for cooking.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
The cooking system shown in FIG. 3 differs from that shown in FIG. 1 in the role of the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).
In the cooking system of FIG. 3, the cooker 1 accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and downloads recipe data CD6.

In addition, in the cooking system of FIG. 3, the cooker 1 can access a recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) to provide recipe data CD7.
For example, if cooking is actually performed and the cooking is satisfactory, the recipe data remaining in the storage unit of the cooking appliance 1 after the cooking can be provided as improved recipe data CD7 to the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301). Such favorite recipes of the user US can be registered (stored) in the recipe data providing server 301 as "favorite recipes." Note that this system differs from the cooking system in FIG. 1 in that it is the cooking appliance 1 that acquires the "recipe selection application."

The cooking appliance 1 and the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) are connected via networks 204, 205 such as the Internet.
A wireless router 340 (not shown) may be interposed between the cooking appliance 1 and the cloud server 300. Similarly, a wireless router 340 (not shown) may be interposed between the networks 204, 205 between the cooking appliance 1 and the cloud server 300. A wireless router (not shown) may also be interposed between the smartphone 200 and the cloud server 300.

In the cooking system of FIG. 3, the user US can obtain recipe data CD6 directly from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) using the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, even if the user does not own a smartphone 200, the user can obtain the desired recipe data CD6 from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) each time cooking is performed.

Also, as described above, if cooking is actually performed and the cooking is satisfactory, after the cooking is completed, the improved recipe data CD7 can be provided to the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301). Therefore, from the next time onwards, the recipe data CD7 can be called up from the cooking device 1 and used for cooking, which is convenient.

In the first embodiment, the recipe data CD may be described as being "acquired" or "restricted from being acquired." This point will be described.
The explanation of "restricting acquisition" does not mean that recipe data (specific information constituting all or a part of it) CD from the outside cannot enter the inside of the cooking appliance 1 at all via the communication unit 51 described later. In the cooking appliance 1, the communication unit 51 once receives the recipe data CD from the outside and temporarily stores it in an appropriate storage area in the storage device 41 (described in FIG. 16). At that time, the contents of the data (attributes, presence or absence of identification information 167, etc.) are analyzed. However, if the data is data transmitted from the outside during the "period during which acquisition is restricted" as described above, it will not be used in the subsequent process of executing the cooking menu (i.e., the cooking process) and will be automatically erased within a short period of time (at least when the main power switch 20 is turned off).

In the following explanation, the networks 201, 202, 203, 204, and 205, such as the Internet lines, will be referred to as "NW" as a unified symbol.

(2. Configuration of various electrical devices and home gateway)
The "home appliance" 402 refers to an electric appliance designed mainly for use at home. The home appliance 402 includes a cooking device 1, a refrigerator 403, a television receiver 404, an air conditioner 405, an air purifier 406, a ventilator 407, an electric rice cooker (electric rice cooker) 408, a microwave oven 409, a lighting fixture 410, and an air purifier 413, which will be described later. In the following description, the "refrigerator" 403 includes both a refrigerator-freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer compartment) and a freezer with only a freezing function, unless otherwise specified.

The "device identification information" of home appliance 402 is unique information for identifying home appliance 402. Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as the MAC address, manufacturer name, type name (model name), model number, and serial number of home appliance 402.

The "home gateway" 411 refers to an information collection device or information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 402 in one home and allows them to operate in cooperation with each other. In addition, the home gateway 411 also performs the operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 402 or acquiring information (also called "data") from one home appliance 402.
In the following description, it is assumed that the “home gateway” 411 is one form of the information processing device 411 .

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function to manage the total power usage of a household for all or some of the home appliances 402, in which case it may be called a "power control device" or "integrated management device", etc.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information on the current state of the home appliance 402, such as whether the home appliance 402 is in operation, stopped, or in standby mode, from the home appliance 402 via wired or wireless signals.
When wireless communication is used, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home appliance 402 using the appliance identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 functions as an "integrated management device" or "power command device" for one home appliance (e.g., cooking appliance 1) 402, if it does not limit the power consumption of other home appliances (e.g., lighting fixture 410), it does not correspond to an "integrated management device" or "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 410, it does not have the function of regulating the power consumption of the lighting fixture 410 itself so that the total power consumption, including the power consumption of the other home appliances 402, does not exceed the upper limit of the specified total power consumption. In such a case, the home gateway 411 does not correspond to an integrated management device or power command device from the perspective of the lighting fixture 410.

In FIG. 4, HA indicates one house.
Although not actually shown, the inside of the house HA is divided into a plurality of living spaces by walls and doors, and one of the living spaces, the kitchen 601, is provided with home appliances 402 such as the refrigerator 403, the cooking device 1, the microwave oven 409, and the electric rice cooker 408, as well as kitchen furniture 600. The living space also includes other rooms such as a "living room" and a "bathroom" as well as a room with a toilet, although these are not shown in Fig. 4. The living space may include other rooms.

All living spaces are supplied with electricity, for example 200V, from a commercial power source EP provided by an electric power company outside the house. This electricity is drawn into the house HA via a watt-hour meter 414.

415 is a power line (main line) connected to a commercial power source EP with a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. A television receiver (hereinafter referred to as "TV receiver") 404 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 405, a lighting fixture 410, a cooking device 1, a microwave oven 409, an electric rice cooker 408, a home gateway 411, and an environment detection unit 416 are connected to this power line 415.

Continuing with the description of FIG.
419 is a wide area communications network (sometimes called a "communications network" or the "Internet").
This wide area communication network 419 is connected to the home gateway 411 via a router (not shown). This wide area communication network 419 is the above-mentioned network NW.

417 is an external server, which is a component part of the cloud server 300 .
This external server 417 transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) 200 .

The external server 417 may be, for example, a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information provider or an electric power company in a specific region, or may be a server prepared by the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. This external server 417 may be a distributed processing type server known as a "cloud server." It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" that uses cloud servers: "IaaS," "PaaS," and "SaaS."

The home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from an external server 417. This content includes CDs containing recipe data (text and images) for various cooking methods.

Although not shown, the environmental sensor of the above-mentioned environmental detection unit 416 may be provided with additional temperature and humidity sensors that detect the temperature and humidity outside the house.

The external server 417 also functions as a means for providing information to the home appliance 402. In other words, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as the manufacturer, distributor, repairer, or information service provider of the home appliance 402, either alone or in collaboration with two or more organizations, and provides various services related to the home appliance 402 to the user US via the wide area communication network 419.

The external server 417 may also be what is generally called a "Web server" (hereinafter referred to as a "Web server"). A Web server refers to a service program that provides display information of HTML and objects (images, etc.) to a Web browser of software on the information processing device (client) side that is the "information receiver" such as various communication terminals (information processing terminals) 200 and the home gateway 411, etc., in accordance with HTTP (a protocol used to exchange data such as HTML documents and images between Web servers and Web browsers), and a server computer on which the service operates.

The external server 417 stores and remembers control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or a remote location. The communication terminal device 200, which will be described in detail later, for example a device known as a smartphone, can access the cloud server 300 and download (read) the control application software to realize the remote control described above.

The communication terminal device 200 can be easily carried by the user US to communicate calls and data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or anywhere on the go. It is a device that can download information from outdoor information sites via the wide area communication network 419, send and receive e-mail, and transmit remote control signals, but it can also be a device that cannot make calls, and such portable communication terminal devices are collectively called communication terminal device 200. A small portable personal computer is also a type of communication terminal device 200.

The communication terminal device 200 in the present embodiment 1 has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication while being in close proximity (or in contact) with the input/output unit of each home appliance 402 within a few centimeters. Note that this short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 402 including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 403 .
On the other hand, it is also possible for the communication terminal 200 to send control data (also called a "control command") to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 402, and control the home appliance 402 in accordance with the control command.

In this embodiment 1, direct remote control of the home appliances 402 from the communication terminal 200 is not possible. Some of the home appliances 402, such as the cooking appliance 1, generate high heat, so remote control via the Internet, which is used by many people outside the house HA, is not adopted. Instead, it is possible to operate all the home appliances 400 via the home gateway 411 as an integrated information processing device.

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 in this embodiment 1 is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and allows them to operate in coordination. In addition to this, it also performs the operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also called data) from one home appliance 400.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the kitchen 601 in the house HA is equipped with a range hood 407, which is a type of ventilation device described below, and a ceiling-mounted air purifier 413.

416A and 416B are sensor units of the environment detection unit 416 of the home gateway 411. One sensor unit, 416A, is placed inside the kitchen 601 as a human presence sensor that detects the presence of people (by infrared rays or ultrasonic waves), as shown in FIG. 7. The other sensor unit, 416B, is similarly installed in a different location from the sensor unit 416B. The sensor unit 416B is for acquiring "environmental information." The environment detection unit 416 will be explained in detail later.

The "environmental information" refers to three types of information: temperature information of the atmosphere in the space (kitchen 601) where the cooker 1 and refrigerator 403 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light intensity information. The dust scattering amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) present in the air.

Examples of "use of environmental information" include the following:
(1) When the temperature is high, the keep-warm function of the electric rice cooker 408 is operated continuously after the rice cooking process ends. Also, the target refrigeration temperature and the target freezing temperature of the refrigerator 403 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 405 is operated in the "dehumidification mode" or "cooling mode", or the ventilation device 407 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 405 is in operation, its operating conditions (such as the target room temperature) are changed.
(3) When fine dust particles are dispersed in the air, the air cleaner 413 is operated, or the ventilation device 407 is started.
(4) When the amount of pollen dispersed is large, the air purifier 413 is started to operate.
(5) When the amount of light (amount of visible light) is low, the lighting device 410 is turned on.

A "resident" refers to a person who resides in one of the houses HA shown in FIG. 4. Residents include blood relatives such as parents and children, brothers, and sisters. When using home appliance 402, a resident is called a "user US."

"Home" means a single dwelling HA managed by a specific manager, and may include an apartment building with multiple rooms and occupied by multiple families. In other words, such an apartment building is considered a home here if, like a single dwelling HA, the commercial power limit is centrally managed by a single power cut-off device (such as a single breaker BK or multiple power cut-off devices).

"Power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information on some signal related to power consumption that the home appliance 402 receives from the home gateway 411. This "power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information including information on transmission commands such as the power reduction request signal AS1 and power reduction command signal AS2 described below. This information includes information indicating the time when the signal was received (year, month, and time in seconds) and the meaning of the signal. For example, information such as "Reception time: August 1, 2021, 17:00 seconds, reduce instantaneous maximum power consumption by 2%" regarding the power reduction command signal AS2 for the cooking appliance 1 at a certain point in time.

In the case of the cooking appliance 1, for example, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in chronological order in the storage device 41 of the control device 40, which will be described later, and is not erased even when the main power switch 20 is turned ON or OFF. Turning the main power switch 20 ON and OFF is considered to be one cooking session, and at least several cooking sessions are stored and held. Anything beyond that is automatically erased in sequence.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
5 shows an example of the configuration of hardware to which the cooking appliance 1 and the home appliance operation management system of the present embodiment 1 are applied. The following description will be given taking a kitchen 601 as an example of one living space.

In the kitchen 601 to which the present embodiment 1 is applied, an air purifier 413 is installed on the ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a refrigerator 403 equipped with multiple freezer compartments 403A and refrigerator compartments 403B with different freezing temperatures, and a microwave oven 409 are installed.

Furthermore, the kitchen 601 is equipped with a built-in (induction) cooking appliance 1 arranged on the kitchen furniture 600, a range hood (ventilation device) 407 arranged directly above the cooking appliance 1, and a home gateway 411. Note that in FIG. 5, the electric rice cooker 408, air conditioner 405, and lighting fixture 410 described in FIG. 4 are all omitted from the illustration.

The refrigerator 403 has a "storage compartment" 403H for storing ingredients (hereinafter referred to as "food ingredients") for food (including natural foods, processed foods, etc.). The storage compartment 403H includes the freezer compartment 403A and the refrigerator compartment 403B, and may be divided into specific compartments such as a "vegetable compartment" and a "compartment dedicated to meat and fish" depending on the type of food ingredient.

In the following description of this embodiment 1, it is assumed that the storage chamber 403H is provided with at least two types of chambers: a freezer chamber 403A and a refrigerator chamber 403B which is a space independent of the freezer chamber 403A. Note that the temperatures (freezer temperature and refrigerator temperature) of the internal spaces of the storage chamber 403H may be collectively referred to as the "internal temperature" below.

The refrigerator 403 has multiple freezer compartments 403A, allowing the freezer compartment to be selected with an appropriate freezing temperature (temperature range) for frozen foods (including processed foods) and fresh ingredients (meat, fish, etc.), such as -18°C±2°C, -10°C, or -2°C.

The freezing temperature and freezing temperature range also affect the maturation of fresh food ingredients (e.g., beef) when stored for a long period of time, so even in the same freezer, the freezing temperature and freezing temperature range can be changed as appropriate depending on the type of food ingredient.

As mentioned above, there are a number of different internal temperatures. For example, a room that is set to a temperature close to the freezing point (freezing temperature) is called a "chilled room."
The volumes and shapes of the multiple storage compartments 403H are different, with the refrigerator compartment 403B being the largest. In order to further divide the inside of the storage compartment 403H into multiple compartments, partitions and lids (or doors) may be provided to increase the independent storage space.

The refrigerator 403 is equipped with a cooling device (not shown), for example, an electric compressor 403C, refrigerant piping (not shown), a cold air circulation fan (not shown), a damper (shutter) (not shown) that controls the inflow of cold air into the storage chamber 403H, and the like to configure a refrigeration cycle. The temperature inside the refrigerator can be controlled by changing the operating frequency of the electric compressor or by changing the air volume of the cold air circulation fan.

Refrigerator 403 has a display unit (display screen) 403D at the top center of the front (front face) of the door (not shown). Inside the housing of refrigerator 403 are storage device 403M such as a semiconductor memory, and control device 403U mainly consisting of a microcomputer. The control device 403U issues command signals to the drive circuit (inverter circuit, not shown) of electric compressor 403C, the cool air circulation fan (not shown), the damper (not shown), etc. The control device 403U has a control program (not shown) for controlling the operation of refrigerator 403 as a whole.

403T is a wireless communication unit installed inside the refrigeration 403 housing or on the ceiling outside the housing, and is controlled by the control device 403U. The wireless communication unit 403T can wirelessly communicate with the communication unit 425 (see FIG. 7) of the home gateway 411.

Due to the above-mentioned configuration, the refrigerator 403 is capable of wireless communication with the cooking appliance 1 via the home gateway 411 and can also be connected to the network NW, so that it can obtain various information and data (including the "recipe data CD" described later) of the cooking appliance 1.
Furthermore, refrigerator 403 can also transmit and receive data to and from communication terminal 200 via wireless communication.

If a Peltier element is used as the cooling device for the storage room 403H, the temperature inside the refrigerator can be adjusted by adjusting the power supplied to the Peltier element. The refrigerator 403 may also use both an electric compressor 403C and a Peltier element.

Furthermore, a weight sensor (not shown) for storing specific food ingredients (e.g., eggs, milk, butter, etc.) in the storage room 403H and measuring their weight may be placed therein. The weight sensor measures the weight periodically, and the control device 403U of the refrigerator 403 may collect the data. Such weight data may become part of the inventory data of the refrigerator 403, and is used when the inventory data is queried from the home gateway 411, which is a type of information processing device.

The management database held by the memory unit 403M of the control device 403U of the refrigerator 403 holds the internal temperature (standard value, adjustable temperature range, and minimum adjustable temperature range) of each storage compartment 403H, its volume, and identification information such as the type and name of the main target foodstuff. For example, the freezer compartment 403A holds information such as the standard internal temperature being -10°C, the range being -5°C to -15°C and being adjustable in 20 steps, and the volume being 30 liters. In addition, the maximum dimension (internal dimension) data of the storage compartment 403H may be held. This is because it is used to determine whether solid objects such as pots can be stored as is. The refrigerator 403 can provide all of this data to the outside when responding to an inventory data inquiry from the home gateway 411. In other words, the home gateway 411 can also obtain various data of the storage compartment 403H each time.

The range hood 407 has an exhaust port 427 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 428 communicating with the outdoors is connected to this exhaust port 427.
Reference numeral 430 denotes a box-shaped hood whose entire underside is open as an intake port 430A, and an electric exhaust fan 429 is installed inside the hood. The range hood 430 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, but a detailed description of the configuration will be omitted.

The operating status of the range hood 407 is sent to the central control unit 423 at any time via the communication unit 425 of the home gateway 411. For this reason, the range hood 407 is provided with the communication unit 431 inside, which acts as both a transmitter and a receiver and transmits various operating information such as the start and stop of exhaust operation and the strength of operation (exhaust capacity) between the home gateway 411. In other words, the transmitter and receiver are integrated in hardware and provided as the communication unit 431. This communication unit 431 transmits and receives information between the home gateway 411 and the range hood 407 via wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 429 is rotated, it draws in air from the intake 430A of the range hood 407, sucking in cooking odors and smoke, and exhausts the air outside the house HA through the duct 428. The range hood 407 receives an operation signal, such as an infrared signal, from the cooking appliance 1 and starts exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 5, arrow FF1 indicates the airflow rising from cooking device 1. FF2 indicates the exhaust airflow from duct 427. FF3 indicates the airflow moving sideways near ceiling surface 420. FF4 indicates the (purified) airflow blown out from air purifier 413.

A heat sensor (thermoelectromotive element) may be placed on the range hood 407 facing the cooking appliance 1. With this configuration, the range hood 407 itself detects when the cooking appliance 1 starts operating and controls the operation of the electric fan 429.

The ceiling-embedded air purifier 413 is installed by embedding it in the ceiling surface 420. Inside the box-shaped body 435 of the air purifier 407, a blower fan 436 and a filter 437 are provided.

440 is an air guide plate that covers the entire lower part of the air purifier 413. 432 is an intake port formed at one end (the side closer to the range hood 407) by the air guide plate 431. 433 is an air outlet formed at the end opposite the intake port 432 by the air guide plate 440.

The blower fan 436 draws in dirty air from inside the kitchen 601 through the intake port 432, passes the purified air through the filter 437, and exhausts it from the exhaust port 433 toward the bottom of the kitchen 601. In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed, and the air in the room is purified.

434 is an odor sensor of the air purifier 404, and is arranged so as to face the entrance of the suction port 432. This detects odors in the air taken into the air purifier 413 during operation, and detects the degree of air pollution. The odor sensor 434 can be positioned anywhere in the air duct on the suction port 432 side, and in front of the filter 437, so there is no significant difference in its effectiveness.

The odor sensor 434 detects the odor and the odor intensity is determined by an odor sensing unit (not shown) disposed inside the main body 435 of the air purifier 413, and the result is sent to the environment detection unit 416 of the home gateway 411 as needed. For this reason, the air purifier 413 is provided with a transmitter (not shown) and a receiver (not shown) for transmitting various information between the home gateway 411, such as the start and stop of air purifying operation and the odor intensity determination results. For example, the transmitter and receiver are integrated in hardware as a communication unit 438. The communication unit 438 transmits and receives information between the home gateway 411 and the air purifier 413 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

The air purifier 413 can detect an odor when the air purifier 413 is operating and an odor generated somewhere in the kitchen 601 reaches the air purifier 413 from that location.

This air purifier 413 is generally configured to include one or more filters 437 (multiple layers) having fine air passages in order to capture dust particles, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the oily smoke generated by cooking with edible oil is filtered by the cooking appliance 1, the oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 437 and combine to form an oil film.
This oil film reduces the filtering performance of filter 437. That is, the amount of air passing through filter 437 decreases, leading to a situation in which the air purification ability of air purifier 413 decreases. Therefore, an idea has already been proposed to avoid operating air purifier 413 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by cooking contains oily smoke generated by cooking with oil (for example, Patent Document JP 2016-95126 A).

In FIG. 5, the refrigerator 403 is depicted as being installed near the right side of the kitchen furniture 600, but in an actual situation, it may be installed in a location different from that shown in FIG. 5. Also, multiple refrigerators 403 may be used, rather than just one.

441 denotes a main body case that forms the outer shell of the home gateway 411. This main body case 441 is fixed to the vertical wall surface 439 of the kitchen at a height that allows the resident to check the input operations and display.

445 is an alarm device fixed to the vertical wall surface 439 near the main body case 441, which will be described in detail later. 600D is a water inlet installed in the kitchen furniture 600.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the cooking appliance 1 and the range hood 407.
In Fig. 6, 442 is a temperature monitoring device for the cooking appliance 1. In this embodiment 1, this temperature monitoring device is configured as one component of the range hood 407 in terms of hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 in terms of hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 442 includes a temperature detection unit 443 and a communication unit 446. The temperature detection unit 443 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal imaging camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 444.

As shown in FIG. 6, the temperature monitoring device 442 is a hardware component of the range hood 407, but is always powered regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 407. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 442 is constantly monitoring the temperature even when the range hood 407 is not in exhaust operation. The temperature monitoring device 442 may be configured as an independent device that is attached to the outside or underside of the range hood 407.

The temperature detection unit 443, for example, divides the entire area (plane) of the top plate 3 (described later) into at least 64 areas (8 vertical × 8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as "detection areas") and detects the temperature of each area.

The detection area includes three heating parts (left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and central heating port 4C) of the cooking device 1 described below.
The temperature monitoring device 442 repeatedly measures the temperature of the detection area monitored by the temperature detection unit 443 at predetermined time intervals not only while the range hood 407 is in operation but also while the range hood 407 is not in operation.

The temperature monitoring device 442 transmits the measured temperature monitoring information from the communication unit 446 to the home gateway 411. In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration in which the information is transmitted directly to the cooking appliance 1 may be adopted. Furthermore, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining the temperature monitoring information is not a fixed time (e.g., every 5 seconds), but is shortened in areas where the temperature is high.

The temperature monitoring device 442 detects that the light receiving unit 447 of the range hood 407 has received an infrared signal from the infrared transmitting unit 31 of the cooking appliance 1, and starts acquiring temperature information when the range hood 407 starts operating.

The temperature monitoring device 442 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 407 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 31) indicating the end of operation of the cooking appliance 1. It continues acquiring temperature information at a specified time interval until the estimated temperature of the entire area of the top plate 3 falls below a predetermined temperature (e.g., 40°C). Note that when the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the interval of the temperature measurement operation becomes slower. Note that when the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the above-mentioned monitoring operation may be temporarily terminated, but the temperature monitoring operation is started again at least at the start of operation of the cooking appliance 1.

The cooking device 1 is installed in kitchen furniture 600, which will be described in detail later. 6 is a heating chamber formed inside the cooking device 1, and 7 is a door that can be opened and closed to cover the front opening of the heating chamber 113.

The cooking device 1 has a top plate 3 covering the upper surface thereof on which an object to be heated N (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed, and the object is induction heated by IH coils 9 (9C, 9L, 9R). 32 denotes a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the cooking device 1 into two independent spaces, an upper space and an lower space.
Reference numeral 33 denotes an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 32 inside the cooking appliance 1, in which the IH coil 9 is housed.

Next, we will explain Figure 7. Figure 7 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the home gateway 411, the home appliances 402, and the temperature monitoring device 422. Among the home appliances 402, the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 409 are subject to power consumption control from the home gateway 411.

For this reason, the home gateway 411 also functions as a power command device for the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 409, but this has been explained previously and will not be explained in detail here. Although not shown in FIG. 7, the air conditioner 405 is also a device that is subject to power consumption (upper limit) control.

The power control unit 424 constantly obtains information on the amount of power used by the target home appliances (e.g., the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 409) and has the function of limiting the power consumption of the home appliances 402 so as not to exceed a preset total amount of power, and is already known as a HEMS (home energy management system).

When the power consumption control unit 448 receives information indicating a power reduction request or power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 425, it performs an operation to reduce the power consumption of the target home appliances (e.g., the cooking appliance 1, the microwave oven 409, and the air conditioner 405) according to a predetermined priority order.

In FIG. 7, the home gateway 411 includes an environment detection unit 416 with a built-in human detection unit 416H. The environment detection unit 416 also receives detection results in a specified format from a pollen sensor (not shown) and a sensor unit 416B that detects the temperature and humidity in the kitchen. 416A is a sensor unit that measures the temperature, humidity, etc. in the kitchen 601, as described above.

The human detection unit 416H detects the presence of people in the kitchen 601, particularly in the area in front of the cooking appliance 1 and in front of the door of the refrigerator 403 (not shown), so the sensor unit 416A uses one or more infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, etc.

For example, if the distance between the front of the cooking device 1 and the door of the refrigerator 403 is short, the sensor unit 416A is installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen 601, facing the space between the front of the cooking device 1 and the refrigerator 403.

In addition, if there is a small distance between the front of the cooking appliance 1 and the door of the refrigerator 403, one sensor unit 416A is installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen 601, facing the space near the front of the cooking appliance 1. Then, another sensor unit 416A for the human detection unit 416H can be installed on the ceiling surface 420, facing the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 403. In other words, the number of sensor units 416A for the human detection unit 416H is not limited to one, and any number necessary can be used.

A single sensor unit 416A may be attached to the lower end of the hood 430 of the range hood 407 to detect the presence of a user US in front of the cooking appliance 1.
As described above, the location of sensor unit 416A of human detection unit 416H may be appropriately determined taking into consideration the positional relationship between refrigerator 403 and cooking appliance 1 and the sensing capability (sensing range) of the human detection unit.

The human detection unit 416H functions as one of the sensors of the environment detection unit 416, but it may also function as an independent integrated detection device that constitutes one part of a home presence detection device (not shown) for detecting the presence of a human inside the house HA, i.e., in the kitchen 601, etc. In that case, information from an unlocking sensor that detects that the front door (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked can also be used by the home presence detection device. This can improve the accuracy of the process of determining whether someone is at home or not.

The input unit 421 can set various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating touch input keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen. One of the functions is to identify the home appliance 402 for which an upper limit on power consumption is to be set, and then to set the upper limit on power consumption and the time period during which the appliance can be used. For example, the user US can input the maximum power consumption of the cooking appliance 1 as, for example, 4800W or 5400W.

The input unit 421 has a function for inputting information by operating touch input keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen, as well as a function for inputting information by voice, and various desired functions can be input by the resident directing their voice into a microphone unit (not shown).

445 is the alarm device that issues an alarm to the occupants by means of sound or light. The central control unit 423 receives measurement data from the environment detection unit 416 and monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 422, and the alarm device 445 transmits an alarm instruction signal. Note that since this alarm device 445 is not subject to control by the power consumption control unit 424, the power supply to the alarm device 445 itself is not restricted or cut off due to changes in the power consumption of the home appliance 402.

As shown in FIG. 7, the home gateway 411 includes a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) 425 , a central control unit 423 , and a storage device 426 .
The communication unit 425 is a communication unit capable of wireless communication or infrared communication with the home electric appliances 402 such as the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 403 individually.

In FIG. 7, the storage device 426 is a device that records a relatively large amount of information, such as the operation history information of the home gateway 411, the daily power control history information of the home appliance 402, and further the daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 416. The storage device 426 is, for example, various semiconductor memories or HDDs.

The central control unit 423 has a microcomputer that is the core of information processing. It also has built-in ROM and RAM for the CPU of the microcomputer to read and write (store) data. The ROM stores computer programs that define various operations.

In FIG. 7, 419 is a wide area communication network (Internet) that performs wireless communication with the communication unit (receiver/transmitter) 425. Note that, although only one communication unit 425 is shown in FIG. 7, a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) for the home appliance 402 and a communication unit for the wide area communication network (Internet) 419 may be provided separately. Also, a separate NFC communication unit may be provided so that information can be directly exchanged by wireless communication with the NFC (near field communication) provided in the communication terminal 200.

427 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store event schedule information for at least one month (maximum 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In this embodiment 1, the input unit 421 can be used to register the scheduled date and scheduled start time (or time period) of an event (e.g., shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident.

When event information is stored in the schedule management unit 427, a notification is issued from the schedule management unit 427 at the stored date and time. The notification may be displayed on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 421 or be notified by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Alternatively, a method of issuing a notification to the communication terminal device 200 carried by the resident (also called a "push-type notification") may also be used.

When a home appliance 402 such as a cooking appliance 1 is activated, a notification may be sent to the cooking appliance 1 or the refrigerator 403 based on the event information registered from the schedule management unit 427.

(3. Configuration of Cooking Device)
Next, the configuration of the cooking device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
8 and 9, cooking device 1 is a built-in type induction cooking heater that is incorporated into kitchen furniture 600 that has a cooking counter on top. Cooking device 1 has a main body 2 and a top plate 3 installed on main body 2. Top plate 3 is exposed above a kitchen countertop that constitutes the top surface of kitchen furniture 600.

The top plate 3 is composed of, for example, a heat-resistant glass plate and a metal frame attached around the glass plate. Three heating ports 4 are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 3: a left heating port 4L, a right heating port 4R, and a central heating port 4C.

The left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C indicate the area where a metal cooking container such as a pot or frying pan (also referred to as the "heated object" N for the first heating means HM1) is placed. Guide marks (not shown) that serve as guides for placing the heated object on the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C are printed on the upper surface of the top plate 3.

An exhaust port cover 5 is provided on the rear side (rear side) of the top plate 3. The exhaust port cover 5 is made of a punched metal or lattice-shaped metal member with numerous small through holes, and is breathable throughout with little air resistance. Exhaust air released from inside the cooking appliance 1 passes through the exhaust port cover 5 and exits the cooking appliance 1.

A door (heating door) 7 is provided on the front of the main body 2 of the cooking device 1 to open and close the front opening of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 9) located inside the main body 2. The door 7 is provided with a handle 8 for opening and closing it.

Figure 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment, seen from the side. As shown in Figure 9, an induction heating coil 9L (hereinafter referred to as the "left IH coil") is provided below the left heating port 4L as a left induction heating means.

Similarly, an induction heating coil 9R (hereafter referred to as the "right IH coil") serving as a right induction heating means is provided below the right heating port 4R, and an induction heating coil 9C (hereafter referred to as the "central IH coil") serving as a central induction heating means is provided below the central heating port 4C.

These IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R are circular heating coils made by winding thin conductors such as copper or aluminum wires, and generate a high-frequency magnetic field when a high-frequency current is supplied to them. This causes induction heating of the cooking vessels (objects to be heated N) placed over the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C.

The heating means including the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R and their drive circuits (high-frequency power supply circuits such as inverter circuits, not shown) may be referred to as the induction heating source or first heating means HM1. In the following description, the term "first heating means" HM1 will be used unless there is a particular contradiction.

A temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 16) consisting of multiple temperature sensors (not shown) is mounted near the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R to detect the temperature of the top plate 3 and cooking vessel (heated object). One temperature sensor 30A (not shown) constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. The temperature sensor here may be either or both of a contact type temperature sensor such as a thermistor and a non-contact type temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor.

The heating chamber 6 is provided inside the main body 2, below the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. The heating chamber 6 is surrounded by metal walls such as stainless steel, and is a space for heating the food (foodstuffs, ingredients) contained within the heating chamber 6.

The food to be cooked may be placed on a heat-resistant plastic container, a porcelain or heat-resistant glass dish, or may be placed inside a container and placed in the heating chamber 6, in which case the dish or container may be called the "heated container." However, since these containers are not induction heated by the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, even if they are placed on the heating port 4 of the top plate 3, they are not called the "heated food" N of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R.

A horizontally long rectangular opening (not shown) is formed in the front of the heating chamber 6 for inserting and removing the food to be cooked. The opening in the front of the heating chamber 6 is covered by a door 7 that can be opened and closed freely. The door 7 is supported by the main body 2 so that it can rotate freely via a hinge and an arm (not shown). This allows the door 7 to open forward to a horizontal position with its lower end as the fulcrum (center of rotation). The door 7 may be pulled forward integrally with a support member (a structure such as a shelf, not shown) that supports the heated container from below, by a slide rail (not shown).

The door 7 is provided with an opening/closing detector 10 for detecting whether the door 7 is open or closed. The opening/closing detector 10 is, for example, a microswitch or an infrared sensor. A microwave oscillator 11 is provided behind the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber 6. The microwave oscillator 11 is, for example, composed of a magnetron, and irradiates microwaves into the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber, which is known as range heating.

The heating means including the microwave oscillator 11 and its drive circuit (a high-frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be referred to as the second heating means HM2.

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with an upper radiant heat heating means 12a and a lower radiant heat heating means 12b, which heat the food from above and below using so-called heaters. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a is located on the outer or inner ceiling wall surface of the heating chamber 6, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is located on the inner or outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6, and both are sheath heaters.

Other types of radiant heat heating means (e.g., mica heaters, carbon heaters, etc.) may be installed outside the heating chamber 6. Figure 5 shows an example in which the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are both installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6.

The heating means including the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b and their drive circuits (not shown) may be referred to as the third heating means HM3. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b may be collectively referred to as the "radiant heat heating means", in which case the reference number "12" is used.

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with an infrared sensor 13 as a non-contact temperature sensor to detect the temperature of the food inside the heating chamber 6 without contact. The temperature range detected by this infrared sensor 13 is set to, for example, -20°C to 100°C. This allows the degree of heating of the food to be detected in real time with high accuracy, for example in 1°C increments. This infrared sensor 13 also constitutes one sensor in the group of temperature sensors 30 (see Figure 16).

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with a contact temperature sensor (e.g., a thermistor sensor) 14, which is an interior temperature sensor that detects the ambient temperature inside the heating chamber 6 or the wall temperature of the heating chamber 6.

The thermistor sensor 14 detects temperature by detecting changes in electrical resistance, and therefore the upper limit of the temperature it can detect is approximately 250°C. This thermistor sensor 14 constitutes one of the temperature sensors 30. The thermistor sensor 14 may be installed in two locations, near the bottom and near the ceiling of the heating chamber 6, as shown in Figure 9.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
Fig. 10 is a top view of the cooking device 1 according to embodiment 1. As shown in Fig. 10, a left operation unit 15L, a central operation unit 15M, and a right operation unit 15R are provided on the front side of the upper surface of the top plate 3 of the cooking device 1. These three operation units may be collectively referred to as "input operation units", in which case the reference numeral 15 is used.

At the rear (rear) side of the left operation unit 15L, the central operation unit 15M and the right operation unit 15R, there are a left heating power display unit 17L, a central display unit 16M and a right heating power display unit 17R, a left display unit 16L and a right display unit 16R and a central heating status display unit 17M.

The left display unit 16L, the center display unit 16M, and the right display unit 16R may be collectively referred to as the "display unit", in which case the reference number 16 is used. The center display unit 16M has a horizontally long liquid crystal display screen.

The left heat display unit 17L and the right heat display unit 17R display the heat level using light-emitting elements (such as LEDs) and do not have a display screen.

The left heating power display unit 17L, the right heating power display unit 17R, and the center heating status display unit 17M may be collectively referred to as the "heat power display units", in which case the reference number 17 will be used.

Also, adjacent to the right operation unit 15R is provided an operation button (key) 20A for the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 16). The main power switch 20 turns the main power supply of the cooking device 1 on and off. The button (key) that is pressed to switch the power supply on and off is the operation button 20A.

When the main power supply of the cooking device 1 is OFF, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds turns the main power supply ON. Also, when the main power supply of the cooking device 1 is ON, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds turns the main power supply OFF.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
11, an input key 180 for selecting a voice input mode is disposed in a central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch-type input switch like input keys 153M to 159M described later.

When the input key 180 for selecting the voice input is pressed once, the next input can be made by voice.
When this input key 180 is pressed, the state is switched to "voice input mode 2."
However, this input key 180 cannot select the heating means or the heating port (first heating means HM1) by voice.

Therefore, the input key 180 must be operated following a touch operation ("short press") of the input key 153L to select the heating port 4L, for example. In other words, if the input key 153L is "long pressed", the mode can be switched to voice input mode 2, but if the input key is "short pressed" instead of "long pressed", the mode can be switched to voice input mode 2 from that point on by pressing the input key 180 after that.
In the central operation unit 15M, when any one of the input keys 153M, 154M, or 155M is touched and then the input key 180 is operated, the mode is switched to the "voice input mode 2", and the input processing unit (input limiting unit) 70 in the control device 40 sets the voice signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 16) to an input standby state. Even if the input key 180 is touched, the input functions of the five input keys, namely the input key 153M, the input key 151M for starting the heating operation, the input key 152M for stopping, and the input keys 153L and 153R of the left and right operation units 15L and 15R, are not affected in any way. Furthermore, when these five input keys are touched, the "voice input mode 2" by the input key 180 is released.

As described above, the "voice input mode 2" set by inputting this input key 180 is different from the "voice input mode 1" that is set according to the touch pattern of specific (touch-type) input keys such as the various touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, 155M, etc., as described below.

When the input key 180 is pressed, "voice input mode 2" is activated from that moment. In other words, it becomes "voice input mode 2". Then, as described in FIG. 16, when a voice signal is received from the voice signal receiving unit 56, the voice signal analyzing unit 58 analyzes the contents of the voice one by one and outputs the analysis results to the heating control unit 43.

The "range in which the input key 180 for selecting voice input disables touch input" may be limited to only the central operation unit 15M. In this way, when the input key 180 is pressed, the input function of specific (touch-type) input keys such as the various touch-type input keys 154M to 159M arranged on the central operation unit 15M is disabled as described below. Then, the device transitions to an input standby state in which voice commands from the user US are accepted. Note that since touch input cannot be disabled by this input key 180 after the heating operation has started, there is no restriction on input of various input keys (for example, a stop command by 152M) during the heating operation.

21M is a light emitting unit that emits light when the input function of the input key 180 is enabled and continues to emit light until the input function is disabled. Each of the light emitting units 21M has one or more light emitting elements 27 (see FIG. 16) such as LEDs arranged therein, and is driven by a light emission control unit 26 (see FIG. 16).

In the central operation section 15M, adjacent to the left of the input key 153M, an input key 151KP for setting functions is located.

In this embodiment 1, the input mode in which the user US controls the cooking appliance 1 by pressing with a fingertip or the like (including light contact) is called the "touch input mode." For this reason, the various input keys 151M to 159M, 151R to 155R, and 151L to 155L described below may be called the "touch input mode selection unit."

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
12 is an enlarged view of the left display unit 16L, the left heating power display unit 17L, and the left operation unit 15L according to embodiment 1. The left display unit 16L displays information related to cooking in the left heating port 4L, and is formed, for example, of a liquid crystal display.

The left display unit 16L displays the set time for "timer cooking" for the heated object N placed on the left heating port 4L, the elapsed time since the heating operation at the left heating port 4L started, or the remaining time until the timer set time ends.

The "timer cooking" is a cooking function that heats the food for a period of time (set time) that is set (input) by the user US (using the input key 151L), and since the heating operation stops automatically when the set time has elapsed, this is a convenient function for the user US.

When preheat cooking is selected using the left heating port 4L, the left display unit 16L displays the automatically set temperature (default temperature) or the current temperature. The automatically set temperature (default temperature) refers to the target temperature of the bottom surface of the heated object (e.g., a metal pan) N when the heated object is heated using the left heating port 4L. The default temperature can be changed by the user US within a certain range. Also, the target temperature can be set to any temperature by touching the input keys 155R and 154R, for example (however, if the temperature setting exceeds a certain allowable range, the heating control unit 43 will reject the input).

The left heating power display unit 17L is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) arranged in a horizontal line, and displays the heating power of the left heating port 4L in multiple stages. The left heating power display unit 17L expresses the heating power by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of the multiple LEDs or by switching the lighting color. This allows the user US to be notified of the heating power in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

The left operation section 15L is used to input operations related to cooking using the left heating port 4L.
12, the left operation unit 15L includes five input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. These input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L are touch keys. For example, they are electrostatic capacitance type touch sensors (touch switches) that can input by utilizing a change in electrostatic capacitance when the user US lightly touches them with a finger or the like.

Light-emitting units 21L are provided corresponding to the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. The light-emitting units 21L are composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs), and emit light in response to the operation of the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. Note that two adjacent input keys 154L and 155L share one light-emitting unit 21L because they perform the same type of function, that is, increasing and decreasing the flame power.

The input key 151L is a key that is touched to select "timer cooking" for the left heating port 4L. As described above, this timer cooking is a cooking method in which the user US sets the time for the heating operation and the heating operation is performed only for the set time.

The input key 152L is a key that is pressed when selecting a "control menu" to be implemented by the left heating port 4L. Each time the input key 152L is pressed, one of multiple control menus can be selected. The "control menu" referred to here is, for example, boiling water, stewing, deep frying (automatic cooking), etc. The operating time, heat power, operating pattern, etc. of the left heating port 4L differs for each control menu.

The control menu for using the left heating port 4L and the right heating port 4R by operating the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R without operating the central operation unit 15M is the control menu for the "single cooking mode" KM1, which uses induction heating only. The "single cooking mode" KM1 will be explained later.

The input key 153L is a key that is pressed to select cooking using the left heating port 4L. That is, by pressing the input key 153L, cooking using the left IH coil 9L located below the left heating port 4L (single cooking mode KM1) is selected. When the input key 153L is pressed again while this left IH coil 9L is being driven, the driving of the left IH coil 9L is stopped and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154L and 155L are pressed to specify the heat level for cooking with the left heating port 4L. Pressing the input key 154L on the left decreases the heat level by one level. Conversely, pressing the input key 155L on the right increases the heat level by one level. The heat level for induction cooking with the left heating port 4L has nine levels, ranging from the minimum rated heat level (heat level 1: 150 W) to the maximum rated heat level (heat level 9: 3200 W).

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
13 is an enlarged view of the right display unit 16R, the right heating power display unit 17R, and the right operation unit 15R according to the first embodiment. The right display unit 16R displays information related to cooking in the right heating port 4R, and is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display. The information related to cooking in the right heating port 4R displayed on the right display unit 16R is the same as the information related to cooking in the left heating port 4L.

The right heating power display unit 17R is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) and displays the heating power of the right heating port 4R in multiple stages. Like the left heating power display unit 17L, the right heating power display unit 17R indicates the heating power by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of the multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) or by switching the lighting color.

The right operation unit 15R is used to input operations related to cooking using the right heating port 4R. As shown in FIG. 13, the right operation unit 15R has five input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R.

The input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R are configured in the same manner as the left operation unit 15L. For example, they are configured as capacitive touch keys that can input by utilizing the change in capacitance when the user US lightly touches them with a finger or the like.

A light-emitting unit 21R is provided corresponding to each of the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R. The light-emitting unit 21R is a light-emitting element (LED), and the light-emitting unit 21R corresponding to each input key lights up in response to the operation of the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R. However, the two adjacent input keys 154R and 155R share one light-emitting unit 21R because they perform the same type of function, increasing and decreasing the flame power.

The input key 151R is a key that is pressed when selecting timer cooking for the right heating port 4R. The input key 152R is a key that is pressed when selecting a control menu to be implemented for the right heating port 4R.

The input key 153R is a key that is pressed to select cooking using the right heating port 4R. That is, pressing the input key 153R selects cooking (single cooking mode KM1) using the right IH coil 9R located below the left heating port 4R. When the input key 153R is pressed again while this right IH coil 9R is being driven, the drive of the right IH coil 9R is stopped and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154R and 154R are pressed to specify the heat level for cooking with the right heating port 4R. Pressing the left input key 154R decreases the heat level by one level. Conversely, pressing the right input key 155R increases the heat level by one level. The heat level for induction cooking with the right heating port 4R has nine levels, ranging from a minimum rated heat level (heat level 1) of 150W to a maximum rated heat level (heat level 9) of 3200W.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of the central display unit 16M, the central operation unit 15M, and the central heating status display unit 17M according to the first embodiment.

The central display unit 16M displays information and warnings about the entire cooking device 1, and is composed of a liquid crystal display. The display screen of the central display unit 16M displays the selection result of the induction heating means (first heating means) HM1, the microwave heating means (second heating means) HM2, and the radiant heat heating means (third heating means) HM3, the operating status of each heating means, and caution information or warning information for cooking with each heating means.

The central display unit 16M is a single LCD display in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. 14, it has three display areas: a first display area 22 on the left, a second display area 23 in the center left and right, and a third display area 24 on the right, and it is possible to display different things in each display area.

The three display areas 22 to 24 may also be linked together as appropriate depending on the display situation to form a single (large-area) display area, and may display one or more purposes. In the following, the first display area 22 will be referred to as the first area 22. The second display area 23 will be referred to as the second area 23. The third display area 24 will be referred to as the third area 24.

The central heating status display section 17M is divided into two sections in the front-to-rear direction, and the lower section (front side) has a range light-emitting element (LED) 310 behind the section displaying the text "range", a grill light-emitting element (LED) 311 behind the section displaying the text "grill", an oven light-emitting element (LED) 312 behind the section displaying the text "oven", and a central IH light-emitting element (LED) 313 behind the section displaying the text "central IH".

At the top (rear) are warning letters saying "Caution: High Temperature" and a group of high temperature warning light emitting diodes (LEDs) 314 arranged in front and below a diagram that typically represents the heating chamber 6 and the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R.

The high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314 is composed of a heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a and an IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b arranged on the left and right.

The heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a lights up when the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.
The IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b lights up when any of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C is operating or when the temperature of the top plate 3 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.

The central operation unit 15M is used to input operations mainly related to cooking in the heating chamber 6 and cooking using the central heating port 4C.
As shown in FIG. 14, the central operation unit 15M includes nine input keys 151M, 152M, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, and 159M, and a function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 11).

The nine input keys 151M to 159M are capacitive touch keys that emit an input command signal each time they are touched. In addition, light emitting units 21M are provided near each of the input keys 151M to 159M.

The function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 11) is located on the leftmost side of the central operation unit 15M. This function setting key 151KP is used to set the various operations and displays of the entire cooking device 1 according to the user US's wishes.

When the function setting key 151KP is pressed, the control device 40, which will be described later, switches to a "function setting mode", and displays a "function setting menu" such as the one shown below on the display screen of the central display section 16M.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys).
(2) Setting the ventilation device 407 to linked mode.
(3) Cleaning guide setting (setting of automatic notification function for when to clean heating chamber 6 and exhaust port cover 5).
(4) Peak cut setting (select one of four maximum power consumption levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W).
(5) Audio guide audio settings.
(6) Audio guide volume settings.
(7) Settings to prevent food, cooking utensils, etc. from being forgotten to be removed from the heating chamber 6 (whether or not an alarm is required by the audio notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M).
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limiting function of the home power control device).
(9) Setting the time unit for timer cooking (change the 1-minute setting to 5-minute or 30-minute units).
(10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode.
(11) Setting the type (range) of inventory information to be acquired from an external device (refrigerator 403).
(12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed as default, identification information 167) of each cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
(13) Setting the display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as default) of each control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "Grill in the microwave" and "Pre-boil leafy vegetables").
(14) Setting the cooking mode to be automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M when the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned “ON” (such as the display priority between the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2).
(15) A setting for preventing the automatic display of additional information 165 and 166 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, and a setting for preventing the audio notification unit 50 from notifying the additional information 165 and 166 by audio.
(16) When each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the central display unit 16M, the ingredients and nutritional components of the target cooking item (food) are displayed individually each time. Note that either the food ingredients or the nutrients or both may be displayed, but in this embodiment 1, the input key 158M is used as a display command key for food ingredients, and the input key 159M is used as a display command key for nutritional components.
When either input key 158M or 159M is operated within a specified period of time, or when voice input mode 1 is set and a voice command is given, food ingredients or nutritional ingredients are displayed. In other words, they are not always displayed together with cooking menu identification information 167 (described later) but are displayed in response to the operation (including voice) of the user US. Details will be described with reference to FIG. 30.
(17) When selecting individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a setting to search for cooking menu candidates based on the ingredients and nutritional components of food and display them on the central display unit 16M. In this case, the user US can search by voice by pressing the input key 180 to set to "voice input mode 2." Details will be described in FIG. 30.
(18) Setting the display priority of each cooking menu in the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
In relation to the setting of a specific cooking menu to be displayed by default, either the food components or the nutritional components should be set as the top priority item for display. By setting this, for example, cooking menus can be displayed in ascending order of energy amount (calorie value) among nutritional components as shown in Figure 30. Alternatively, cooking menus can be displayed in descending order of the amount of "iron" as a nutritional component.

As explained above, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed to select the "function setting mode," it is possible to add the display of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients, and it is also possible to set the display setting to be cancelled in the function setting mode after it has been set. This has the advantage that the information, range and display method to be set can be selected according to the wishes of the user US.

The "beginner mode" is an optional function for people (users US) who are not familiar with using the cooking device 1. When the beginner mode is selected, the voice guidance in the voice notification unit 50 (see FIG. 16) becomes more detailed and thorough. In addition, more voice guidance is provided for input operations in the input operation unit 15, and more information is displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M.

When the beginner mode is set, particularly in the case of cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, the amount of reference information (including, for example, additional information 165, 166 described below) displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M increases in cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, or the content of the voice guidance in the voice notification unit 50 increases. This enhances the function of supporting the input operation of the user US.

In addition, in conjunction with switching from the "beginner mode" to the "normal (expert) mode", the content of the voice guidance from the voice notification unit 50 may be automatically set to not change.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 described below is turned "ON," the cooking mode setting that is automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M is to set either the linked cooking mode KM3 or the composite cooking mode KM2. Since both the linked cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2 use the same central display unit 16M, the user US can set the display of either one to take priority. This will be explained in detail later.

In the first embodiment, the "combined cooking mode" KM2 exceptionally includes several control menus for the single cooking mode KM1 using the central IH coil 9M (for example, the food being cooked, "cooked rice").

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned “ON”, the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has been opened.
There is a function that presumes that the user US will be cooking using the heating chamber 6, and automatically displays either the first specific screen 16M1 for the linked cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 16M2 for the composite cooking mode KM2 on the central display unit 16M.
In addition, immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the central display section 16M displays a standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later. After that, immediately after the door 7 is opened, the second specific screen 16M2 is automatically displayed.

After the "Function Setting Menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M, by "pressing and holding" (hereinafter referred to as "long press") a specific input key (e.g., 154M) other than the function setting key 151KP for a certain period of time or longer, one setting menu from the "Function Setting Menu" can be selected, and the desired setting contents can be subsequently changed.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys other than the function setting key 151KP are pressed and held simultaneously, one of the setting menus from the function setting menu described above can be called up and the desired settings can be changed.

The term "long press" refers to a state in which the button is pressed continuously for five seconds or more, for example.
The control device 40 judges whether the state is the "long press" state by comparing the timing of the touch input from ON to OFF in the central operation unit 15M with a reference value. Alternatively, the input mode judgment unit 15C (see FIG. 17) in the central operation unit 15 judges whether the state is the "long press" state.
In the first embodiment, an example will be described (later with reference to FIG. 17) in which the central operation unit 15M determines whether the "long press" state is being performed.

In addition, in the central operation unit 15M, the timing when the two input keys (e.g., 154M and 155M) are pressed simultaneously can be determined by the "ON" (touch) signal sent from the input operation unit 15M to the control device 40.

In the following explanation, an embodiment in which the input operation unit 15M determines whether or not a "long press" has occurred will be described. However, although not adopted in the first embodiment, there is also a method in which the input operation unit 15M measures the time from the "ON" signal to the time when it changes to an "OFF" signal, transmits that data to the control device 40, and the control device 40 determines whether or not a "long press" has occurred.

In the first embodiment, there is a function for determining the above-mentioned "long press" of a specific input key (for example, 154M, 153R) and switching to the "voice input mode 1" mentioned above.
This will be explained in more detail in FIG. 16 and FIG.
Note that a touch operation that is not a "long press", i.e., a continuous touch state for less than 5 seconds, may be called a "short press". Since this is related to the detection capabilities of the input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R, for example, if the touch time is within the range of 0.1 to 4.9 seconds, the control device 40 determines that it is a "short press".

The type (range) of inventory information obtained from the refrigerator 403 may be, for example, limited to only frozen foods, or limited to only food ingredients that can be heated by a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2).

When the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heat, time, etc.) of the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 are being selected in the central display section 16M, the input function of the function setting key 151KP is disabled so that the function setting mode is not switched.

Next, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking appliance 1 will be described.
Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W when installed in the home of the user US.

In this way, the functions of the cooking appliance 1 can be changed by the function setting key 151KP described above according to the wishes of the user US and the usage environment (electricity situation of the home where the appliance is installed). When the peak cut value is set in this way, the setting result is stored in the control device 40, and is used to determine whether or not to permit use of the linked cooking mode KM3 (determination of permission conditions) when the user US selects the linked cooking mode KM3 as described below. Therefore, while the recipe data CD described below is being received from the communication terminal device 200, the peak cut value cannot be changed by the function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 11).

14, the light emitting section 21M is composed of an LED, and emits light in response to the operation of the input keys 151M to 159M. That is, when the input function is enabled, the corresponding light emitting section 21M continues to emit light.
The two adjacent input keys 155M and 154M have in common the function of changing the display content of the first area 22, and therefore share one light emitting section 21M.

The two adjacent input keys 157M and 156M share one light emitting section 21M since they have a common function of changing the display content of the second area 23.
The two adjacent input keys 159M and 158M have in common the function of changing the display content of the third area 24, and therefore share one light emitting section 21M.

The input key 151M is a start key that is pressed (touched) to start cooking, and the input key 152M is a cancel key that is pressed (touched) to stop or end cooking.

The input key 153M is an input key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first input key") that selects the "linked cooking mode" KM3 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON.

When input keys 154M and 155M are operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing input key 153M), they are input keys that select the "combined cooking mode" KM2 (hereinafter, they may be referred to as the "second input key").

The input keys 153R and 153L described in FIG. 13 are input keys (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "third input key") that select the "single cooking mode" KM1 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M).

The input key 151M has a function to decide the start of cooking for the two cooking modes, "composite cooking mode" KM2 and "linked cooking mode" KM3, and may be referred to as the "start key" below. In the "single cooking mode" KM1, the input keys 153L and 153R have a function to decide the start of cooking.

The input key 152M has a function to end (including pausing) cooking in the two cooking modes, the "combined cooking mode" KM2 and the "linked cooking mode" KM3, and may be referred to as the "stop key" below. In the "single cooking mode" KM1, the input keys 153L and 153R have a function to determine the end of cooking.

The input keys 154M and 155M shown in FIG. 14 are input keys (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "second input key") that select the "combined cooking mode" KM2 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing the input key 153M).

The four input keys 156M to 159M have the function of allowing the user US to adjust (within a certain range) control conditions such as microwave output and cooking time, and may be referred to as the "condition input keys" or "fourth input key" below.

The four input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R are also called "voice input switching keys" that can switch to the "voice input mode 1". However, these four input keys only function as "voice input switching keys" when the touch operation is a "long press". This will be explained in detail later with reference to Figures 16 and 17.

When any one of the "single cooking mode" KM1, "composite cooking mode" KM2, and "linked cooking mode" KM3 is selected, the selection result is displayed on the central display section 16M. Also, when the "voice input mode 1" is switched to, a message to that effect is displayed (see Figures 27 and 28). The "single cooking mode", "composite cooking mode", and "linked cooking mode" will be explained in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 14, the input keys 154M and 155M are located adjacent to the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M, near the front of it, and are used to switch the display content of the screen displayed in the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 15 is a plan view of the central display section 16M.
When the input key 154M is pressed, that is, operated by the user US, the content displayed in the first area 22, for example, the display information 25A of "Microwave manual" in one control menu belonging to the "composite cooking mode" KM2, moves backward. At the same time, the display information 25B of "Pre-boil leafy vegetables" displayed in the front is displayed in the center. Note that the input key 154M in this case is the case of the "short press" described above, and in the case of a "long press," it functions as the "voice input switching key," which will be described in FIG. 17.

In addition, when the input key 155M is pressed, that is, operated by the user US, the display information 25A of "Microwave Manual" displayed in the first area 22 moves forward, and the display information 25C of "Heating" displayed at the rear is displayed in the center. Note that, unlike the input key 154M described above, the input key 155M in this case is not the "voice input switching key," and therefore the input function does not change between a "short press" and a "long press" (for example, a long press is not recognized as a valid input operation).

In this way, the user US can select a specific control menu (e.g., "Manual Range") from the "Control Menu" by operating input keys 154M and 155M.

The "manual range" control menu originally belongs to the "single cooking mode KM1" which uses only the second heating means HM2, but in addition to this, the control menus (for combined cooking) belonging to the "combined cooking mode M2" and the "linked cooking mode KM3" respectively, as well as the control menus and linked cooking menus (for example, "hamburger steak") belonging to linked cooking menus are also displayed in the first area 22.

Then, by pressing the input key (start key) 151M, that is, by operating it by the user US, in the case of FIG. 14, "Microwave Manual" is selected from the control menu displayed in the center. The corresponding heating starts, that is, the heating means (in this case, the microwave oscillation source 11) is driven. Thus, the input keys 154M and 155M correspond to the selection keys of the control menu operated by the user US. Similarly, they correspond to the selection keys of the control menu (for composite cooking). Furthermore, they also correspond to the selection keys of the linked cooking menu.

As shown in FIG. 14, input keys 156M and 157M are located adjacent to and in front of the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M, and are used to switch the display content of the screen displayed in the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M.

To explain again using the example of FIG. 15, by pressing input key 156M, the wattage (microwave output value) displayed in second area 23 ("500W" in FIG. 15) is increased by one step (e.g., to "600W"). Conversely, by pressing input key 157M, the wattage displayed in second area 23 is decreased by one step (e.g., to "200W").

By operating input keys 156M and 157M, the user US can select the wattage (microwave output value) for range cooking performed in the heating chamber 6 (a type of "single cooking mode M3" using the microwave oscillator 11).

As shown in FIG. 14, input keys 158M and 159M are located adjacent to and in front of the third area 24 of the central display unit 16M, and are used to switch the display content displayed in the third area 24.

To explain using the example of FIG. 15, when input key 158M is pressed, the heating operation time (set time) displayed in the third area 24 is increased by one step. Conversely, when input key 159M is pressed, the heating operation time displayed in the third area 24 is decreased by one step.

The user US can select the set time for microwave cooking to be performed in the heating chamber 6 by operating the input keys 158M and 159M, and 34M is the set time information. Note that 34W is heating intensity information that indicates the amount of power consumed during heating and the amount of microwave output, etc.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 16 is a control block diagram showing main functions of the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 16, the cooking appliance 1 includes a control device 40 that performs integrated control of the entire cooking appliance 1 .

The control device 40 is an electronic circuit board on which electronic components such as a control circuit that controls the operation of each part of the cooking device 1 are mounted. The control device 40 controls the operation of the left IH coil 9L, the right IH coil 9R, and the center IH coil 9C (not shown) based on the operation of the left operating unit 15L and the right operating unit 15R, and the temperature of the heated object on the top plate 3.

The control device 40 controls the operation of the central IH coil 9C, the microwave heating means 11, the upper radiant heat heating means 12a, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b based on the operation of the central operation unit 15M, the temperature of the heated object N on the top plate 3, and the detection results of the infrared sensor 13 and the thermistor sensor 14.

The control device 40 also controls the display of the left display unit 16L, the right display unit 16R, the left heating power display unit 17L, and the right heating power display unit 17R based on the operation of the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R.

Furthermore, the control device 40 controls the display of the central display unit 16M and the central heating status display unit 17M based on the open signal from the open/close detection unit 10 and the operation of the left operation unit 15L, the right operation unit 15R, and the central operation unit 15M.

The control device 40 has a storage device 41 that stores various programs and data such as parameters used to control the cooking device 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "control data"), and data for the display screens displayed on the display units 16L, 16R, 16M, 17L, and 17R (hereinafter referred to as "display condition data"). The control device 40 also activates the audio notification unit 50 as necessary, and notifies the user US of the operating status of the cooking device 1 by audio.

The control device 40 stores data in a specific format, such as various programs and information on parameters used in the heating cooking control of the heating control unit 43, in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41. This data is the recipe data CD mentioned above. As will be explained later, the cooking device 1 is provided with recipe data CD corresponding to each of the eight cooking menus in the linked cooking mode KM3 from the start.

The "recipe data" CD and "display condition data" can be obtained by the cooking appliance 1 for each individual cooking menu from an external device such as a smartphone 200, which is a type of communication terminal device.

42 is a storage unit that stores the recipe data CD and the display condition data. The storage unit 42 may constitute one section (area) in the storage device 41, or may be configured as a separate hardware unit from the storage device 41.

Reference numeral 43 denotes a heating control section which performs integrated control of the entire heating operation of the cooking device 1 and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
Reference numeral 53 denotes a data acquisition unit, which acquires the recipe data CD from the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. There are also cases where the "display condition data" is acquired from the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. The external server 417 is included in the cloud server 300.

51 is a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside, and has a function of performing wireless communication 400 with the smartphone 200 as shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 3. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, it has a function of forming a network NW (203, 204, 205) with the cloud server 300.

Reference numeral 54 denotes an authorization condition determination unit that performs a process of determining whether or not cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 is permitted.
Reference numeral 57 denotes a power supply circuit, which supplies power of a constant voltage to the control device 40. Reference numeral 20 denotes a main power supply switch inserted in this power supply circuit 57.

A limiting section 55 limits the acquisition of the recipe data CD.
The restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting the data acquisition unit 53 from acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 during the waiting period before starting cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 (i.e., before the “cooking process 1” described below).

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of one cooking menu is completed based on recipe data CD acquired from outside.
The restriction unit 55 may be realized by a single control program of a computer (not shown) constituting the control device 40, and it is not necessarily required that the restriction unit 55 be configured as a separate hardware component from the control device 40.

As shown in FIG. 16, the input operation unit 15 has a voice signal receiving unit 56 that receives voice uttered by the user US through a microphone (not shown) and converts it into a predetermined voice signal.

On the other hand, the control device 40 is provided with an audio signal analysis unit 58 that receives an audio signal from the audio signal receiving unit 56 and analyzes the content of the audio. The audio signal analysis unit 58 compares the content of the audio received by the audio signal receiving unit 56 with the information in the audio database in the storage device 41, analyzes the content of the audio, and transmits the analysis result to the heating control unit 43.

70 is an input processing unit. Upon receiving an input signal from the input operation unit 15, the input processing unit 70 switches its own input reception mode to "voice input mode 1". It also controls the input signal analysis unit 52. Furthermore, upon receiving the analysis result from the voice signal analysis unit 58, it transmits control data to the heating control unit 43.

In FIG. 16, 59 is a human detection sensor. It also has a receiving section (not shown) that emits ultrasonic waves or infrared rays forward of the cooking appliance 1 and receives the reflected input. This human detection sensor 59 is installed so that it emits infrared rays in the front (forward) direction of the heating chamber 6. Note that there is no dedicated circuit for processing the signal received by the receiving section, and the control device 40 analyzes the received signal to determine whether or not a person is present.

As indicated by the dashed-line frame in FIG. 16, the audio notification unit 50 and the display unit 16 may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit", in which case the reference numeral 90 is used.
Reference numeral 26 denotes a light emission control unit. This light emission control unit controls the light emission of a large number of light emitting elements. The light emission of a light emitting element 27A composed of an LED or the like arranged on the light emitting unit 21M and a light emitting element 27B arranged on the input key 154M is controlled by this light emission control unit 26. When two or more light emitting elements 27 with different light emission colors are arranged in one place, the light emission state of the plurality of light emitting elements provides a visual effect to the user US as if the light emission color has changed.

In FIG. 16, reference numeral 52 denotes an input signal analysis section that analyzes an input signal from the input operation section 15 .
The input signal analysis unit 52 individually analyzes the input signals transmitted from the right operation unit 15R, the left operation unit 15L, and the central operation unit 15M. In particular, the input signal analysis unit 52 has a discrimination function for judging whether the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to voice input mode) MC1 has been received. When it is determined that the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to voice input mode) MC1 has been received, it issues a switching command for switching the input mode from the "touch input mode" to the "voice input mode 1."

In the following description, the "input mode switching command MC1" is referred to as the "voice input mode compatible signal MC1." When the input processing unit 70 receives this voice input mode compatible signal MC1, it issues a control signal to the voice signal analysis unit 52 to transition to a voice input standby state (for example, to start a dedicated voice analysis program).

As described with reference to FIG. 13, the right operation section 15R has various input keys (153R, 154R, 151R, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when the input key 153R, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the result of the determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, the left operation section 15R has various input keys (153L, 154L, 151L, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when the input key 153L, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the left operation unit 15L determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the determination result (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Furthermore, the central operation unit 15M has various input keys (153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis unit 52.
In particular, when input keys 153M and 154M, which are one of the "voice input switching keys", are touched, central operation unit 15M determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the result of this determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to control device 40.

Next, we will explain Figure 17. Figure 17 is a block diagram explaining the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. Note that the audio signal receiving unit 56 explained in Figure 16 is omitted. Note that the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L are basically configured in the same way as the central operation unit 15M.

In FIG. 17, 15A is an input key identification unit. This input key identification unit 15A identifies the input key that has been touched. For example, when input key 153M is touched, it generates an identification signal unique to that input key. Also, when input key 154M is touched, it generates an identification signal unique to that input key.

Reference numeral 15B denotes a touch detection unit. When a fingertip FG of a user US or the like approaches the touch electrode unit, a detection circuit generates an "ON" signal, and when the fingertip FG moves away, the detection circuit generates an "OFF" signal.
A time measurement unit 15T measures the time from when the touch detection unit 15B outputs an "ON" signal to when the touch detection unit 15B changes to an "OFF" signal, and transmits measured time data.

15C is an input mode determination unit. This input mode determination unit 15C receives the measured time data from the time measurement unit 15T, and, as described above, with a threshold of 5 seconds as the boundary, if the measured time is 5 seconds or more, it determines that it is "voice input mode 1". If the measured time is less than this threshold, it determines that it is a normal "short press" operation.

The input mode determination unit 15C transmits a signal (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1) indicating the determination result of whether or not the mode is "voice input mode 1" to the control device 40.

15D is a storage unit. This storage unit 15D stores various control parameters and thresholds for the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, the input mode determination unit 15C, and the like, as well as program information for the determination process.

Reference numeral 15E denotes a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
An input signal transmitting unit 15F transmits to the input signal analyzing unit 58 of the control device 40 a unique identification signal of the input key as described above and a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 as a result of determining whether the mode is "voice input mode 1".

In FIG. 17, the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, input mode determination unit 15C, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer, rather than being configured as separate components on hardware.

Although FIG. 17 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the control device 40 also identifies the input of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, in the input key identification unit 15A in the right operation unit 15R, data identifying the input key present in the right operation unit 15R is included in the signal from the input key. The same is true for the left operation unit 15L.

As is clear from the above description, the cooking device 1 described in FIG.
a first heating means HM1 for induction heating an object to be heated on the top plate 3;
A heating chamber 6 having a metal wall;
A second heating means HM2 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 6;
a third heating means HM3 for heating the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat;
A notification unit 90;
A communication unit 51;
A display unit 16;
The control device 40 is configured as follows.

,
The control device 40 displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16, and then displays a display screen (first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3) dedicated to each cooking mode.

There are three types of cooking modes: single cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and linked cooking mode KM3.

The single cooking mode KM1 includes the following three types.
(1) an IH only mode in which the first heating means HM1 is operated alone; (2) a range only cooking mode in which the second heating means HM2 is operated alone; and (3) an oven only cooking mode in which the third heating means HM3 is operated alone.

The composite cooking mode KM2 is a heating pattern in which cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 by simultaneously operating the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, or by automatically operating them at different times.

The coordinated cooking mode KM3 is a heating pattern in which the second heating means HM2 and/or the third heating means HM3 and the first heating means HM1 are operated sequentially after a transition period TR whose length is determined by a command from the user US.

The control device 40 has an operation program for executing the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3.
The data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 can acquire the recipe data CD from the cloud server 300 or the smartphone 200 via the communication unit 51 .

In the input operation section 15, the "voice input mode 2" can be selected by the input key 180 provided in the central operation section 15M.
Furthermore, among the input keys arranged on the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L, specific input keys (153M, 153R, 153L, 154M) can select "voice input mode 1" according to the "long press" state, which is one of the touch forms.

(4. Configuration of the control menu of the central operation unit)
Next, a selectable control menu that is displayed on the central display unit 16M by the central operation unit 15M will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 18 shows the entire control menu that can be selected using the central operation unit 15M.
The control menus that can be selected by the central operating unit 15M are divided into an RG (range grill) menu group that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) and one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b, and an IH menu group that uses the central IH coil 9C corresponding to the central heating port 4C.

Figure 19 shows the control menu shown in Figure 18 categorized into four perspectives (categories 1 to 4). As is clear from Figure 19, the control menu is broadly categorized into a single cooking mode KM1 and a combined cooking mode KM2. Note that although Figures 18 and 19 do not show the linked cooking mode KM3, the central operation unit 15M can execute a linked cooking menu in the linked cooking mode.

When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" and input key 154M or 155R is pressed without operating input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Therefore, the display screen of the central display section 16M is switched to the second specific screen 16M2.
In the first area 22 of the second specific screen 16M2, the control menu "Warm" shown in the "Left Display Area" of Fig. 18 is always displayed first. This is because the control menu "Warm" is set as the default.

The "left display area" in FIG. 18 is a display area that corresponds to the first area 22 described in FIG. 14. In other words, the various control menus shown in the "left display area" in FIG. 18 are displayed sequentially in the first area 22.

As shown in the "left display area" of Figure 18, in addition to "warm," there are a total of 13 control menus: "Microwave manual," "Pre-boil leafy vegetables," "Pre-boil root vegetables," "Defrost meat," "Microwave grill (RG) cooking," "Microwave grill (RG) reheat," "Microwave grill (RG) manual," "Grill," "Oven," "IH keep warm," "IH rice cooking," and "IH heating."

The control menus "Warm", "Manual microwave", "Pre-boil leafy vegetables", "Pre-boil root vegetables", "Defrost meat", "Range grill (RG) cooking", "Range grill (RG) reheat", "Range grill (RG) manual", "Grill", and "Oven" are included in the RG menu group.
In addition, "IH Keep Warm", "IH Cook Rice", and "IH Heat" are included in the IH menu group.

The contents shown in the "Central Display Area" in FIG. 18 are the contents displayed in the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M, and relate to adjustments to the heating conditions during cooking, such as temperature, time, heat, "high" or "low", etc. In other words, various control conditions are shown in the "Central Display Area". The contents of the default settings for this "Central Display Area" are listed in the "Default" column in the right column of the "Central Display Area".

The contents written in the "Right Display Area" in FIG. 18 indicate the contents displayed in the third area 24 of the central display unit 16M. The contents of the default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the "Default" column in the right column of the "Right Display Area". A blank space does not indicate a control condition that can be changed, but rather indicates that no information is displayed, or that an appropriate explanatory text that cannot be selected or changed (by the user US) is displayed in the third area 24.

Next, a total of 13 types of control menus displayed in the "left display area" of FIG. 18 will be described.
(1) Warming: refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). This "warming" is also suitable for reheating the food. The default setting is "80°C", so microwave heating automatically stops when the food is heated to 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user US before heating begins. As shown in the central display area of FIG. 18, for example, the range from 0°C to 90°C can be set in 5°C increments.

(2) Manual range: This refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). The heating time is set by the user US to a specific time between 10 seconds and 60 minutes.

(3) Parboiling of leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), particularly vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach, Chinese cabbage, and other leafy vegetables. The infrared sensor 13 measures the temperature rise of the food to be cooked in real time and automatically stops.

(4) Parboiling of root vegetables: This is suitable for parboiling the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6, particularly roots, rhizomes, potatoes, and other root vegetables, using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

(5) Meat thawing: Suitable for thawing various kinds of frozen meat in the heating chamber 6.
(6) Range grill (RG) cooking: Food items in the heating chamber 6 are cooked by combining microwave heating using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) with oven heating using upper radiant heat heating means 12a and lower radiant heat heating means 12b.

(7) Range Grill (RG) Re-cooking: Suitable for re-heating food that has already been cooked in the heating chamber 6.
(8) Range Grill (RG) Manual: The user US appropriately selects between microwave heating and oven heating to heat and cook the food in the heating chamber 6.

(9) Grill: This uses one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b to heat food in the heating chamber 6. In other words, this is a control menu that uses the third heating means HM3.

In the "Grill" mode, the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is not managed, nor is there any control to stop the heating operation by detecting a rise in the temperature of the food being cooked. The heating operation is performed for a period of time specified by the user US within a range of 10 seconds to 30 minutes.

(10) Oven: Either or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are used to heat the food in the heating chamber 6. The temperature of the heating chamber 6 is measured in real time by a thermistor sensor 14, and the power supply to the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is controlled so that the temperature reaches the set target temperature.

(11) IH Warm: Heats a heated object such as a pot placed above the central heating port 4C so as to keep it at a temperature set by the user US. Low to medium heat of 200W to 750W is used for induction heating, and a temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C detects the temperature of the heated object in real time, and the heating control unit 43 of the control device 40 controls the heat based on the detected temperature. The default temperature is 80°C as shown in Figure 18. For example, it is suitable for keeping soup warm.

(12) IH rice cooking: Heats according to the total number (amount of rice cooked) set by the user US. Induction heating powers range from low to high, ranging from 200W to 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the heated object (also called an overheated state or overheating; the same applies below), and if an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 reduces the heat or stops the heating operation.

(13) IH heating: Heats according to the induction heating power set by the user US. There are five levels of heat that can be set: Heat 1: 200 W, Heat 2: 500 W, Heat 3: 750 W, Heat 4: 1000 W, and Heat 5: 1500 W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the heated object, and if an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 reduces the heat or stops the heating operation. The default heat is 500 W.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 19 is a classification table of the RG control menus ("RG menu group" in FIG. 18) and the IH control menus ("IH menu group" in FIG. 18) of the single cooking mode KM1 by the first heating means HM1.

The "left display area" of the first region in FIG. 18 refers to the first area 22 (see FIG. 10). As is clear from category 2 in FIG. 19, the name of the control menu is also displayed in text in the first area 22 of the central display section 16M, and is used by the user US to select the control menu.

Next, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage structure of various cooking control menus in the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the correspondence between the menus and input keys.
The "information indicating the main points of each control menu" shown in category 2 of FIG. 19 is stored as data in the third layer of the recipe data storage unit 42 as shown in FIG.

Therefore, by operating input keys 154M and 155M to select a desired control menu, the user US can automatically or arbitrarily display information showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 of FIG. 19, which is one-to-one corresponding (linked) to that control menu. An example of this automatic display is shown in FIG. 21.

Next, the display on the central display unit 16M when the central operation unit 15M is operated will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.
First, when the user US turns on the main power by pressing the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 16), the input functions of the left operation unit 15L, the central operation unit 15M, and the right operation unit 15R are enabled. In other words, the control device 40 is in a state where it can accept operation signals from each of these operation units 15L, 15M, and 15R, and a predetermined screen (hereinafter referred to as the "standby initial screen" 16MH) (see FIG. 46) is displayed on the central display unit 16M, although it is not shown in the figure.

In this state, when the user US presses the input key 154M or 155M, the display screen 16ST is displayed as shown in FIG.
FIG. 21 shows the second specific screen 16M2.
As is clear from the display screen 16ST, the name (identification information) 160 of the control menu "Warm" is displayed large in the center of the first area 22 in the front-to-rear direction.

The control menu identification information 160 for "warm" is displayed in the center of the first area 22, and behind it are the words "IH heating" (control menu identification information) 161, while conversely, the words "Microwave manual" (control menu identification information) 162 are displayed slightly smaller in front of it.

As a result, when the user US selects the control menu, it is clear that the next options are "IH heating" and "Microwave manual." If, at this stage, the input key 154M is pressed once, the control menu identification information 162 for "Microwave manual" is displayed large, as if it has moved (backwards) to the position of the characters "Warm" (control menu identification information) 160. Note that the characters of the control menu identification information 162 have not actually moved; the displayed information has simply switched.

When the input key 155M is pressed once, the characters "IH heating" (control menu identification information) 161 are displayed larger, as if they have moved (forward) to the position of the characters "Warm" (control menu identification information) 160. Note that in this case, too, the control menu identification information 162 has not actually moved, but rather the displayed information has simply been switched.

As shown in FIG. 21, the display screen 16ST displays a target temperature of "80°C" in the second area 23. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, microwave heating is automatically stopped when the infrared sensor 13 detects that the temperature of the food being cooked is 80°C.

If you wish to change the temperature displayed in this second area 23 and change the automatic stop temperature, simply operate input key 156M or 157M. Pressing input key 156M once will raise the temperature by 5°C to 85°C, as shown on display screen 16UP1, and pressing input key 167M once will lower the temperature by 5°C to 75°C, as shown on display screen 16DN1.

The second area 23 also displays a heating source display section 163 that indicates in text that the heating source is a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

As described above, 164 is reference information that is automatically displayed to indicate that this is a recommended control menu for heating side dishes, etc. The content of this reference information may be other additional information 165, and two or more types of information may be displayed alternately or sequentially for several seconds each on the display screen (e.g., third area 24) of the central display unit 16M.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 18, information (reference information) 164 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed whenever necessary in response to the operation of the input keys 158 or 159 .
In other words, in this embodiment 1, the reference information 164 that corresponds one-to-one with each control menu (e.g., "warm up") is displayed so that the user US does not hesitate as to whether or not to select each control menu (e.g., "warm up").

Furthermore, when reference information 164 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21, when one of the (two) input keys 158M or 159M located in front of the reference information 164 is touched, more detailed additional information 166 may be displayed in the third area 24 instead of the reference information 164.

As shown in FIG. 21, the aforementioned "composite cooking mode" KM2 is a mode in which multiple heating means with different heating principles, such as the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, are driven simultaneously or automatically switched with a time lag to heat and cook a common food item.

In FIG. 21, the display screen shown in the central display section 16M is a dedicated display screen for the "combined cooking mode" KM2, and is referred to as the "second specific screen" 16M2.

Next, a description will be given of Figures 22 to 28.
22 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display unit 16M and the central operation unit 15M in the composite cooking mode KM2, illustrating the operation procedure before the start of the heating operation.

In FIG. 22, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US.
When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to start the control device 40 and the input key 154M or 155M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the initial standby screen 16MH (see Fig. 46) is switched to the second specific screen 16M2 as shown in Fig. 22. That is, this is the setting operation scene for the "combined cooking mode" KM2 such as a single cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking.

If input key 153M is pressed before input key 154M or 155M, the input process changes to the input process for the collaborative cooking mode KM3. In other words, from that stage, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 46) switches to the first specific screen 16M1.

When either the input key 154M or 155M is pressed with the fingertip FG as described above, three candidates for the control menu that are the target of the multiple composite cooking modes KM3 are displayed in the first area 22 of the display screen (second specific screen) 16M2 of the central display unit 16M.
That is, identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food to be cooked) 160, 161, and 162 for one-to-one identification of the control menu are displayed. Among these, the position where the identification information 160 of one control menu is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position A."

In this FIG. 22, there are three control menus displayed on the central display unit 16M. These are "warm", "induction heating" and "manual range". The number of control menus is referred to as the "number of control menus for complex cooking".

In this embodiment 1, the positions where the identification information 161 and 162 are displayed may hereafter be referred to as "display position B" and "display position C," respectively.

In this embodiment 1, the control menu displayed at "display position A" ("Warm" in FIG. 22) has the highest priority for selection. In other words, when input key 151M is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 22, the heating operation starts with "Warm".

In FIG. 22, when input key 154M, which is located to the right of input key 155M, is touched (a normal "short press" operation), "Range Manual" is displayed at display position A.

To change the target temperature of 85°C for "warm," simply touch input key 156M or 157M. In this case, even if you use a "long press" rather than the usual "short press," you will only be able to input normal temperature changes. In other words, you cannot change to voice input mode 2 using input keys 156M or 157M.

In FIG. 22, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 153M is marked with a star shape, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M in question flashes (or emits light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements) and can be operated.

As is clear from FIG. 22, when the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M does not yet blink (or emit light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements). In other words, this indicates that input operations are not possible.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 23, after the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M, 157M flashes (or emits light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements), indicating that it is possible to input control conditions such as heating time and temperature.

In addition, in FIG. 23, one light-emitting element 21M that corresponds to an input key 151M is surrounded by a dashed circle, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M is blinking (or emitting light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements) and waiting for a command to start cooking.

In FIG. 23, when an input key 154M, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, if the touch state is "long press", a mark 154V indicating that the input key has been switched to "voice input mode 1" is displayed by the light-emitting element 27B (see FIG. 16) so as to surround the touched portion of the input key 154M. In other words, the light-emitting element 27B (see FIG. 16), such as an LED, arranged below the top plate 3 is lit by a signal from the light emission control unit 26, and a frame as shown in FIG. 23 is displayed on the portion of the input key 154M. Alternatively, the entire touched portion of the input key 154M is illuminated from below, making it clearly distinguishable from other input keys.

When the mark 154V is displayed, the control unit 55 of the control device 40 is already in a state (hereinafter also referred to as an "input standby state") in which it is ready to accept input of "control conditions" (temperature, heating time, etc.), which are lower-level commands in the control menu (e.g., "warm up"), via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 16).

Therefore, instead of inputting the control conditions by touching the input keys 156M or 157M, the user US can input the control conditions by voice.

Next, we will explain FIG. 24.
As is clear from Fig. 24, after the mark 154V is displayed, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M does not blink (or emit light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements). In other words, this indicates that input operations of control conditions such as heating time and temperature are not recommended using these input keys. However, when switched to "voice input mode 1", the input functions of input keys that are not necessary for voice input are restricted, so after the mark 154V is displayed, the input keys 156M and 157M cannot be used for input by touch operation (if set to voice input mode 1A).
In order to maintain the touch input function of specific input keys (such as 156M) for inputting control conditions even after switching to the voice input mode, it is necessary to set the mode to the "voice input mode 1B" as described above.

As is clear from FIG. 24, after the mark 154V is displayed, auxiliary information 179 for voice input mode 1 is displayed in the larger display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24.

There are three types of auxiliary information 179: voice input mode display information 179A, which indicates that voice input is being accepted because the mode is voice input mode, and information 179B and 179C, which indicate the range and numerical values of the control conditions that can be input.

The information 179B is the condition shown in "area 2" explained with reference to Fig. 18. That is, it indicates that the user US can only select within the range of 0°C to 90°C.
The information 179C is the condition shown in "Area 2" described in Fig. 18. In other words, in the control menu for "warming" for heating frozen foods with microwaves, the user US can only select from the range of -10°C to 0°C.

The information 179 (179A to 179C) shown in FIG. 24 allows the user US to input information by voice, and by indicating in advance the range of control conditions that can be input by voice, unnecessary voice input and speaking of inappropriate conditions can be avoided, thereby improving the operability of the user US.

As is clear from FIG. 24, after the mark 154V is displayed, the auxiliary information 179 for voice input mode 1 remains displayed in the large display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24, which does not satisfy the conditions for starting the heating operation.
That is, in the state of Fig. 24, pressing (touch operation) of the input key (start key) 151M is not recommended as in Fig. 23. Therefore, the light emitting unit 21M is not in a state of emitting light (blinking).

In other words, in this embodiment 1, after switching to the voice input mode, if the specified control conditions have not been input (the state shown in Figure 24), the heating operation cannot be started.

Next, a description will be given of Figures 25 to 28.
25 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display unit 16M and the central operation unit 15M in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The operation procedure before the start of the heating operation is shown.

In FIG. 25, when the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to start the control device 40 and the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the initial standby screen 16MH (see FIG. 46) is switched to the first specific screen 16M1 shown in FIG. 25.

If input key 154M or 155M is pressed before input key 153M, the input process changes to the input process for composite cooking mode KM2, and second specific screen 16M2 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 22.

Even if input key 155M or 156M is pressed first and the setting operation for "combined cooking mode" KM2, such as a single cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking, is halfway through, if it is at a stage before input key 151M is pressed, the input process will change to the input process for "combined cooking mode" KM3 when input key 153M is pressed. In other words, from this stage, only the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M.

Figure 25 shows the state immediately after pressing the input key 153M, and the identification information 167 of a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger) that has been set as the default is displayed in the first area 22.

When input key 153M is touched, followed by input key 154M or 155M, further identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food) 168 or 169 is displayed in the first area 22 of the display screen (first identification screen) 16M1 of the central display unit 16M to identify the food to be cooked that is the target of the multiple linked cooking modes KM3 (the linked cooking menu).

In FIG. 25, the number of "food items" that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode displayed in the central display section 16M is three. That is, there are three: hamburger steak, gratin, and roast beef. In this way, the number of food items is called the "number of coordinated cooking menus."

In this embodiment 1, there are a total of eight linked cooking menus. Details are explained in FIG. 31. However, it is possible to obtain recipe data CD from the smartphone (communication terminal device) 200 (described later) to further increase the number of linked cooking menus.

In FIG. 25, 167, 168, and 169 are identification information, which in this embodiment 1 is information that indicates one-to-one the name of the food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak, gratin, roast beef). Note that when explaining all the identification information of the linked cooking menu, the reference number 167 is used.

The position where the control menu identification information 160 described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24 is displayed is called "display position A."
In contrast, in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the position where the identification information 167 is displayed may hereinafter be referred to as "display position B."

In this embodiment 1, "display position B" and the aforementioned "display position A" (see FIG. 21) are in the same position, but they may be set to different positions. However, in order to avoid confusion for the user US, in the linked cooking mode KM3, the eight linked cooking menus are always in the same position (display position B). Also, in the composite cooking mode KM2, it is good to always unify each control menu to the same (single) "display position A."

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process automatically proceeds to the next step, and the display screen is switched to that of FIG.
In Fig. 26, heating unit specification sections 171L and 171R are displayed in the first specification screen 16M1. The user US can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L by operating the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent to each other on the left and right. In this embodiment 1, the left heating unit 4L is set as the default, and the operation of the input keys 157M and 156M is not essential.

In FIG. 26, the operation support information 170 displays "Press the start button to start heating the left IH." This means that by pressing the input key 151M on the central operation unit 15M, induction heating (in the coordinated cooking mode KM3) can be started by the left IH coil 9L. However, in this embodiment 1, it is necessary to press the input key 153L on the left operation unit 15L after pressing the input key 151M.

As shown in FIG. 26, identification information 168 indicating the name of another cooking item (e.g., gratin) is displayed above (at the rear in plan view) the identification information 167 displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

In addition, below the identification information 167, identification information 169 indicating the name of another cooking item (e.g., roast beef) is displayed. In FIG. 26, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 151M is surrounded by a dashed circle, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M is blinking (or emitting light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements) and waiting for a command to start cooking.

Each time either input key 154M or 155M is operated once, the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) changes its display by moving one step upward or downward in sequence. In other words, the identification information 167 can be displayed sequentially at a predetermined position (front-to-back center position) in the first area 22 by forward and reverse movement, in other words, at the display position B.

In this embodiment 1, as mentioned above, there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 155M is operated eight times, the identification information 167 of one food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) will cycle through one item. Conversely, if the right input key 154M is operated eight times, the identification information 167 of one food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) will cycle through one item.

After selecting a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak), as described above, it is necessary to select the left and right heating units 4L and 4R or input control conditions (e.g., preheating temperature) and then issue a command to start the heating operation using input key 151M.

As described above, inputting the left and right heating elements 4L, 4R and the control conditions (e.g., preheating temperature) requires pressing either input key 154M or 155M multiple times individually, which requires the user US to perform multiple touch operations. This is also the case with the above-mentioned combined cooking mode KM2. For example, as explained in FIG. 18, the temperature setting for "warming" can be selected from the range of 0 to 90 degrees, but each of input keys 156M and 157M allows only 5 degrees to be input with one touch operation, so to input, for example, 15 degrees, three touch operations ("short presses") are required.

In this embodiment 1, in order to reduce the troublesome input operations, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, when the identification information 167 of one cooking menu is displayed in a predetermined position B of the first area 22 as shown in Figures 25 and 26, the input key 154M can be used to change to a voice input mode.

As described above, when the input key 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, if the touch state is "long press," a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode is displayed so as to surround the touched portion of the input key 154M, as shown in FIG. 26.

In addition, when the mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode is displayed, voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted may be displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 as auxiliary information 179, as shown in FIG. 27.

The state in Figure 27 is one in which the left and right heating units 4L, 4R have not yet been selected. In this state in Figure 27, if the user US inputs setting information such as "left IH" by voice, the selection of the left heating unit 4L is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in Figure 28.
In the state shown in FIG. 28, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 151M flashes as surrounded by a dashed circle (or emits light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements), and advances to the state waiting for a command to start cooking, so that when the input key 151M is pressed, the heating and cooking operation starts.

Next, we will explain Figure 29.
In Fig. 29A, FG indicates the fingertips of the user US. Every time the input key 155M is pressed once, the display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 change to display screens 29A to 29D as shown in Fig. 29B.

As described above, when the user US sets the input operation unit 15 in advance to the function setting mode (using the function setting key 151KP) and operates multiple input keys on the input operation unit 15 during the function setting mode to display individual cooking menus in the linked cooking mode KM3 on the central display unit 16M, it is possible to set the display to prioritize either food ingredients or nutritional ingredients.

For example, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed as described above, a dedicated display screen for the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display portion 16M.
Therefore, it is preferable to set in advance that the food ingredient display mode can be automatically selected by "long pressing" a specific input key (e.g., 156M) other than the function setting key 151KP. For example, for one setting menu (e.g., hamburger) in the above-mentioned "function setting menu", the display screen can be set to automatically display "food ingredient display" and "nutritional ingredient display".

Furthermore, when the display screen for setting such "food composition labeling" or "nutritional composition labeling" is displayed, it may be possible to operate a specific input key other than the function setting key 151KP (e.g., any one of 156M, 157M, etc.) to change the conditions for setting the "food composition labeling" or "nutritional composition labeling" or to cancel the setting. For example, it may be possible to set a specific range so that only the "iron" nutrient and the "energy (calorie equivalent)" of the component are displayed.

For this reason, if the function setting key 151KP is set to prioritize either food ingredients or nutritional ingredients and display them based on that, "hamburger" will not necessarily be displayed first, as shown in Figure 29 (A).

As described above, the user US can search for a cooking menu by voice by pressing the input key 180. Therefore, for example, if a voice input such as "menu with low calorie value" is performed at the stage shown in FIG. 29, the cooking menu with the lowest calorie value (amount of energy) among the eight cooking menus is displayed at a predetermined position (front-to-back center position) in the first area 22 on the first specific screen 16M1.

For example, in FIG. 29, three cooking menu items are displayed: gratin, hamburger steak, and roast beef. If the input key 180 is pressed at this point, the voice input mode 2 is entered. The user US may then give a voice input of "low calorie menu." Incidentally, the energy amount (unit: kilocalories) per 100 g of weight is 152 for gratin (macaroni gratin), 223 for hamburger steak, and approximately 196 for roast beef. Therefore, macaroni is extracted as the "menu with the lowest calorie value" among these three.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 29, input key 154M can be "pressed and held" to switch to voice input mode 1, and menus with low calorie values can be extracted by voice input.

Next, we will explain Figure 30.
FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display unit 16M in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, and is an example in which standard ingredients and nutritional ingredients for "hamburger steak," one of the cooking menus, are displayed.

At the stage of Figures 26 to 29, if the user US issues a command to display either the food ingredients or the nutritional ingredients by voice input, or if the input key 158M or 159M is touched at the stage where the operational support information 170 is displayed (see Figure 26), the first specific screen 16M1 temporarily switches to the display screen of Figure 30 (A) and Figure 30 (B). Pressing the input key 158M is considered to be a command to display the food ingredients.

In the following description, the display screen in FIG. 30(A) will be referred to as the "food ingredient display screen" 16M1A, and the display screen in FIG. 30(B) will be referred to as the "nutritional ingredient display screen" 16M1B.

The food component display screen 16M1A and nutritional component display screen 16M1B automatically return to the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed.
Alternatively, the display program of the control device 40 stipulates that if the user US gives any command by voice input, or if either of the input keys 158M, 159M is operated once more within the specified period of time (10 seconds), the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 will be restored.

Referring to FIG. 31 .
FIG. 31 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooking menu in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 and the operational support information 170 (see FIG. 26).

As can be seen from FIG. 31, the operation support information 170 is of two types: operation support information A and operation support information B. One is information that says "Press the start button to start heating the left induction cooker," and the other is information that says "Press the start button to confirm." This "start button" refers to input key 151M.

The above-mentioned two types of operation support information 170 are automatically switched before the start of the cooking process in the "collaborative cooking mode" KM3. For example, they are displayed alternately every few seconds.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
In this embodiment 1, a "cooperative preheat cooking mode" KM4 is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
There are two types of coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4.

An example of a cooking menu that uses the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger steak." In the case of "hamburger steak," the preheating process is performed using the first heating means HM1.

If cooking process 1 is started while the preheating process is being performed, the heating operation of the preheating process has not been stopped at the time when cooking process 1 is started.
Therefore, the energization of the first heating means HM1 and the energization of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3 in charge of cooking process 1 are performed in parallel during the same time period.

In other words, in the linked preheat cooking mode KM4, the heating source (in the above description, the first heating means HM1) that has been operating before cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of cooking process 1, and during cooking process 1, power may be applied to either or both of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following explanation will be made on the assumption that the linked cooking mode KM3 includes the linked preheat cooking mode KM4.

When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the left operation unit 15L of the left IH coil 9L cannot be used for other cooking menus (also called "occupied state") when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

Specifically, of the various input keys on the left operation unit 15L, at least the input key 153L is disabled by the heating control unit 43. This "disabled" means that a valid command signal is not sent from the input key 153L to the heating control unit 43, and that even if a valid command signal is sent, the heating control unit 43 does not process the command signal as a valid command signal. In either case, heating with the left IH coil 9L cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the identification information 167 is displayed, the right operation unit 15R of the right heating port 4R may be made unusable (by "disabling" the input key 153R). However, if the user US has set the function in advance on the input operation unit 15 (using the function setting key 151KP) so that this "disabling" is not performed, and if the right IH coil 9R is already being used for another control menu (heating operation is ongoing), the right IH coil 9R can be used as is. On the other hand, in the linked cooking mode KM3, due to the fact that it has already been used, it is determined that it cannot be used (by the heating control unit 43).

Therefore, only the left IH coil 9L is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking mode KM3. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating source HM1 as a whole, the use of only a portion of the three heating sections 4L, 4C, 4R (the left IH coil 9L) is "restricted." Note that if the right IH coil 9R is not being used for other cooking, the right IH coil 9R may also be placed in an occupied state.

Continuing with reference to FIG.
32 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In FIG. 32, #1 to #9 show the operation of the user US and the state change of the cooking appliance 1.

The "fried chicken" shown in FIG. 32 differs from the "hamburger" described above in that cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6 and cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1.

In FIG. 32, before starting cooking step 1 to cook "fried chicken," the user US first selects the left IH coil 9L and presses the input key 151L. Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 3 begins. In this case, the object to be heated N is a metal pot or frying pan, etc., with a certain amount of cooking oil added.

Meanwhile, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and places ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, an operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This operation is performed by pressing the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M.

At this point, the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2) is activated and cooking step 1 of microwave cooking begins. Then, notification 1 of reference information is given.

The notification 1 is, for example, to inform the user of the time remaining until the end of heating, such as "Microwave heating has started. Heating time is xx minutes." Or, if the control is performed to detect the temperature of the food being cooked and determine when to end the heating, it may be to inform the user of information indicating the target temperature, such as "Heating to xx degrees Celsius."

During this cooking step 1, the preheating of the left IH coil 9L is also completed (for example, the object to be heated is heated to the standard preheating temperature of 180°C). The user US is notified of the completion of preheating by voice and text, etc., via the audio notification unit 51 and the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1) (#2).

The user US can stop microwave heating at any time during cooking step 1. To stop it, simply open the door 7. Note that microwave heating can be stopped temporarily by pressing the input key 152M on the central operation unit 15M only once. However, pressing the input key 152M twice in succession within a short period of time will cancel the cooking mode and the selection of "fried chicken" in the linked cooking mode.

By opening the door 7, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and the cooking process 1 is completed (#3).
Next, the user US moves the food material that has been heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated that is being preheated on the top plate 3 (#4).

Then, cooking process 2 is started at left heating port 4L (#5).
In cooking step 2, since the input key 153L (see FIG. 12) of the left operation unit 15L is pressed at the beginning before preheating starts, there is no need to operate the left operation unit 15L at the start of cooking step 2. In other words, when the food (fried chicken ingredients) is moved into the object to be heated that has been preheated to, for example, 180° C., heating of the food starts at the temperature of the object to be heated (this point is the start point of cooking step 2).

As described above, the user US does not need to operate the input operation unit 15 in order to start cooking process 2 (#5).
The point at which the food to be cooked is placed on top of the food to be heated is the start of cooking process 2, but the temperature sensor group 30 (see Figure 16) may detect a temporary drop in the temperature of the food to be cooked when the food is placed on top of the food to be cooked, and then determine the start of cooking process 2 electrically.
The cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user US operating the left operating unit 15L.

Next, the user US moves the food to be cooked again.
First, the door 7 is opened, the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 6, and the door 7 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed to start cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

In this case, to prevent microwave heating or the like from being performed without placing the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 (so-called "empty cooking"), the door 7 is opened once after cooking process 1 is completed, and then the heating operation can be started by pressing the input key 151M only if it is detected (by the door 7 open/close detection unit 10) that the door 7 has been closed again. In addition, the timing for operating this input key 151M is limited to a certain time (e.g., 3 minutes) from the end of cooking process 1, or to a certain time (e.g., 2 minutes) from the time the door 7 is opened and closed again, thereby improving safety.

When a predetermined time (TN5) has elapsed from the time when cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 6 is started by operation input A26 by the user US, notification 2 of reference information 5 is performed.

The reference information notification 2 is information that includes guidance such as, for example, "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." Furthermore, since the user US knows that the final cooking process is about to end, he or she can start preparing to remove the "fried chicken" from the heating chamber 6 from the point in time when the reference information notification 2 appears. In synchronization with this, the content of the notification 2 is displayed in text or the like by the central display unit 16M. The notification 2 is displayed at a specific position on the first specific screen 16M1, like the operation support information 170.

Thereafter, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and cooking process 3 is completed (#7). Note that cooking process 3 can be stopped immediately if the user US opens the door 7.
Then, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated that is being preheated on the top plate 3 (#8). In this case, if the object to be heated is maintained in a heated state by induction heating until the end of the cooking step 3, it may be further subjected to induction heating (cooking step 4) (#9).

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left 15L. In other words, the operation A28 of the user US at this point is to press the input key 153L of the left operating unit 15L corresponding to the left IH coil 9L.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 32 can shorten the time required from the start of the induction heating operation (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1.
That is, cooking step 1 is started by placing ingredients (food to be cooked) in heating chamber 6 prior to the completion of preheating by induction heating or notification of the completion of preheating.

Because preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed before cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked can be transferred immediately to the food to be heated on the top plate 3 after cooking process 1 is completed, and cooking process 2 can be started.

In the example of "fried chicken" in FIG. 32, cooking step 3 is included, but cooking step 3 and cooking step 4 are not necessarily required. Cooking steps can be completed based on the type of food to be cooked and the wishes of the user US.

In addition, in FIG. 32, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 9L may be stopped at any time by the left operation unit 15L. However, as shown by the dashed frame in FIG. 32, if the left IH coil 9L is also to be used in cooking step 4, it is necessary to start the preheating operation again before cooking step 4.

Next, we will explain Figure 33.
Like FIG. 32, FIG. 33 shows the operational steps when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
In Fig. 33, #1 to #9 indicate operations by the user US and state changes of the cooking appliance 1, as described in Fig. 32. The other symbols correspond to those in Fig. 32.

The difference between FIG. 33 and FIG. 32 will now be described.
FIG. 33 shows a case where cooking step 1 is started in heating chamber 6 after the first heating means HM1 has completed preheating the object to be heated and a notification of this (#2) is received.

When the completion of preheating of the object to be heated by the first heating means HM1 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 and the left and right display units 16L, 16R, and is also notified by audio notification unit 50, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and places the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed.

At this point, microwave cooking process step 1 begins. Then, the notification 1 of the reference information is performed. After this, the process is the same as that shown in FIG. 32.

In the cooking sequence shown in Figure 33, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (start of the preheating process) to the end of cooking process 1 is longer than that in Figure 32.

However, since the food ingredients (food to be cooked) start to be heated in the heating chamber 6 after the preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed or a notification of the completion of the preheating is received, when cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 6 ends, there is a guarantee that cooking step 2 can be started immediately by the first heating means HM1 if the food to be cooked is moved. Therefore, this method is suitable for users US who are not very familiar with the linked preheating cooking mode KM4.

In addition, in FIG. 33, the "driving period of the left IH coil 9L" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but if the first heating means HM1 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the driving of the left IH coil 9L may be stopped at any time by the left operating unit 15L after cooking step 2 is completed. However, as shown in the dashed box in FIG. 33, if the left IH coil 9L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

In the configurations shown in Figures 32 and 33, the first heating means HM1 is energized first to start the preheating operation, while the cooking process 1 is carried out in the heating chamber 6.
The "linked preheat cooking mode" KM4 of this embodiment 1 is not limited to the cooking process 1 being performed in the heating chamber as described above.

In another linked preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating operation is started first by the first heating means HM1, the heated object such as a frying pan is heated to the preheat target temperature (e.g., 180°C), and when the target temperature is reached, the cooked object is placed on the heated object, and cooking process 1 is started. After this preheating process, the cooked object may be moved into the heating chamber 6 while still on top of the heated object, and cooking process 2 may be performed in order to further heat the cooked object together with the heated object in the heating chamber 6 by the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3.

Next, we will explain Figure 34. Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control unit 43 until the transition to the collaborative cooking mode KM3.

In the linked cooking mode KM3 of this embodiment 1, there is a pattern (first linked cooking mode) in which the first heating means HM1 is driven first, and then at least one of the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 is driven. Representative examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking with this pattern include four, ranging from "hamburger steak" to "gratin," as shown in the table in Figure 31.

There is also a second linked cooking mode in which the order is reversed. Representative examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking in this second linked cooking mode are four, ranging from "fried chicken" to "tempura," as shown in the lower half of the table in Figure 31.

The steps in FIG. 34 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
First, in step SB1, the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M is operated, thereby starting the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

In the next step SB2, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M, and various information for executing the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is displayed. In this step SB2, in order to select a cooking menu for each coordinated cooking mode, the "name of the food to be cooked" (e.g., "hamburger steak") 167 is displayed as one type of identification information 167 in the center of the front-to-rear direction of the first area 22, i.e., the display position B.

Depending on the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the timing at which the heating means (the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3) are "occupied" may be either of the following two cases.
(1) As described above, for example, after the case where the left IH coil 9L for cooking process 1 is selected (in FIG. 34, this corresponds to “Start of occupied state (case 2)” after step SB4).
(2) Step SB2 and onward as shown in FIG. 34 (in FIG. 34, this corresponds to "Start of Occupied State (Case 1)").

The next step SB3 is to determine whether at least one of the input keys 154M, 155M has been operated. As described in FIG. 14 and FIG. 25 to FIG. 28, by operating the two input keys 154M, 155M, the user can select the identification information 167 indicating the name of an item to be cooked in the collaborative cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak).

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process proceeds to step SB4.
Step SB4 is a step for selecting one of the two heating unit specification parts 171L and 171R displayed in the first specification screen 16M1 as described above. When the user US operates the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent to each other on the left and right, the user can select one of the right IH coil 9R and the left IH coil 9L.

The left heating port 4L may be set as the default, the heating unit specification section 171L may be displayed first on the first specification screen 16M1, and the process may proceed directly to step S5. In the example described in FIG. 25, when preparing hamburger steak using coordinated cooking, the left heating port 4L is set as the default, and the left IH coil 9L is set to be selected preferentially.

In the next step SB5, it is determined whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the linked cooking mode. If the input key 152M has been operated once, the result is determined to be "Yes". Then, the process returns to step SB3. If the input key 152M has been operated twice in succession within a certain short period of time (for example, five seconds), it is determined that the linked cooking mode KM3 has been cancelled, and the process returns to the state of the initial standby screen prior to step SB1. Therefore, the selection of the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3 returns to the initial stage.

On the other hand, if input key 151M is operated while input key 152M is not operated, the process proceeds to the next step SB6. Then, cooking step 1 of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is started.

In FIG. 34, in step SB7, in the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, various functional parts are activated according to the "cooking conditions" (including "control conditions" such as heat and heating time) of a specific cooperative cooking menu (recipe) such as "hamburger steak." In other words, from this stage, the mode transitions to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

First, in step SB7, the display unit corresponding to the heating unit selected in step SB4 is activated. However, in the case of a cooking menu that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) or the third heating means HM3 in cooking step 1 (for example, "fried chicken" as described above), the central display unit 16M is already activated, so in this step SB7, no new display unit is activated.

In cooking step 1, for example, if a cooking menu uses the left IH coil 9L, the left display unit 16L is activated in step SB7. The input function of the left operation unit 15L is then enabled, and the unit waits for input from the user US. Then, the process proceeds to step SB8.

At step SB8, the operation of the input key 153L is awaited, and the cooking process of the combined cooking mode KM3 is started.
The display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 of step SB8 include process information 172 such as that the first cooking process 1 uses the left IH coil 9L, and the next cooking process 2 uses a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), as described in FIG. 25.

Next, we will explain Figures 35 and 36. Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control unit 43 until the transition to the linked cooking mode. Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram showing the permission conditions before transition to the linked cooking mode and the determination results.

Referring to Figure 35 .
Steps ST1 to ST8 are operation steps defined in the operation program (including recipe data CD) of the heating control unit 43 for the coordinated cooking mode KM3.
First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (ST1), the next step ST2 is a step in which the heating control section 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

At step ST2, the central display unit 16M is activated and displays the message "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." At this stage, the heating control unit 43 also checks whether it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 15 regarding the upper limit of the total power consumption.

If the cooking appliance 1 is set to transmit startup information to the communication terminal device 200 or the external server 417 (cloud server 300) in step ST2, the startup information (operating status data OS) is wirelessly transmitted from the communication unit 51 at this stage.

In the next step ST3, the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 51 also provide a notification and audio guidance to prompt the user to select the heating means.
In the next step ST4, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M, and also, usage precautions for the user US are displayed.

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than input key 153M (e.g., 154M) has been operated (ST5). If input key 153M has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step ST6. In other words, the process proceeds to the step of using the "linked cooking mode" KM3.

In step ST6, the permission condition determination unit 54 checks whether the "permission conditions" are met. For example, the permission condition determination unit 54 checks the usage state of the heat source used in the "combined cooking mode" KM3.
The permission conditions and the determination results will be explained in detail in the next FIG.

In step ST5, the first input operation is checked. For example, it is determined whether the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R was operated before the input key 153M was pressed, and it is also determined whether the "combined cooking mode" KM2 was selected by the central operation unit 15M (by the input key 154M or 155M).

If the input key 153M is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (e.g., 30 seconds) from step ST3, the display for the "linked cooking mode" KM3 will start as described above.

On the other hand, if input key 153M is not operated and another input key (e.g., input key 155M or 154M) is touched, step ST5 is judged as "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST9 to start cooking in a mode other than the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3. Note that a detailed description of step ST9 is omitted here.

In FIG. 35, steps ST6 and ST7 are operation steps of "permission condition 1" that decides whether or not to permit cooking in the "combined cooking mode" KM3.
Step ST6 is a stage for judging "permission condition 1".

Here, "permission condition 1" means
(1) The "peak cut value" that specifies the upper limit of the maximum power that can be used by the cooking device 1 is 5000 W or more.
(2) When there is a power reduction command signal received by the control device 40 via the communication unit 51 from the external cloud server 300 or the communication terminal device 200, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more;
If these two conditions are met, the determination in step ST6 is "Yes."

The "permission condition 2" in the next step ST7 is the following four conditions.
(1) In the first heating means HM1, the central heating port 4C is not in heating operation.
(2) Either the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3, or both, are not in heating operation.

(3) In the first heating means HM1, neither the right heating port 4R nor the left heating port 4L is being used for the heating operation (or only one of them is being used for the heating operation). In other words, neither the left IH coil 9L nor the right IH coil 9R is being used for the heating operation.
(4) The "permission condition 4" described later is satisfied. In other words, the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is not a limit value (for example, a high temperature exceeding 100° C.).

If the above three conditions are met, step ST7 will be judged as "Yes". Then, proceed to step ST10. In other words, you can proceed to the step of inputting the start of cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3.

If the determination in steps ST6 and STR7 is "No," the process proceeds to step ST8, and the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 50 inform the user US that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, we will explain the meaning of the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" being specified as "5000 W or more." For simplicity, the following explanation will not specifically mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the internal cooling fan (not shown) of the main body 2.

The reason why the required demand (power demand amount secured in advance) for implementing the "Cooperative cooking mode" KM3 is 5000W or more is because the maximum (instantaneous) power required for each heating source during operation in cooperative cooking mode is as follows:

(1) When operating the microwave oven (second heating means HM2): 1000 W
(2) When the oven is operating: 2000 W (upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W, lower radiant heat heating means 12b: 1000 W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500 W (second heating means HM2: 500 W, upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum power for a cooking menu in the "integrated cooking mode" KM3 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the combined cooking mode, the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 may operate simultaneously.

In other words, the maximum power is 3500W, which is the sum of the "1000W" of the second heating means HM2, the "1000W" of the third heating means HM3 (2000W is achieved by alternating current of 1000W each time), and the "1500W" of the first heating means HM1 that performs induction heating.

When the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 5000W:
When the right induction coil 9R is performing 3000W heating (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000W.
When the "linked cooking mode" KM3 is implemented from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W of power required for linked cooking, so the heating power of the right IH coil 9R is reduced to 1500W (from 3000W) and linked cooking can be started.

If the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food using the right heating port 4R (requiring a maximum of 1500W), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If coordinated cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the 3500 W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heat of the right IH coil must be reduced. However, if the heat is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not go well, so the heat of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
In the end, 4000W is not enough to provide the required heat for the automatic control menu.

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the "linked cooking mode" KM3, it is necessary to determine (confirm) whether there is a demand (power demand secured in advance) of 5000 W, which is the sum of the power required for linked cooking (3500 W) and the power required for the cooking menu of the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L (1500 W).

Next, we will refer to FIG.
Fig. 36 shows the determination processes in steps ST6 and ST7 in Fig. 35. These determinations are made by the permission condition determination unit 54.
Step ST5 is the stage where the input key 153M is operated.
In the next step STX1, the permission condition determination unit 54 of the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking appliance 1 with the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above, and determines whether the state satisfies permission conditions 1 and 2.

In step STX1 in FIG. 36, audio (notification) 1 to audio (notification) 4 indicate the contents notified to the user US by the audio notification unit 50. In other words, this is a specific example of the contents of step ST8 in FIG. 35.

Display 1 to Display 4 in FIG. 36 show the contents displayed in the central display section 16M. Note that Display 1 to Display 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 that is displayed from step SB2 in FIG. 34 onwards, but are displayed on the central display section 16M where the first specific screen is not displayed.

The first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites for transitioning to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) are met. Therefore, it is not the case that after the user US sets (selects) various conditions for the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 (e.g., identification information 167), it is determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not met, and the screen returns to the initial standby screen (step ST4 in FIG. 35). Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
FIG. 37 illustrates the operation from when the cooking appliance 1 is started up to when cooking recipe data CD for the cooking appliance 1 is acquired from the communication terminal device 200 or the external server 417 (cloud server 300).

In this embodiment 1, the recipe data CD for the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 includes, but is not limited to, the number of the cooperative cooking menu (identification information 167), the order of the multiple heating means used, the heating means used in cooking step 1, the heating means used in cooking step 2, if there is a cooking step 3 or later, the heating means used for each of those cooking steps, and if there are default (standard settings) control conditions (heat, heating time, target heating temperature, etc.) for each cooking step, the setting value or range of setting values.

In FIG. 37, steps SS1 to SS8 are operational steps defined in the integrated control program of the control device 40, and are basically identical to the content defined in the operational program of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 described in FIG. 35.

When the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed first (SS1), the next step SS2 is a step in which the heating control unit 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

Steps SS1 to SS4 are the same as steps ST1 to ST4 described in Figure 35, so duplicate explanations will be omitted.

In step SS5, the cooking appliance 1 performs an operation to ask the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to send a signal to the smartphone (communication terminal) 200 or cloud server 300, which has been registered in advance, to request the provision of cooking recipe data CD. A "confirmation screen" is displayed on the central display unit 16M, and is also notified by the audio notification unit 50. This "confirmation screen" is one type of the standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later.

If the user US sets in advance using the function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 7) of the input operation unit 15 to automatically execute the external connection in step SS5, it will be executed automatically at a specified timing.

In other words, as described in FIG. 1, pairing between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1 can be automatically performed, and wireless communication 400 can be established between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1.

The external connection in step SS5 is performed by repeatedly transmitting and receiving alternately several times between the cooking appliance 1 and the external communication device (such as the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300). For example, when the cooking appliance 1 first transmits a standby signal 1, the external communication device receives the standby signal 1 and transmits a setting signal 1 including setting information. In response to this, the cooking appliance 1 checks its internal standby state (such as the set value of the total power consumption) and, if there are no problems, transmits a standby signal 2 to proceed to the next stage. This is the process.

Finally, the cooking appliance 1 completes the reception of the necessary setting information (including the recipe data CD) from the external communication device. In other words, after receiving the information once, it immediately sends back a confirmation signal and performs several alternating communications, and finally completes the reception of the necessary setting information. In this series of steps, there is a step that asks the user US to decide whether or not to receive the recipe data CD. In other words, in this cooking appliance 1, there is a step where the user US can clearly and in advance recognize that the recipe data CD will be received, and therefore the cooking appliance 1 prevents the user US from proceeding to the execution stage of the recipe data CD without knowing it.

On the other hand, if the above-mentioned external connection is not set to be performed automatically, in step SS6, a predetermined icon or the like is displayed on the central display section 16M to inform the user US that recipe data CD can be provided. This is shown on the display screen 2C in FIG. 43. The display to inform the user US is, for example, simply displayed in text, as shown by 60P on the display screen 2C. 60P is called acquisition operation support information.

If in step SS6 the user does not consent to connection to the external device (such as the smartphone 200), then as shown in step SS9, a non-reception message such as "receipt of recipe data CD is not currently being received" is sent to the registered external device (the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300). In this way, the user US can also set up to refuse reception.

On the other hand, if the user agrees to connect to the external device and issues an instruction to acquire data in step SS6, the data acquisition unit 53 of the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD from the external device via the communication unit 51. The acquired recipe data CD is stored in a specified "temporary storage unit" (not shown) in the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SS7).

In the next step SS8, the contents of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device, particularly the identification information 167, are displayed on the central display unit 16M. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user of the fact that the data has been received, for example, by saying, "A hamburger recipe has been received."

In the first embodiment, the control device 40 is programmed to permit the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD if the input key 180, which is the selection unit for the voice input mode 2, is operated during the standby period in which the control device 40 waits for a command to start the heating operation after the main power switch 20 is turned on and power supply is started.

In other words, if the user US presses the input key 180 in step SS6, the step is judged as "Yes" and acquisition of the recipe data CD is permitted. However, several conditions must be satisfied before the recipe data CD is actually acquired by the control device 40, which will be explained in detail later.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 38 to 43.
Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the main input steps for the three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 39 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 40 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the linked cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 41 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the combined cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 42 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the single cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1.
Fig. 43 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 to acquire recipe data CD from the outside. Fig. 44 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 to acquire recipe data CD from the outside.

38 to 44 show the case of the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1A." That is, in one input operation section 15 (for example, central operation section 15M), the input key 154M as the "combined key" is provided among the multiple input keys.
Therefore, when the mode is changed to the "voice input mode 1A" by the input key 154M, the input functions of the input keys (156M, 158M, etc.) other than the input key (dual-purpose key) 154M are disabled from that point on (the state of the "voice input mode 1A"), as will be described with reference to Figures 38 to 44.

Now, reference will be made to Fig. 38. In Fig. 38, outlined reference characters (such as 153M) indicate input keys 153M and the like to be operated in the following steps S2 to S15.
In FIG. 38, the main input keys are also displayed in white letters.
The range enclosed by the dashed line indicates the range in which voice input is possible in "voice input mode 1" which is switched to by "long press" of input key (combined key) 154M.

Steps S2 to S6 show the operation steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Steps S7 to S11 show the operation steps in the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12 to S15 show the operation steps in the single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means HM1.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Next, when the input key 153M is touched, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected (step S2), and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (step S3).

Step S2A shows the process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal device 200, cloud server 300, etc.

At this stage, at least three cooking menus are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 as described in Figures 25 to 28, but each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, a different cooking menu can be displayed in turn (step S4).

In step S5, if the control conditions for one linked cooking menu are satisfactory, pressing input key 151M will allow transition to cooking step 1 of linked cooking mode KM3 (step S6).

As is clear from FIG. 38, if the input key (combined key) 154M is "pressed and held" in step S4, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," so that the conditions in the range from step S4 to S5 can be input by voice. For example, the cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "Hamburg steak, preheat 180°C." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "heat 7 hours 10 minutes."

Continuing with the description of FIG.
In step S2, if the input key 154M or 155M is touched without touching the input key 153M, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected (step S7), and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed (step S8).
Each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, a different control menu (see FIG. 18) can be displayed in sequence (step S9).

Step S7A shows the process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal device 200, cloud server 300, etc.

In step S9, if one of the control menus (e.g., "warm") displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 is satisfactory, the user can then press input key 156M or 157M to select the control conditions (microwave output, heating time, etc.) (step S10).

In step S10, if the control conditions for one composite cooking mode are satisfactory, pressing input key 151M will allow transition to cooking step 1 of composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

As is clear from FIG. 38, if the input key (combined key) 154M is "pressed and held" at step S7, the control device 40 switches to a voice "input standby state," so that the range of conditions can be input by voice from step S9 to S10. For example, the control menu (in this case, "heat") and the control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "warm 500 W." Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice, such as "500 W, time 10 minutes."

Continuing with the description of FIG.
If the input key 153M is not touched in step S2, and neither of the input keys 154M nor 155M is touched in step S7, but either the input key 153L or 153R of the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L is touched, the single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means HM1 is selected (step S12), and the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the right display unit 16R or the left display unit 16L (step S13).

Step S12A shows the process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal device 200, cloud server 300, etc.

Each time input key 152L or 152R is touched, a different control menu (see FIG. 46) can be displayed in sequence (step S14).

In step S14, if one of the control menus (see FIG. 46) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 is satisfactory, the user can then press input key 155L or 156L (in the case of left operation unit 15L) or input key 155R or 156R (in the case of right operation unit 15R) to select the control conditions (induction heating power, heating time, etc.) (step S15).

In step S15, if the control conditions for the single cooking mode KM1 are acceptable, induction heating will start automatically within a certain period of time (10 seconds) without pressing an input key.

As is clear from FIG. 38, if the input key (combined key) 153L or 153R is "pressed and held" at step S12, the control device 40 switches to a voice "input standby state," so that the range of conditions from step S14 to S15 can be input by voice. For example, the user US can input a set of the control menu (in this case, "boil water") and the control conditions by speaking, such as "boil water, heat level 6." Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice.

You can also operate input keys 151L or 151R (step S14) and set the timer time with input keys 154L, 155L (154R, 155R). These can also be input by voice after switching to voice input mode 1. For example, you can say something like "heat 6 timer 10 minutes."

As is clear from FIG. 38, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has the following features:
The input operation unit 15 has a first input operation unit (a right operation unit 15R and a left operation unit 15L) for the first heating means HM1 and a second input operation unit (a central operation unit 15M) for the second heating means,
The first input operation unit 15L and the second input operation unit 15M have input keys A (153L and 153R) arranged thereon, and the second input operation unit 15M has input keys B (153M and 154M) arranged thereon,
The control device 40 is characterized in that it validates the touch input of either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever occurs first, and does not start the input process using the other input key until input of the control conditions (heat, heating time, etc.) for the heating cooking mode (coordinated cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, single cooking mode KM1) or control mode (the "warm" mode, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started.

In other words, for the three heating cooking modes (linked cooking mode KM3, composite cooking mode KM2, and single cooking mode KM1), only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that is touched first is accepted by the control device 40, and the other input keys are placed in a state where no input command is accepted.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touched and then pressed and held down to switch to voice input mode, input from other input keys will be disabled (however, input functions for input keys 151M and 152M will be maintained).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), it becomes impossible to select other cooking modes or control modes, and setting conditions are not inadvertently input by voice input.

In addition, if the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered using one input key (e.g., 154M) in voice input mode, the voice input mode is cancelled when input key 151M is pressed to start cooking. Therefore, there is no confusion when the user US subsequently performs touch operations to select another cooking mode.

Next, we will explain Figure 39.
In FIG. 39, outlined reference characters (eg, 153M) indicate the input keys (eg, 153M) operated in steps SM3, SM4 and SM8.
In Fig. 39, step SM1 performs processing equivalent to the processing of steps ST2 and ST3 in Fig. 35. That is, the central display unit 16M is started and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed. An abnormality determination is performed, and if no abnormality is found, a message is displayed saying "Since there is no abnormality, cooking can be started." Then, the standby initial screen 16MH and the audio notification unit 51 provide a notification and audio guidance to prompt the user to select a heating means.

Furthermore, at this step SM1, if the cooking appliance 1 is set to transmit start-up information to the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300, the communication unit 51 wirelessly transmits the start-up information (operating state data OS) at this stage. Note that the initial standby screen 16MH also displays usage precautions for the user US, as will be described in detail in FIG. 46.

In the next step SM2, the input functions of all input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R are enabled to prepare for touch input operation of each input key (153M, 154M, 153L, 154R, etc.). In addition, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 17) possessed by the input operation unit 15 starts measuring the elapsed time. Note that while FIG. 17 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L also have the same configuration as the central operation unit 15M. Therefore, they have a configuration equivalent to the time measurement unit 15T.

In the next step SM3, the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is selected. In step SM4, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected. In step SM8, the single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means HM1 is selected.

First, in step SM3, it is determined whether or not the input key 153M has been touched, and if it has been operated, the process proceeds to the route A1 shown in FIG. 39 and FIG.
If there is no touch operation in step SM3, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM4. If either input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the route B1 shown in Fig. 39 and Fig. 41.

If there is no touch operation in step SM4, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM8. If either input key 153L or 153R is touched in step SM8, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the route C1 shown in Figs. 39 and 42.

In step SM8 shown in FIG. 39, if no touch operation has been performed, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM5. In this step SM5, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 17) determines whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SM3.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SM5 that the preset time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM6, where a process to automatically shut off the main power supply (hereinafter referred to as "automatic shutoff process 1") is performed. Then, the series of operations ends (SM7). In this way, if no input operation is performed, the main power switch 20 will automatically open when the time limit (e.g., 30 minutes) is exceeded.

Next, we will explain FIG. 40.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the operation after the input key 153M is touched in step SM3.
When the input key 153M is touched, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 17) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM40 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM41. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM50.
Step SM41 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If these permission conditions are not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM47). The denial process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 35.

If the determination in step SM41 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM42.
In step SM42, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 26. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger).

In FIG. 40, in step SM43, the timer 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM43, if voice input is made from the user US via the voice signal receiver 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM44 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM45.

By the way, at the stage of step SM43, the control device 40 has already switched to "voice input mode 1A". Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after this point in time of step SM43, the input of the input key 155M will not be accepted by the control device 40 due to the "voice input mode 1A". In other words, unless there is voice input, step SM44 will not become "Yes", and it is not possible to proceed to step SM46 for input completion. Note that if "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input can continue as described above. Also, exceptionally, the voice input control program may be modified so that if the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, "short press"), the "voice input mode" is released.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after the input key 154M is "pressed and held," the mode switches to voice input mode 1A, and voice input mode 1A continues automatically thereafter. However, voice input mode 1A is released when the heating operation starts (in other words, it is released when the input key 151M is touched).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM46. In step SM46, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed, and if step SM46 is determined to be "Yes", the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from input key 151M (A21).

On the other hand, if steps SM44 and SM46 are "No", the process returns to step SM44 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM45 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM45 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM48 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 39, and refers to returning the display from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying that the input has not been made properly, or notifying by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Steps SM50 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM50 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM56). The denial process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 35.

If the determination in step SM50 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM51.
In step SM51, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 26. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger).

In FIG. 40, in step SM52, the timer 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM52, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using the input keys 156M or 157M, via the audio signal receiver 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM53 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM54.

By the way, at the stage of step SM53, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after step SM52, the input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 due to the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM53 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM46 where input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 154 is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be released and changed back to "voice input mode 1".

In this way, in this embodiment 1, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "pressed and held," and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. The touch input mode is automatically released when the heating operation starts.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM55. Then, a determination is made as to whether the input has been completed. If the determination in step SM55 is "Yes", the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from the input key 151M (A22).

On the other hand, if steps SM53 and SM55 are "No", the process returns to step SM53 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM54 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM54 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM57 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 39, and refers to returning the display from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying that the input has not been made properly, or notifying by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, we will explain Figure 41.
FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the operation after either the input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4.
When the input key 154M is touched, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 17) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM60 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM61. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM70.
Step SM61 is a step for determining whether or not "permission condition 3" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 3" here is different from the permission conditions 1 and 2 of the combined cooking mode (see Figs. 35 and 36). The "permission condition 3" in the combined cooking mode is when the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and is, for example, 100°C. This is because it exceeds the temperature detection range of the "warm" mode (90°C or less).

If "permission condition 3" is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM67). Note that the denial process is a process in which a message such as "The heating chamber is too hot to cook" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is given by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 using the third heating means HM3, the heating chamber 6 may remain hot for a while due to residual heat even after the cooking is completed.

If the determination in step SM61 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM62.
In step SM62, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 22. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., warm).

In FIG. 41, in step SM63, the timer 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM63, if voice input is made from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM64 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM65.

By the way, at the stage of step SM63, the control device 40 has already switched to voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after this step SM63, the input of the input key 155M is not accepted by the control device 40 due to the voice input mode (because it is set to the "voice input mode 1A"). In other words, unless voice input is made, step SM64 will not become "Yes", and it is not possible to proceed to step SM66 for input completion. Exceptionally, if the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, a "short press"), the "voice input mode 1" may be changed to be released. Also, if it is set to "voice input mode 1B", the touch input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after "pressing and holding" input key 154M, the mode switches to voice input mode 1, but voice input mode 1 is automatically released when a command to start cooking is given (by touching input key 151M).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM66. In step SM65, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed, and if step SM66 returns a "Yes" result, the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from input key 151M (B21).

On the other hand, if steps SM64 and SM66 are "No", the process returns to step SM64 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM65 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM65 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM68 for error processing. Note that the error processing referred to here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 39, and refers to returning the display from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying that the input has not been made properly, or notifying by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, steps SM60 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM70 is a step for determining whether the above-mentioned "permission condition 3" is satisfied. If permission condition 3 is not satisfied, a denial process is carried out at this stage (step SM76). The "denial process" in this case is the same as the denial process of step SM67.

If the determination in step SM70 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM71.
In step SM71, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 22. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., warm).
At this stage, if the input key 154M is "pressed and held", the mode switches to voice input mode 1, and the process proceeds to step SM63. However, if the input key 154M is not "pressed and held" but the input key 155M is operated for input or the input key 154 is "shortly pressed", the "touch input mode" is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SM72.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, when selecting a composite cooking mode or a control menu (e.g., warming), immediately after "long pressing" the input key 154M, the mode switches to voice input mode 1, but that voice input mode 1 does not continue automatically thereafter, but is released when the heating operation starts. Note that if the same input key 154M is "short pressed," the voice input mode 1 may be released at this point.

In FIG. 41, in step SM72, the timer 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM72, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using the input keys 156M or 157M, via the audio signal receiver 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM73 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM74.

By the way, at the stage of step SM72, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after step SM72, the input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 due to the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM73 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM75 where the input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be released and changed back to "voice input mode 1".

In this way, in this embodiment 1, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "pressed and held," and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. The touch input mode is automatically released when the heating operation starts, and the normal touch input mode is restored.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM75. Then, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed. If the determination in step SM75 is "Yes", the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from the input key 151M (B22).

On the other hand, if the results of steps SM73 and SM75 are "No", the process returns to step SM73 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM74 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM74 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM77 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 39, and refers to returning the display from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, we will explain Figure 42.
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the operation following the touch operation of either the input key 153L or 153R in step SM8 of FIG.
In order to simplify the following explanation, the following explanation will be limited to the case where the left operation unit 15L is operated.

If the touch operation of the input key 153L is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 17) of the left operation unit 15L. Note that FIG. 17 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, but the left operation unit 15L has a similar configuration to that shown in FIG. 17.

Then, the determination in step SM80 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM81. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM90.
Step SM81 is a step for determining whether or not "permission condition 4" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 4" here is different from the permission conditions 1 and 2 of the coordinated cooking mode (see Figs. 35 and 36) and the above-mentioned "permission condition 3." The "permission condition 4" in the single cooking mode KM1 is, for example, when the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and the result is a high temperature, for example, exceeding 100°C. This is because when the temperature of the object N to be heated is detected in a non-contact manner and induction heating control is performed, a high temperature from the start of the heating operation can hinder accurate temperature control and induction heating control.

If "permission condition 4" is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM87). The denial process is a process in which a message such as "The top plate is too hot to cook" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is given by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when induction heating cooking is performed, the top plate 3 may remain hot for a while even after cooking is completed.

If the determination in step SM81 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM82.
In step SM82, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
The state at the time when this third specific screen 16M3 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 46. After that, the input key 154L or 155L may be further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., preheat).

At this stage, the mode has already been switched to "voice input mode 1", so in the next step SM83, the timer 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. If, after step SM83, voice input is made by the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM84 becomes "Yes", and the program proceeds to the next step SM85.
For example, if the user US utters “preheat 200° C.”, the voice signal receiving unit 56 converts this voice input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the voice signal analyzing unit 58 .

In step SM85, it is determined whether the time limit TY has been exceeded, and if not, the process proceeds to step SM86.
In step SM86, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM86 is "Yes", the induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain time (for example, 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 using the left operation unit 16L (in the case of the single cooking mode HM1), no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the heating operation is started directly (C21).

On the other hand, if steps SM84 and SM86 are "No", the process returns to step SM84 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM85 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM85 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM88 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 39, and refers to returning the display of the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, steps SM80 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM90 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 4" is satisfied. If permission condition 4 is not satisfied, a denial process is carried out at this stage (step SM96). The "denial process" in this case is the same as the denial process of step SM87.

If the determination in step SM90 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM91.
In step SM91, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
The state at the time when this third specific screen 16M3 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 46. After that, the input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. are further touched to select a specific control menu (e.g., preheat) (touch operations may be performed multiple times).

In FIG. 41, in step SM92, the timer 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded.

At this stage, the "touch input mode" is in effect, so in the next step SM93, the timer 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded.

The input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. may be touched to sequentially input the control menu (e.g., preheat) and the control conditions such as the preheat temperature (touching may be performed multiple times). In this way, when a touch input is performed by the user US, step SM93 becomes "Yes", and if the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds from step SM94 to the next step SM95.
For example, if the user US inputs the conditions "preheat" and "200° C." sequentially by touch input, the left operation section 15L converts this input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the input signal analysis section 52 (see FIG. 16).

Note that if you press and hold input keys 154L or 155R, these input keys do not have the function of switching to voice input mode 1, so voice input is not possible.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, to select the single cooking mode HM1 of the first heating means HM1 or to select the heating section (right heating section 4R, left heating section 4L) (using input keys 153R and 153L), the mode switches to voice input mode 1 immediately after "long pressing" input key 153R or 153L, but voice input mode 1 continues automatically thereafter.

In other words, once you press and hold the input key 153L or 153R, voice input mode 1 will be maintained regardless of the operation of that voice input key thereafter (if it is set to the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1B"). Even if you press and hold the input key 153L (153R) again (twice in succession), voice input mode 1 will remain.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded in step SM94, the process proceeds to step SM95. Then, a determination is made as to whether the input has been completed. If step SM95 returns a "Yes" determination, induction heating operation will automatically begin within a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 using the left operation unit 16L (in the case of single cooking mode HM1), no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the process will proceed directly to heating operation (C22).

On the other hand, if the results of steps SM93 and SM95 are "No", the process returns to step SM93 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM94 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM97 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 39, and refers to returning the display from the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 43 and 44.
Fig. 43 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 43 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside.

In Fig. 43, step SL1 performs a process corresponding to step SM1 in Fig. 38. In the next step SL2, a process corresponding to step SM2 in Fig. 38 is performed.
Step SL3 is a process equivalent to step SS5 of connecting and informing an external connection described in Fig. 37. That is, this is a step for the purpose of requesting the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to transmit a signal requesting provision of recipe data CD to the smartphone (communication terminal device) 200 or the cloud server 300 that has been registered and set in advance.

As described above, it is also possible to automatically execute an external connection from the stage of step SL3 (SS5) (if previously set by the function setting key 151KP described above).
If the control device 40 has acquired the recipe data CD, the next step SL4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL5.

The next step SL5 is a process for determining whether the received recipe data CD meets the predefined permission conditions. As described above, for example, in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, anything that does not meet "permission condition 1" or "permission condition 2" is not permitted as a cooking menu (see Figures 35 and 36). Also, in the combined cooking mode KM2, a determination is made as to whether a specific "permission condition 3" is met. Note that permission condition 3 is the same as that described in step SM61 of Figure 41. Furthermore, for the first heating means HM1, the previously described "permission condition 4" must be met (see step SM81 of Figure 42).

If it is determined in step SL5 that the permission conditions are not met, as explained in step ST8 of FIG. 24, the communication unit 51 transmits a signal (data) to the outside to inform the outside that the recipe data CD cannot be received (step SL9). Note that while FIG. 24 shows the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, such a "non-reception message" is also transmitted in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1.

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored as regular data in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SL6).
Furthermore, the identification information 167, 160 and control conditions (heat, heating time, target temperature, etc.) included in the recipe data CD are displayed on the central display unit 16. For example, in the case of the combined cooking mode KM3, they are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SL6).

The next step SL7 is a step for modifying the control conditions. For example, in the linked cooking mode KM3, the control conditions (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 156M to 159M of the central operation unit 15M. Note that since the recipe data CD is acquired on a cooking menu basis, it is already determined that the cooking menu is a specific one (e.g., hamburger steak), and this cannot be changed to another cooking menu (e.g., roast beef).

If you want to modify the control conditions, for example in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, you can simply input the appropriate changes using the central operation unit 15M (step SL10). In this case, you can select either "voice input mode 1" or "voice input mode 2," and you can also input by voice.

If it is determined in step SL4 that recipe data CD has not been received, the process proceeds to step SL8. In this step SL8, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL4. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL11. Step SL11 is "automatic shutoff process 1" which automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 39. Note that the time limit TX of this step SL8 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described in FIG. 39 do not have to be the same time, and different times may be set.

Next, we will explain Figure 44.
In FIG. 44, step SS5 is the same as that explained in FIG. 26, so a duplicated explanation will be omitted.
Step SS10 is a step for judging whether or not the input key 180 of the voice input mode 2 is operated. If the input key 180 is pressed once, the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SS11. If the input key 180 is not operated, the process proceeds to the normal touch input mode (step SS15).

If the data acquisition unit 53 has acquired the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, step SS11 becomes "Yes".
If it is determined in step SS11 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process proceeds to step SS16. In step SS16, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS11. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS17. Step SS17 is an "automatic shutoff process 1" that automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 39. Note that the time limit TX of step SS17 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described in FIG. 39 do not have to be the same time, and different times may be set.

The contents of the recipe data CD received in step SS11 are checked to see if they satisfy the "permission conditions" described above (see step SL5 in FIG. 42), and if so, step SS12 becomes "Yes."

If the permission conditions are not met, as described in step SL9 of FIG. 43, the communication unit 51 transmits a signal (data) to the outside to inform the outside that the recipe data CD cannot be received (SS18).

If the permission conditions are satisfied, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 as regular data.
Furthermore, the identification information 167, 160, etc. and the control conditions included in the recipe data are displayed on the central display unit 16. For example, when the recipe data CD is the collaborative cooking mode KM3, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS13).

The control conditions (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be changed as appropriate by voice input acquired via the voice signal receiving unit 56 of the input operation unit 15 (steps SS14, SS15).

When "voice input mode 2" is selected by input key 180, "voice input mode 2" continues until the heating operation for one cooking menu is started. It does not switch to "touch input mode" during the input stage. This is because switching during the input process may cause confusion in the operation of the user US.

If you wish to switch to touch input mode, simply press input key 180 again at any stage. The touch input mode will be restored from the point at which it is pressed. Note that after returning to touch input mode, if, for example, input key 154M is "pressed and held," the mode will switch to "voice input mode 1." Therefore, in voice input mode 1 (set to voice input mode 1B), if, for example, input key 156M is operated for input, the input function of that input key is not disabled, and input is possible.

Next, we will explain Figure 45.
Fig. 45 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the heating control unit 43 when the control device 40 in the cooking appliance 1 switches to the voice input mode 1. Note that Fig. 45 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, but the same is basically true for the other cooking modes.

In FIG. 45, step SS20 indicates the time when the input mode of the control device 40 is switched to voice input mode 1.
In the next step SS21, the voice notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M notify that the acceptance of voice input has begun. The state of the central display unit 16M at this point is, for example, as shown in Fig. 27. That is, a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed on the central operation unit 15M, and voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted is displayed as auxiliary information 179 on the first specific screen 16M1.

In the next step SS22, the voice signal analysis unit 58 transitions to an input standby state in which it receives voice commands from the user US. In addition, a time measurement unit (not shown) inside the control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time.

The voice input information uttered by the user US is acquired by the voice signal receiving unit 56 via a microphone (not shown). The voice signal receiving unit 56 converts the acquired voice information into a predetermined voice signal and transmits it to the voice signal analyzing unit 58 (step SS23).

The voice signal analysis unit 56 analyzes the received voice signal (step SS24) and displays the input content on the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1). For example, as described in FIG. 28, it notifies the user by voice, for example, "Hamburg steak right IH accepted", and also displays the same in text on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS25).

In step SS25, if the input information is insufficient, the voice notification unit 50 may further guide the user by voice, such as "Please specify the preheat temperature." Alternatively, the range of specific control conditions may be notified, such as "A preheat temperature of 200°C is recommended. Please specify the temperature."

If the input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation is insufficient, the process returns to step SS23. Before returning to step SS23, the audio notification unit 50 indicates the control conditions that are insufficient to be input and prompts the user to input them (not shown).

When the heating control unit 43 determines that the input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation has been completed (step SS26), the process proceeds to step SS27. In step SS27, since voice input has been completed, a notice is given that voice input mode 1 will be released, and it is recommended that the input key 151M be touched (step SS27). Note that when the input key 151M is touched, voice input mode 1 is released.

On the other hand, if no voice command is received in step SS23, the process proceeds to step SS28. In step SS28, it is determined whether the time elapsed since step SS22 exceeds a predetermined time limit TZ. If the time limit TZ has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS23. However, if the time limit TZ (e.g., 5 minutes) has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS29. Step SS29 is "automatic shutoff process 2" similar to step SM6 in FIG. 39. Note that this "automatic shutoff process 2" is a series of processes in which, in the state of the first specific screen 16M1, the voice notification unit 50 issues an alarm to the user US, and then the screen automatically switches to the standby initial screen 16MH, and then the main power switch 20 is automatically opened. This prevents the input process from being left unattended for a long time for some reason, ensuring safety.

Next, we will explain Figure 46.
FIG. 46 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M corresponding to each of the main operation steps after the main power switch 20 is turned on.

Referring now to Figure 46, when the main power switch 20 is turned off, the central display unit 16M is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 performs self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then displays "Display Screen 1," which is one display form of the initial standby screen 16MH in Figure 46, on the central display unit 16M.

In the display screen 1 shown in FIG. 46, 60A is a display message notifying the user that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for directing the user to the recipe data providing server 301, a dedicated recipe posting site, via the network NW. 60C is text explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code (hereinafter, "two-dimensional information explanation text").

When the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read by the smartphone 200, it can be guided and connected to the recipe data providing server 301 that holds information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information explanation 60C and the display text 60A are a type of "common information during standby" 60N.

After the display screen 1 in FIG. 46 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be automatically displayed.
Furthermore, after the display screen 2A or 2B in Fig. 46 is displayed, the display screen 2C may be automatically displayed. In this display screen 2C, a recommendation 60H is displayed to prompt the user US to perform an input operation to select a heating source.

On the display screen 2A, the text "Caution: Bumping" is one of the warning signs 60E. "Bumping" refers to the phenomenon in which, when a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew is being heated, the inside of the food becomes overheated above the boiling point, causing sudden, violent boiling. As steam escapes from the heated liquid, hot droplets may fly off, which can be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping is said to be the introduction of foreign matter or impact from outside. For this reason, when a metal pot or the like containing food is placed on the top plate 3 and induction heated, caution is displayed when stirring the food. The information displayed in this warning is one type of "common information during standby" 60N.

The four display screens shown in FIG. 46, display screen 1 and display screens 2A to 2C, are called the "common screen" or "standby initial screen" 16MH. Note that forms other than these four may also be included in the common screen 16MH.

On display screen 2B, 60E is a warning display that warns the user that the inside of heating chamber 6 is at a high temperature and to avoid inadvertent contact. If control device 40 detects that heating chamber 6 has not yet cooled down sufficiently after oven cooking has been performed in heating chamber 6, the display screen 2 will automatically switch to this state.

Although display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed simultaneously, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of a few seconds to alert users to both the bumping and high temperature indications. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may also be used to simultaneously output the alerts displayed on display screens 2A and 2B in audio format.

In the display screen 2C of FIG. 46, 60P is the above-mentioned acquisition operation support information. As shown in FIG. 46, the cooking appliance 1 acquires recipe data CD from the smartphone 200 or the like, and stores the acquired data in the recipe data storage unit 42 (see FIG. 16). The user US can recognize that this can also be acquired by voice by pressing the input key 180 (for selecting voice input mode 2) (the voice notification unit 50 may notify the user by voice in conjunction with this display).

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2A to 2C in FIG. 46, the display of these various pieces of information, including the acquisition operation support information 60P, is performed using the entire display screen. In other words, rather than displaying it partially in any of the first area 22 to third area 24 described above, in order to secure as large a display area as possible, the first area 22 to third area 24 are displayed as an integrated display so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user US sees it as being displayed in the entire central display section 16M.

Next, we will explain Figure 47.
FIG. 47 is an enlarged plan view illustrating the operation of the left display section 16L of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
Fig. 47 shows the third specific screen 16M3 for the single cooking mode KM1. This Fig. 47 is displayed when the input key 153L (see Fig. 12) is operated after the stage of step SS4 in Fig. 37.

Next, when the input key 152L is operated, the control menus to be implemented by the left heating port 4L are displayed one by one on the left display section 16L. As shown in the display screen 3A of FIG. 47, the user can separately set whether the control menu to be displayed first (default setting) is to be "Keep Warm," "Frying" on the display screen 3B, or "Preheat" on the display screen 3C.

Furthermore, when input key 153L is operated at step SM8 in FIG. 39, or when input key 152L is operated at step SM93 in FIG. 42, the control menu to be implemented at the left heating port 4L is displayed on the left display unit 16L. Each time input key 152L is pressed, the display of the control menu changes one by one (such as keep warm, deep fry, preheat, etc.). In other words, each time input key 152L is pressed, one of multiple control menus can be selected.

The control menus that can be selected for the left heating port 4L (in induction heating single cooking mode KM1) are, for example, "keep warm," "boil water," "stewing," "deep frying (automatic cooking)," "preheating," etc. The operating time, heat, or operating pattern of the left IH coil 9L differs for each control menu.

Display screen 3A in Fig. 47 shows a case where the "keep warm" control menu is selected. Display screen 3B shows a case where the "fry" control menu is selected. Display screen 3C shows a case where the "preheat" control menu is selected.
The auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portion of the name of each control menu on the third specific screen 16M3 after switching to the voice input mode. Therefore, it is not displayed when the mode is not the voice input mode.

When "Keep Warm" is selected from the control menu (in induction heating single cooking mode KM1) using the central IH coil 9M that is responsible for the central heating port 4C on the central display unit 16M, the display screen 3A shown in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, the central display unit 16M has a display form similar to that of the display screen 3A, and this screen is called the "third specific screen" 16M3.

Next, we will explain Figure 48.
Fig. 48 illustrates the operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 from when the cooking appliance 1 is started to immediately before cooking starts. This is the case where the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

In FIG. 48, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display unit 16M, it is determined whether recipe data CD for the collaborative cooking mode has been acquired from an external device (the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300) (step SU2).

In step SU3, the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking device 1 and determines whether the state satisfies permission condition 1 and permission condition 2.

If it is determined that permission conditions 1 and 2 are met simultaneously (SU6), the identification information 167 contained in the recipe data CD acquired from the external device (the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300) is displayed on the central display unit 16M. In this case, the identification information 167 (e.g., "Name: Hamburger") is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SU7).

In the step SU7, the identification information 167 (for example, "Name: Hamburger") is displayed as shown in FIG.
The operation support information 170 is also displayed. This prompts the user US to press the input key 151M to start cooking. The voice notification unit 50 also notifies the user, for example, "Press the start key to start cooking" (step SU8).

After step SU7, if the user US presses either input key 158M or 159M once, the food component display screen 16M1A (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is displayed. If the user further presses either input key 158M or 159M once, the food component display screen 16M1B (see FIG. 30) is displayed.

In addition, in step SU8, the user US may operate an input key (e.g., 156M or 155M) that can select a control condition (e.g., heat value) to set the heat, heating time, etc., as appropriate.

On the other hand, the case where the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking device 1 with that of the step SU3 and determines that the state does not satisfy permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 (step SU4) will be described.

The contents of the standby initial screen 16HM in the central display section 16M are partially changed, and a text message is displayed indicating that the recipe data CD acquired from the external device cannot be executed with the current cooking device 1. The same message is also audibly notified by the audio notification section 50 (step SU5). Then, the process returns to step SU1. This operation corresponds to the operation of step ST8 described in FIG. 35.

Next, we will explain Figure 49.
FIG. 49 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M, which are the same as those described in FIG.

In FIG. 49, 173 is an external recipe identification section that indicates that the recipe data CD is obtained from an external device (the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300). The words "Received Recipe" are displayed in text, and it is easy to see that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on this first specific screen 16M1 is a recipe obtained from outside.

In FIG. 49, the light-emitting unit 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is in a standby state in which the heating operation can be started at any time. To indicate this, the light-emitting unit 21M flashes to prompt the user to operate the input key 151M. The dashed circle indicates that the light-emitting unit 21M is flashing.

In FIG. 49, a star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light-emitting unit 21M. This figure indicates that the input functions of the input keys (e.g., 156M, 157M) located in front of the light-emitting unit 21M are active, and that by performing a touch operation at this point, the heat, heating time, etc. can be adjusted.

In FIG. 49, the light-emitting section 21M corresponding to the input keys 157M and 156M is illuminated. In other words, the user US can select either the heating section specification section 171L, which selects cooking using the left heating port 4L, or the heating section specification section 171R, which selects cooking using the right heating port 4R.

The recipe data CD acquired from the external device is displayed preferentially on the first specific screen 16M1 by displaying the external recipe identification section 173. In other words, the identification information 167 of the received recipe data CD is displayed in the "display position B" of the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, by pressing the input key 151M as shown in FIG. 49, cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3 can be started immediately.

As described above, there are two types of recipe data CD obtained from an external device (the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300): one in which cooking is limited to specific heating parts (right heating port 4R, center heating port 4C, left heating port 4L), and one in which cooking can be performed by specifying the range of heating parts that can be used according to the user US's wishes. Therefore, even when the user US uses recipe data CD obtained from an external device, usability is not impaired.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps of a collaborative cooking menu and operations on the input operation unit.
In the example of Figure 50, the collaborative cooking menu is composed of three cooking steps: cooking step 1, cooking step 2, and cooking step 3.
Cooking step 1 is an example in which the first heating means HM1 is used.

In the recipe data CD, in the example of Fig. 50, the following conditions are defined in a predetermined computer program format: Control conditions for heat power, etc. may also be defined.
(1) Waiting for input of the input key 151M to start induction heating operation at the right heating port 4R (or the left heating port 4L).
(2) When there is an input from input key 153R (153L), the heating operation is stopped, or when a certain condition (continuous cooking time or reaching of a target temperature) is met, the heating operation is stopped at that point.

The program included in the recipe data CD specifies heating pause periods P3 and P5, which will be described later, but the duration of these heating pause periods P3 and P5 is not specified. However, in order to prevent cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, it is possible to include processing that counts the elapsed time of each of cooking steps 1 and 2 based on the end points of each step, and issues an alarm when, for example, 30 minutes have elapsed, and forcibly stops the execution of the cooking menu.

In the example of recipe data CD in Figure 50, cooking step 1 is performed using the first heating means HM1, cooking step 2 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and finally cooking step 3 is provided in which the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 3 and induction heating is performed to finish off the cooking by compensating for insufficient heating.

In addition, this cooking device 1 has additional protection measures in place to prevent the cooking mode settings and control conditions from being inadvertently changed in response to an external command signal.

In the example of FIG. 50, the first heating means HM1 is operated first, and the second heating means HM2 is operated after the first heating operation is completed. However, the radiant heat heating means 12 may be operated as the third heating means at the same time as the second heating means HM2.

As shown in FIG. 50, the collaborative cooking menu shown here is composed of four steps.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 153M is operated to execute an integrated cooking menu to when the (induction) heating cooking operation is started by the input key 153R.

When the input key 153M is operated, if the "permission conditions" as described above are met, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that the first specific screen 16M1 is not shown in FIG. 50.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, one of the linked cooking menus can be selected by operating input keys 154M and 155M. After that, by operating input key 153R, the mode switches to linked cooking mode (using right heating port 4R) and proceeds to the heating and cooking step P2.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, if the identification information 167 of the linked cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed in a specified position on the first specific screen 16M1 (default display), there is no need to operate the input keys 154M and 155M.

P2 is a heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking step 1, when an appropriate food item N such as a metal pan is placed on the right heating port 4R and the input key 153R is pressed, the heating and cooking operation is started.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished judging the permission conditions (1 and 2) and therefore knows which heating part of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) is in use. In other words, it knows the use status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in cooking step 3 of the coordinated cooking mode, and occupies this right heating port 4R.

The cooking step 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the linked cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user, and the first specific screen 16M1 displays a message such as "x minutes will soon elapse." In other words, the user US is notified that the cooking step 1 is nearing completion.
To end cooking step 1, the user US only needs to press the input key 153R once.

P3 is the heating pause period during which cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 is temporarily stopped and cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started.

This heating pause period P3 is a period required for checking the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, for adding seasonings, or for adding another food to perform cooking step 2. It is also a period required for moving the food to the heating chamber 6.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 151M is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 at P4.

This cooking process 2 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 has been opened once during the pause period P3 and has been closed thereafter. The door open/close signal from the open/close detection unit 10 is utilized by the control device 40.
The control device 40 measures the time required from when the door 7 is opened until the door 7 is closed again, and if a certain allowable time TX is exceeded, a safety measure is adopted such that the heating operation will not start even if the input key 151M is pressed from that point onwards.

The cooking step 2 basically ends automatically when the heating time determined in advance by the operation program of the linked cooking menu has elapsed or when the temperature of the food to be cooked has risen to a set value (e.g., 90°C). For example, in one linked cooking menu, heating begins with a microwave output of 500 W. Furthermore, if the user US opens the door 7 at any time, the microwave irradiation is instantly stopped and the heating operation is stopped.

In cooking step 2 of P4, the user US may be able to individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M, but depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

In the example of Figure 50, cooking process 2 is ended by pressing input key 152M on central operation unit 15M. When input key 152M is pressed to command cooking to stop, cooking process 2 ends and the process proceeds to the heating pause period of P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, removes the food to be cooked from inside the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. The food to be cooked is placed inside a heated object N such as a metal pot.
Then, when the input key 153R for the right heating unit 4 is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the process proceeds to a heating cooking period P6 (the "cooking step 3" of induction heating).

This heating pause period P5 is a period required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 2, to add seasonings, or to add another food to be cooked and perform the next cooking step 3. For example, in cooking step 2, only frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking step 3, a food to be cooked that has been immersed in seasonings or cooking liquid, or that has been cooked separately by preheating, etc., can be added to the same heated food N. This broadens the range of cooking possibilities.

P6 switches from cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source) to cooking step 3 using the first heating means HM1 (in this case, induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking step 3, when cooking is performed using the right heating port 4R as described above, the user US can individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154R, 155R (see Figure 8).

In addition, if cooking step 3 is performed using the left heating port 4L, the user US can individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154L and 155L.

When input key 153R is pressed to command cooking to stop, cooking step 3 ends and the operation of the linked cooking mode ends. In the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time has elapsed, and cooking step 3 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 50, the right operation unit 15R of the right heating port 4R becomes unusable from the point in time when the start of cooking is decided using the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M, not when the linked cooking menu is selected, i.e., when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the cooking on the linked cooking menu is displayed on the central display unit 16M. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set by default, the left heating port 4L will be occupied.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction process.
(1) The input signal from the right operation unit 15R is disabled or the input is restricted. For example, the input functions of the input keys 151R and 152R are disabled. As a result, the right heating port 4R cannot be used (cannot input) during the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) to the heating cooking period (cooking step 3) except when input is required in the linked cooking mode KM3.
(2) Even when the heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left operation unit 15L can be used (the input signal from the left operation unit 15L is not invalidated).

In this way, when the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the control device 40 transitions from cooking process 1 to occupying only the right heating port 4R for cooking process 3.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating means HM1 as a whole, the use of only a portion (the right side) of the three heating parts is "restricted."

Even after the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the above-mentioned restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
In addition, in the stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that the cooperative cooking mode is in effect, so that the execution of other cooking menus is not restricted for the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2. This is also true for the heating pause period P3 to cooking process 2.

Furthermore, even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state before the heating cooking period (cooking process 2) begins, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature in the heating chamber 6 as indicating that cooking is complete even before cooking has begun.
Therefore, if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), the first specific screen 15M1 displays the message that "the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used immediately due to high temperature."

The periods indicated by the thick arrows in Figure 50 are the restricted period for receiving one recipe data CD and the restricted period for acquiring additional recipe data CD.

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the limiting operation is performed by the limiting unit 55 as follows.
It should be noted that the communication unit 51 enables the reception and transmission functions at the point in time when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).

That is, the limiting unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in Fig. 50, it is not possible to change a cooking menu A of a specific cooperative cooking mode OK3 obtained from outside to another cooking menu B (e.g., "hamburger steak") of the same cooperative cooking mode KM3. To change it, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to temporarily cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the time limit indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 50 is reached, the cooking using the specific linked cooking menu A obtained from outside can be cancelled at any time by operating the input key 152M. Once a cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the initial standby screen 16MH, and in this state, it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again.

In addition, for a specific linked cooking menu A based on recipe data CD acquired from outside, during the period until all cooking processes are completed, the control device 40 cannot acquire recipe data CD of another linked cooking menu C from outside (such as the smartphone 200).

In other words, when the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 50 begins, by operating the input key 151M, it is possible to decide to start cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3, and to carry out cooking using the recipe data CD of the specific linked cooking menu A acquired immediately before this decision. However, until all cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, further recipe data CD cannot be acquired from outside.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 51 to 55.
Fig. 51 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable section and control operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in the cooking device 1. Fig. 52 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable section and control operation of the composite cooking mode KM2 in the cooking device 1. Fig. 53 is a time chart showing a modified example 1 of the time chart shown in Fig. 51. Fig. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit 15 and the central display unit 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 corresponding to the modified example of Fig. 53. Fig. 55 is a time chart showing a modified example 2 of the time chart shown in Fig. 51.

In FIG. 51, SA1 to SA9 indicate the operation of the control device 40.
First, the control device 40 detects that the main power switch 20 is turned on (step SA1), transmits data indicating that the device has been started (operating state data OS) from the communication unit 51 to the outside, and starts a self-diagnosis mode (SA2). That is, the control device 40 checks whether the components of the cooking appliance 1, such as the circuits and sensors, are normal.

Next, the display unit 16 is activated to display the standby initial screen 16MH (SA3). After this, the standby initial screen 16MH displays a message prompting the user US to select a heating method, and the audio notification unit 50 provides similar audio guidance (SA3A).

Next, the user US presses the input key 153M to select the collaborative cooking mode KM3. This is step SA4 in FIG. 51.

The "initial standby period" TP in this embodiment 1 is the period that begins from step SA3A, and the timing at which this initial standby period TP ends is when the input key for starting the heating operation is pressed (SA7). In the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the input key for starting is input key 151M.

The initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). In other words, the initial waiting period TP is limited to, for example, a maximum of 30 minutes by the processing of step SM5 described in FIG. 42.

Next, during the initial standby period TP while waiting for a command to start the heating operation as described above, unless the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is pressed, the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.
In this case, when the input key 153M is operated, a "recipe acquisition permission condition" described later is satisfied. That is, the program is set to permit the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD.

In other words, if the user US presses the input key 153M after step SA3A, the acquisition of recipe data CD for the linked cooking mode KM3 is permitted at the stage of pressing the input key (in the case of the combined cooking mode KM2, it is input key 154M or 155M). In the case of the single cooking mode KM1, which uses the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, it is necessary to press the input key 153R or 153L.

Incidentally, the input key 153M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the point in time when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 51, and during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by input key 151M.

Next, the combination cooking mode KM2 will be described.
In FIG. 52, the user US operates the input key 154M to select the combined cooking mode KM2 (step SA4).
Then, during the initial waiting period TP, at the time of step SA4 when the input key 154M is pressed, the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied.

If the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied during the initial standby period TP, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD for the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "warming") once via the communication unit 51.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 acquired from outside can be cancelled by the input key 152M.
In practice, in the initial standby period TP, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed first, and after the identification information 160 of the recipe data CD is displayed on that screen, the input key 152M may be pressed.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the control conditions of the acquired recipe data CD can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 156M to 159M (some control conditions cannot be changed). Again, the control conditions are displayed on the displayed second specific screen 16M1, so all that is required is to look at the display and press the input key 156M, etc.

Incidentally, the input key 154M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the point in time when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 52, and during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for the combined cooking mode KM2 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by input key 151M.

52, the initial standby period TP ends when the input key 151M is operated (SA7), and the actual heating operation starts immediately thereafter (SA9).
As described above, the initial standby period TP ends at step SA9, and thereafter, recipe data CD for another composite cooking mode KM2 cannot be acquired from outside (however, if the composite cooking mode KM2 is cancelled with the input key 152M during the cooking process, recipe data CD can be acquired again).

The time difference between the acquisition of recipe data CD by step SA3 and step SA4 in FIG. 52 is limited to 30 minutes. If 30 minutes is exceeded, the control device 40 forcibly turns off the main power switch 20 for safety reasons, since there is a possibility that the user US has forgotten to input the operation. Alternatively, it issues a command to perform an operation such as issuing an alarm via the audio notification unit 51 (see step SL8 in FIG. 43).

In addition, instead of restricting the time difference between the acquisition of recipe data CD by steps SA3 and SA4 to within 30 minutes, the period from step SA3A to step SA4, which is the point at which the initial waiting period TP begins, may be restricted to within 30 minutes.

As is clear from FIG. 52, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 during the initial waiting period TP is the period TB1 during which recipe data CD for the composite cooking mode KM2 can be acquired.

Within the initial standby period TP, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a cancelable period TB2 for the recipe data CD in the composite cooking mode.
The period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a period TB3 during which the control conditions (control data) of the recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode KM2 can be changed.

Next, Fig. 53 will be described. Fig. 53 is a time chart showing a first modified example of the time chart shown in Fig. 51. Like Fig. 51, SA1 to SA9 show the operation of the heating control section 43 of the control device 40 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM3 is performed.
Step SA4 is the time when the user US touches the input key 153M to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In the case of Fig. 53, the initial standby period TP also starts from step SA3A and ends when the input key 151M is pressed.

Even in the case of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 53, the input key 153M is pressed during the initial standby period TP, which is limited to a predetermined time (for example, within 30 minutes), so the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is met at the time of step SA4.

When the “recipe acquisition permission condition” is satisfied, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD of the collaborative cooking mode KM2 via the communication unit 51 only once.
In FIG. 53, the timing of obtaining the recipe data CD is different from that in the example shown in FIG. 51, as will be described below.

If the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is not pressed during the initial standby period TP, the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected. In other words, the recipe data CD to be acquired cannot be identified.

When input key 153M is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied. In other words, the data acquisition unit 53 is programmed to permit acquisition of the recipe data CD. From the point of step SA4, the recipe data CD can be acquired (note that in reality, since the recipe data CD is subject to restrictions such as the performance of the communication infrastructure, acquisition may not be completed instantly, and may take several to 20 seconds).

Incidentally, the input key 153M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the point in time when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

However, there are cases where the user US does not realize that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode 1 at the above-mentioned stage. Alternatively, there are cases where the user US is not aware of the long press operation.
53, after the automatic switching, when the first specific screen 16M1 indicates that the recipe data CD has been acquired, the screen also indicates that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1. At the same time, the voice notification unit 50 also notifies the user. An actual example of the first specific screen 16M1 is shown in FIG.

51, input in voice input mode 1 is accepted. Therefore, from step SA5 onwards, the control conditions for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by input key 151M.

Next, we will explain Figure 54.
FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit 15 and the central display unit 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 corresponding to the modified example of FIG.
There are two types of auxiliary information 179 shown in Fig. 62. One is voice input mode display information 179D which indicates that voice input is being accepted because the mode is voice input mode. The other is reference information 179E which recommends input of control conditions and includes examples (standard values) of control conditions which can be input.

At the stage in FIG. 54, as is clear from the fact that the light-emitting sections 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M to 169M are not illuminated, it is not possible to input control conditions by touching each of these input keys (because in this example, they are set to the above-mentioned "touch input mode 1A").
Furthermore, as is clear from the fact that the light-emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is not emitting light, even if the input key 151M is pressed, the heating operation cannot be started at this stage, because the input of the control conditions has not been completed.

Next, we will explain Figure 55.
FIG. 55 is a time chart for explaining the entirety of the obtainable period of recipe data CD and control operations in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and shows a second modified example of the time chart shown in FIG.

In this FIG. 55, SA1 to SA9 indicate the operation of the control device 40, similarly to FIG.
55, the hardware configuration of the voice input dedicated key 180 is changed. Specifically, the operation surface of the input key 180 is configured to be illuminated from below by a light emitting element (LED) (not shown) arranged below the operation surface.

The input function of the input key 180 is enabled when the control device 40 is started and the input key 153M or the input key 154M is touched (step SA4). After the input function is enabled, the input key 180 is illuminated by the light-emitting element (not shown) and becomes prominent in the operation unit 15.

The initial standby period TP also begins when the standby initial screen 16MH prompts the user US to select a cooking mode (step SA3A).

As in FIG. 51, step SA4 is the point in time when either input key 153M or input key 154M is touched. At this point in time, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied, so that acquisition of recipe data CD can be executed. Thereafter, when input key 151M is operated, the initial waiting period TP ends.

In the example of FIG. 55, after the input key 153M is touched, recipe data for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 can be obtained from the outside via the communication unit 51. When the input key 154M is touched without touching the input key 153M, recipe data for the combined cooking mode KM2 can be obtained.

If the input key 180 is touch-operated at the time of step SA5 after the input key 153M or 154M is operated, the control device 40 transitions to the voice input mode 2. Therefore, after step SA5, the user US can input the control conditions by voice.
55, since the voice input mode 2A is selected, the input functions of (a part of) the input keys (e.g., 156M) other than the voice input dedicated key 180 are temporarily disabled. Therefore, even if the input keys 156M and 157M are touched, no input can be made.

Next, we will explain Figure 56.
56 shows the main processing of the control device 40 up to the start of cooking based on recipe data CD obtained from the outside. In particular, it shows the processing for displaying data on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients.

In FIG. 56, the recipe data CD acquired from the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 is stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41 (step SS30). Then, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS31). This stage corresponds to step SS13 described in FIG. 44.

At step SS31, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M. In other words, at least the identification information 167 is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 27).

In the next step SS32, in order to display the food ingredients, it is determined whether a display command has been issued from the user US. If, in the example of FIG. 27, the system has already transitioned to voice input mode 1, and a defined term (phrase) such as "food ingredients" or "calories" is uttered by voice, the determination in step SS32 is "Yes." This voice signal is analyzed by the voice signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 16), and data on the food ingredients of the target cooking menu is read from the storage device 41.

The first specific screen 16M1 displays a food component display screen 16M1A as shown in Fig. 30(A) (step SS33). The amounts of energy, protein, fat and carbohydrate are displayed.
Next, the process proceeds to step SS34 for judging whether the input key 151M is pressed. In this step SS34, the input is waited for a certain period of time until the user US performs an operation. If the input key 151M is pressed during the waiting time, the display returns to the first specific screen 16M1. Then, the driving of the heating means (such as the first heating means HM1) is started (SS35).

If the input key 158M is not pressed and no voice command is given to display food ingredients within a certain period of time from step SS31, the determination in step SS32 will be "No."

If the determination in step SS32 is "No", the process proceeds to step SS36. In step SS36, a determination is made as to whether or not a command to display the nutritional components of the food has been issued. In the example of FIG. 27, since the process has already transitioned to voice input mode 1, at the stage of step SS36, a specified term (phrase) such as "nutrients" or "nutrition" is spoken.

Then, the audio signal is analyzed by the audio signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 12) and the nutritional component data of the target cooking menu is read from the storage device 41. Then, step SS36 is judged as "Yes." Note that even if the input key 180 is pressed again to cancel the audio input mode 2 and then the input key 156M is pressed, step SS36 is also judged as "Yes."

If step SS36 is judged as "Yes", the display unit 16 displays a nutritional component display screen 16M1B as shown in FIG. 30(B) (step SS37). The amounts of energy, protein, fat and iron are then displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step SS34.

As mentioned above, if the function setting input key 151KP has not been operated in advance to set the food ingredients and nutritional components to be displayed individually each time before cooking begins, the operations of steps SS33 and SS37 shown in FIG. 56 will not be performed.

Note that the examples in Figures 51 to 55 do not show the single cooking mode KM1, but like the recipe data CD for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the coordinated cooking mode KM3, it can be acquired from outside via the communication unit 51 during the initial standby period TP.

Summary of embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device according to the first disclosure is as follows:
Heating means (first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, etc.) for heating the object to be heated N;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving instructions from a user;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (151M to 159M, etc.) for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key,
After starting up the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 is characterized in that, when it receives a command to start the voice input mode from the input operation unit 15 while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, it enables the recipe data CD to be acquired via the communication unit 51, and also accepts a command to set control conditions for the recipe data CD.
Specifically, the input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting three types (linked, combined, single) of cooking modes or cooking menus,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch to the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) based on the touch state of the input keys, and issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1.
The control device 40 is configured such that, when it receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, it is capable of acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and also accepts a command to set control conditions from the user US.

Because of this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from the outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15. In addition, the touch-type input keys on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure,
The control device 40 has an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time lag to perform one cooking operation,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 (see step SB1 in FIG. 34) for selecting a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 from the input operation unit 15, if the permission conditions (see FIGS. 24 and 25) are satisfied, the control device 40 displays a first specific screen 16M1 for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3 on the display unit 16 (see step S2 in FIG. 23),
The control device 40 is configured such that, when command 2 is received from the input operation unit 15 (input keys 158M, 159M or audio signal receiving unit 56) while the first specific screen 16M1 is being displayed (see Figures 17 and 18), information on at least one of the amounts of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients for a specific dish (see Figure 30) that can be executed in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the display unit 16.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the user can easily obtain information on the ingredients and nutrients of the food related to the cooking menu. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US.

For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on the amount of food ingredients and nutrients depending on the family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., which can contribute to improving their eating habits.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure,
The display is switched between a dedicated food component display screen 16M1A showing the identification information 167 of one cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") and the food components, and a dedicated nutritional component display screen 16M1B showing the identification information 167 and the nutritional components, so that the user US can easily and clearly identify each piece of information.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is realized in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food in the heating chamber 6;
An input operation unit 15;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A communication unit 51 that receives recipe data CD for executing cooking from an external device;
A control device 40,
The control device 40 has an integrated cooking menu KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time lag to perform one cooking operation,
The input operation unit has a voice signal receiving unit 56 which serves as a voice input means, and various input keys 151M to 159M, 151R to 155R, and 151L to 155L which serve as a touch input means unit,
The control device 40 has a heating control unit 43 that controls a heating operation corresponding to the linked cooking mode KM3, and a data acquisition unit 53 that acquires the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 for a specific food to be cooked.
The control device 40 enables the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD during an initial standby period TP,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 to select the cooperative cooking menu KM3 from either the voice input means or the touch input means, if the permission conditions are satisfied, the control device 40 displays a specific cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as a first specific screen 16M1 on the display unit 16,
When the control device 40 receives a command 2 from either the voice input means or the touch input means while the first specific screen 16M1 is being displayed, it displays at least one of information on food ingredients or nutrients related to the cooking menu (food ingredient display screen 16M1A or nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B),
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD when the voice input means and the touch input means are operated within a first limit period TX,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch to a voice input mode (voice input mode 1) based on the touch state of the input keys, and issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1.
when the control device 40 receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 from the input operation unit 15 during a display period of the first specific screen 16M1, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and receives a control condition setting command by voice of the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, information on the ingredients and nutrients of each food item can be easily obtained. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu from information on food ingredients and nutritional components depending on the situation, such as family health management and dietary restrictions, which can contribute to improving eating habits.

Furthermore, since the recipe data CD relating to the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is received through a special operation by the user US, the timing of data acquisition from outside is controlled.
In other words, when the voice input means and the touch input means satisfy the condition of being operated within the first limit period TX (see FIG. 43 in particular), the recipe data CD can be acquired, so that the recipe data CD is not inadvertently received due to the communication terminal device 200 approaching, etc. This can improve the sense of security of the user US.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, specific input keys (input keys 154M, 153L, 153R) of the input operation unit 15 are also used as a selection unit for the voice input mode 1.
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15, and the user US can easily switch to voice input mode 1, thereby preventing a decrease in operability.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, the specific input keys (input keys 154M, 153L, 153R) which are the selection section for the voice input mode 1 are also used for acquiring the recipe data.
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15, and to prevent a decrease in operability for the user US.

In addition, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites for starting the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (permission conditions 1 and 2) are met. Therefore, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (e.g., heat level, target temperature, heating time, etc.), it is not determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not met, and the steps are not forcibly returned to the first standby initial screen 16MH. Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 is provided with a selection key 180 for selecting a voice input mode 2 using the voice input means.
Therefore, even if the user US has his/her hands full during cooking and cannot perform touch operations, he/she can conveniently give instructions by voice.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the acquisition condition for acquiring recipe data CD from outside is met when the input key 180 and one input key of the touch input unit (e.g., input key 153M) are operated within the first time limit (TX).

In other words, the initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). For example, it is a maximum of 30 minutes.

Therefore, even if the user US stops operating the input operation unit 15 midway for some reason, the cooking appliance 1 automatically disables input (by forcibly opening the main power switch 20). This prevents cooking control data and the like from being acquired from an external source without the user US's knowledge, improving safety.

The input operation unit 15 is provided with an input key 180 as a selection unit for voice input mode 2, and an input key (e.g., input key 158M) for commanding the display of information on the food component data DD, providing good operability for the user US.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11 of the first embodiment, in a configuration in which the input keys 180 and an input key (e.g., input key 158M) that commands the display of information on food component data DD are located on the central operation unit M, and since the central display unit 16M is also located nearby, when the user US is standing in front of (near) the central operation unit 15M while cooking, the necessary display and operation units are within the range that the user US can operate and can see, and the user US can operate without moving from his/her standing position. This is expected to have benefits such as reducing the physical burden on the user US while cooking.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, when the input key 180 is not operated and when one of the input keys (154M) of the input operation unit 15 is not operated within a first time limit (TX), the control device 40 is configured to perform at least one of the following operations: cutting off the supply of main power or instructing the alarm unit 90 to perform an alarm operation (see automatic cutoff process 1 in FIG. 44).

That is, as explained in FIG. 27, the time elapsed from the determination step (SS10) of whether the input key 180 or the input key 154M that can switch to the voice input mode 1 has been operated is limited to, for example, within 30 minutes. Or, the time elapsed from the first step SS5 in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed is limited to within 30 minutes.

Therefore, if the user US forgets or is unable to perform an input operation for some reason, the control device 40 will forcibly open the main power switch 20 or issue an alarm from a safety standpoint, thereby improving safety.

Further, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 has a function setting key 151KP,
When the function setting key 151KP is operated, the control device 40 transitions to a function setting mode,
The function setting mode is configured to enable setting of whether or not the food ingredients or nutritional ingredients are to be displayed in the central display section 16M, and the conditions under which they are to be displayed.

This configuration allows functions to be set according to the user US's wishes, level of proficiency, etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1,
The heating cooker 1 is characterized in that the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed.

This configuration allows the two heating means to be selected and each cooking mode (single cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and linked cooking mode KM3) to be performed sequentially without interfering with each other. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, because of the restriction unit 55, once recipe data for one specific linked cooking menu A is acquired, the control device 40 will not inadvertently acquire recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu B immediately before the start of a cooking process or during a cooking process. Therefore, for example, another cooking menu (including a control menu for a combined cooking mode or a control menu for a single cooking mode) will not be inadvertently received during linked cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion of the user US due to reception or operational interference on the cooking appliance 1 side.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 15 is disclosed to have a configuration in which input keys 153L and 153R for selecting the single cooking mode KM1, input keys 154M and 155M for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2, and an input key 153M for selecting the linked cooking mode KM3 are separately provided.

With this configuration, the three cooking modes can be selected individually using the respective input keys (input means), improving the operability for the user US even in a cooking device 1 with an increased number of heating sources.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The restriction unit 55 restricts acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until a cooking process of a cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed,
After the recipe data is acquired, if the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is canceled by the input operation unit 15 before the cooking process is started, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD again.

This prevents the inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) during coordinated cooking, and allows the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD to be executed stably.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent problems with the operation of the control device 40 and to prevent misunderstandings or confusion on the part of the user US, which may occur due to the inadvertent receipt of recipe data CD for a different cooking menu during the cooking process.

Furthermore, when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is canceled, the recipe data CD previously acquired and not used for cooking can be canceled, and further desired recipe data CD can be acquired, thereby preventing the user US from becoming confused about the recipe data CD.

Further, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed on the top plate 3;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving commands from a user US;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
a display unit 16 for displaying cooking information and a notification unit 90 having a voice notification unit 50;
A control device 40,
The control device 40 has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode KM3, a composite cooking mode KM2, and a single cooking mode KM1,
After the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 15, the control device 40
(1) Displaying the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH on the display unit 16,
(2) When the touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, 155M for selecting either the linked cooking mode KM3 or the composite cooking mode KM2 are operated, the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition and use of the recipe data CD acquired from the communication unit 51,
(3) When the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M are operated, the display of the initial screen (common screen) 16MH is automatically changed to the display of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2.
(4) While the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 is being displayed, the process moves to an initial standby period TP in which a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit 15,
(5) During the initial standby period TP, the acquisition of the recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 is limited to one time.
(6) When a specific input key (154M) among the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M is touched, a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 is generated from the input operation unit 15 in response to the touch state, and the mode transitions to a “voice input mode of control conditions” for executing the recipe data CD.

According to this configuration, once the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH is displayed, it can be easily understood that by operating the selection input keys 153M, 154M, 155M thereafter, the first specific screen 16M1 and the second specific screen 16M2 dedicated to the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be displayed, thereby enabling recipe data to be obtained from outside.
You can also use some of the input keys to switch to a voice input mode.
This makes it possible to avoid confusion or misunderstanding in the input operations by the user US from immediately after the main power is turned on until cooking begins, and it is expected that usability will be improved by utilizing voice input and touch input.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device according to the second disclosure is as follows:
A first heating means HM1;
A second heating means HM2;
A first input operation unit (right operation unit 15R, left operation unit 15L) that receives a user's command regarding the first heating means;
A second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M) that receives a user's command regarding the second heating means;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A control device 40,
The first input operation unit (right operation unit 15R, left operation unit 15L) has touch-type input keys A (153L, 153R) for selecting cooking contents,
The second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M) has touch-type input keys B (153M, 154M) for selecting cooking contents,
The one input operation unit (right operation unit 15R, left operation unit 15L) instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key A (153L, 153R),
The second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M) instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key B (153M, 154M),
When the control device 40 receives a command to start the voice input mode from the second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M), the control device 40 enables acquisition of recipe data CD related to the second heating means HM2 via the communication unit 51, and receives a command to set control conditions for the recipe data CD;
When cooking using the recipe data CD is started, the voice input mode for the second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M) is released.

Because of this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from the outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15. In addition, the touch-type input keys on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, when the input process for one cooking cycle is completed and cooking starts, the voice input mode is automatically cancelled and the default touch input mode is restored, so when starting input for the next cooking cycle, there is no need to touch input keys just to cancel the voice input mode, making it easy to use.

Furthermore, in the cooking device according to the second disclosure, the control device 40 is configured not to simultaneously accept a command to start the voice input mode for the second input operation unit (15M) and a command to start the voice input mode for the first input operation unit (15L, 15R).

Because of this configuration, in a cooking device 1 equipped with multiple input operation units (a central operation unit 15M and left and right operation units 15L, 15R), even if one input operation unit is being operated while another input operation unit is being operated, the input task can be performed in the input operation unit that was started earlier without being affected by the input operation unit that was started later (the voice input mode setting). Therefore, even if the user US accidentally touches a different input operation unit, the original input task is not invalidated or interrupted.

Furthermore, in the cooking device according to the second disclosure, the control device 40 validates the touch input of either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever occurs first, and does not start the input process using the other input key until input of the control conditions for the cooking mode or control mode is completed and a cooking start command is received by operating the start key 151M.

Due to this configuration, in a cooking device 1 equipped with multiple input operation units (central operation unit 15M and left and right operation units 15L, 15R), even if one input operation unit is being operated while another input operation unit is being operated, the input operation unit operated later cannot perform any valid input to the control device 40, so the original input task can be performed without being affected by the input operation unit operated later (setting of voice input mode). Therefore, even if the user US accidentally touches a different input operation unit, the input task of the original input operation unit is not invalidated or interrupted.

In addition to the above, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) At least one input key for selecting the "voice input mode 1" (long press) is provided for each heating cooking menu. That is, a total of four input keys are provided corresponding to three types of menus: the linked cooking menu, the "RG menu group" in Fig. 18 (excluding the "IH menu group" in Fig. 18), and the control menu group for the induction heating single cooking mode KM1.
That is, it has four input keys 153M (for the coordinated cooking mode), 154M, 153L, and 153R.

(2) The control menu group for the induction heating only cooking mode KM1 can be executed by heating cooking at the heating port 4R using the right operation unit 15R, and heating cooking at the left heating port 4L using the left operation unit 15L. Therefore, input keys 153L and 153R are provided that can select "voice input mode 1" (can be operated by "long press") in correspondence with the left and right operation units 15L and 15R, respectively.

(3) Although there are three input operation units, when an input key (e.g., 154M) that can select "voice input mode 1" on one input operation unit (e.g., central operation unit 15M) is pressed on that operation unit, the input process on the other input operation units (left and right operation units 15L, 15R in this case) cannot be started, and voice input mode 1 cannot be selected either. However, in the above case, when cooking is being performed on the other input operation units (left and right operation units 15L, 15R in this case), it is possible to operate the input keys on those input operation units by "touch input". Therefore, the heat can be changed or heating stopped during cooking without any restrictions.

In other words, when one input key (e.g., 154M) is pressed to set "voice input mode" in one of the multiple input operation units, the input process for "starting new cooking" cannot be started in the other input operation units. In an input operation unit that is already performing cooking, input operations other than the voice input mode are possible. Therefore, cooking that is being performed can be controlled (e.g., stopping heating, changing heat, etc.) by operations other than voice input (touching, pressing).

This unique configuration makes it possible to avoid simultaneous voice input at one input operation unit and another input operation unit, so when cooking at two locations simultaneously, or when cooking at one location and starting another cooking operation, there is no interference between the input commands, making it possible to execute reliable input operations and ensuring high safety.

Embodiment 2.
Figures 57 to 80 show a cooking device and a cooking system according to embodiment 2. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configuration of embodiment 1 described in Figures 1 to 56 are given the same reference numerals.

In this second embodiment, the configuration of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration of the cloud server 300 has also been changed.

In this second embodiment, too, when recipe data (including the above-mentioned "display condition data") is acquired from an external communication terminal device 200 or the like, the restriction unit 55 restricts some of the input functions and display functions on the cooking appliance 1 side. To this end, the data acquisition unit 53 issues various control commands in response to the operation of acquiring recipe data from the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51.

Referring to Figure 57 .
A refrigerator 403 and a cooking appliance 1 are installed inside the kitchen 601, and the refrigerator 403 and the cooking appliance 1 can transmit and receive information to and from the wireless router 340 via wireless communication.

The wireless router 340 also serves as an access point to a network NW such as the Internet, etc. The wireless router 340 can access the first server 321 in an external space.
In this embodiment 6, the cloud server 300 described in the first embodiment includes a first server 321, a second server 322, a recipe data providing server 301, and a food component information server 326 described later.

The cooking appliance 1 can acquire at least recipe data CD through wireless communication 400 with the communication terminal device (smartphone) 200. This recipe data CD includes not only cooking control data for executing the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, but also cooking control data for the combined cooking mode KM2.

In this second embodiment, the communication terminal 200 can directly communicate with the wireless router 340 for the cooking appliance 1. The basic configuration of this communication terminal 200 is the same as that of the communication terminal 200 described in the first embodiment.

As will be explained in FIG. 59, the communication terminal device 200 has notification data 223 and remote control data 224. The notification data 223 and remote control data 224 may be obtained by connecting to a first server 321, which is an information providing means, via a network NW and downloading the data from the first server 321.

The cooking appliance database 217 also stores food ingredient and nutritional component data 226, which is obtained via the second server 322 from a food ingredient information server 326 that provides various types of food ingredient information. The symbol DD is food ingredient information that includes both food ingredient and nutritional component data.

The food composition information server 326 may use data from, for example, the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan 2020 Edition (8th Edition)" published by the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology.

The communication terminal device 200 can transmit recipe data CD and remote control information RS, such as commands to perform cooking operations, to the cooking appliance 1.

The communication terminal 200 has a voice input section 222 (see FIG. 59) for converting voice from a user US into a predetermined voice input signal VS.
Therefore, when the user US speaks into this communication terminal device 200, a voice input signal (voice data) VS can be transmitted to the second server 322. In other words, necessary input operations can be performed without touching the touch operation unit 215 (see FIG. 59).

When the cooking appliance 1 is activated, the user US can provide speech information to the communication terminal device 200 by voice, for example, to extract the desired recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301 and provide it to the cooking appliance 1.

For example, since the recipient of the voice input signal VS is the second server 322, the speech information may include, for example, "XXX (an example of a name or nickname that identifies the second server 322), looking for a recipe for collaborative cooking."
The spoken information “XXX, look for a recipe” is one piece of external command information that can be applied to the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the speech information "XXX, looking for a recipe for collaborative cooking" is information that specifies the cooking mode for the cooking device 1.

Furthermore, the speech information "Looking for a recipe for XXX that can be done in the microwave and induction" is speech information that extracts cooking menus that are possible in the collaborative cooking mode KM3.

This speech information can be converted into standard commands prepared in advance in the second server 322.

The speech information issued by the user US to the communication terminal device 200 is converted to text data in the communication terminal device 200 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS).

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the memory unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts the text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands (also called "command data") that are prepared as standard commands. The "commands" here include instructions to extract recipe data for performing one cooking from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301. The input/output unit 322A is, for example, an API gateway.

The first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet.
An inquiry signal (inquiry data) SN is transmitted from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This inquiry signal SN is, for example, a command requesting that the recipe data CD be extracted from the recipe data providing server 301. It is also a command signal generated by an input operation of the communication terminal device 200 when a user wishes to know various data on the operating state of the cooking appliance 1 (for example, the contents and progress of the cooking process). In other words, these data are operation support data GS for the user US.

In addition, since the second server 322 does not require special control or processing specific to the cooking appliance 1, it is possible to use existing servers, such as servers of various systems such as AI assistants, intelligent assistants, and smart speakers.

The first server 321 shown in FIG. 57 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that manufactured the cooking appliance 1, and has a thorough understanding of the special controls and processes that are unique to the cooking appliance 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "cooker control information"), and is therefore able to accurately grasp the operating state of the cooking appliance 1 (including both heating and non-heating operations). The memory unit 321R stores data corresponding to the "cooker control information". Therefore, if the first server 321 acquires the operating state data OS described below, the first server 321 can accurately analyze the operating status of the cooking appliance 1 in real time.

The first server 321 transmits various "operational state data" from the cooking appliance 1 as described later.
is configured to be acquired as needed via the wireless router 340.

The operating status data OS includes data indicating the ON/OFF state of the main power switch 20, selection data for the combined cooking mode KM3, data on control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and the latest temperature measurement data for the top plate 3 and heating chamber 6.

The recipe data providing server 301 is capable of wirelessly communicating with the first server 321 to receive information. Note that a "system control server" that acts as a control means for linking the recipe data providing server 301, the first server 321, the recipe data providing server 301, etc. is not shown.

The recipe data providing server 301 may be incorporated and integrated into the first server 321. The food ingredient information server 326 is connected to the first server 321 via a wired or wireless communication network NW.

The first server 321 is configured so that each cooking appliance 1 is preregistered, and the operating status data OS transmitted from each cooking appliance 1 is acquired in association with the user US of the cooking appliance 1.

The first server 321 has an input/output unit 321A for individually performing wireless communication with the wireless router 340 and the second server 322. This input/output unit 321A is, for example, an API gateway. This input/output unit 321 receives recipe data from the recipe data providing server 301.

The first server 321 includes a controller 321C. The controller 321C decodes an inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits the control information to the second server 322.
In addition, the operating status data OS transmitted from a large number of heating cookers 1 and a user US ID (specific information) that identifies the user US of each heating cooker 1 are analyzed, and the heating cooker 1 of each user US is identified from information in the user US identification database held in the memory unit 321R.

The first server 321 has a database of the control of each preregistered cooking appliance 1 in the memory unit 321R. Therefore, if the data requested by a cooking appliance 1 does not match the cooking appliance 1, the data is not transmitted.

Similarly, even if the first server 321 receives a query signal SN from the communication terminal 200, it transmits specific operation support data GS via the second server to the communication terminal 200 in a set with data such as the model identification number. For this reason, for example, if the communication terminal 200 inputs control conditions that are not compatible with specific recipe data CD, the first server 321 does not accept such input, or notifies the communication terminal 200 of the reason for not accepting it. For this reason, in the case of voice input mode, if the control conditions input (spoken) by the user via the communication terminal 200 exceed the range permitted by the cooking appliance 1, the communication terminal 200 is notified and requested to input different control conditions.

Furthermore, the first server 321 also has a function of controlling the timing of providing the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu obtained from the recipe data providing server 301 to the second server 322. This will be explained in detail later.

In this second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an input key 180 for selecting voice input is arranged in the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch-type input switch like input keys 153M to 159M.

Next, we will explain Figure 58.
FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of cooking appliance 1, and corresponds to FIG. 16 of embodiment 1. As shown in FIG.
As is clear from Fig. 58, the control device 40 of this embodiment 2 does not have a configuration corresponding to the voice signal analysis unit 58 shown in Fig. 16 of the embodiment 1. In other words, the control device 40 does not have a function of receiving a voice signal from the outside and analyzing it.

The control device 40 of this embodiment 2 does not have a configuration equivalent to the audio signal receiving unit 56 shown in FIG. 16 of the first embodiment. In other words, the input operation unit 15 of this embodiment 2 does not have a function for receiving an audio signal from the outside. The other configurations are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 of the first embodiment, so duplicated explanations will be omitted.

Next, we will explain Figure 59. This Figure 59 is a block diagram explaining the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. This Figure 59 corresponds to Figure 17 of the first embodiment. Note that the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L are basically configured in the same way as the central operation unit 15M.

As is clear from Fig. 59, the control device 40 has an input signal analysis section 52. This input signal analysis section 52 has an input mode determination section 52C.
The input mode determination unit 52C receives the measurement time data MJ from the input operation unit 15 (15M, 15L, 15R), and if the measurement time data MJ is 5 seconds or more, with a predetermined threshold (for example, 5 seconds) as the boundary, determines that the input mode is "voice input mode 1." If the measurement time data MJ is less than this threshold, the input mode determination unit 52C determines that the input mode is a normal "short press" operation.

The "measurement time data MJ" input from the input operation unit 15 to the control device 40 corresponds to a voice input mode corresponding signal.

Meanwhile, each of the input operation units 15L, 15M, 15L including the central operation unit 15M is provided with a time measurement unit 15T. Measured time data MJ measured by the time measurement unit 15T is transmitted as is to the input signal analysis unit 52 of the control device 40.
That is, the time measurement unit 15 T measures the “touch time” from when the user US touches the screen with his/her finger until when he/she releases the touch screen, and transmits the measured time data MJ to the input signal analysis unit 52 .

The input mode determination unit 52C analyzes the measured time data MJ (voice input mode corresponding signal), and if it determines that the setting conditions for "voice input mode 1" are met, it outputs an input mode switching signal MC2 to the input control unit 70. For example, if the measured time data MJ is time data with a length equal to or longer than a threshold value (e.g., 5 seconds), it is determined that the setting conditions for voice input mode 1 are met, and outputs an input mode switching signal MC2.

15D is a storage unit. This storage unit 15D stores various control parameters such as the touch detection unit 15A and the time measurement unit 15T described above, program information for the judgment process, etc.

Reference numeral 15E denotes a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
An input signal transmitting unit 15F transmits the above-mentioned unique identification signal of the input key, the measured time data MJ of the “touch time”, and the like to the input signal analyzing unit 52 of the control device 40.

In FIG. 59, the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, the memory unit 15D, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but rather than configuring them as separate hardware, each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer.

In FIG. 59, the input mode determination unit 52C is depicted as part of the input signal analysis unit 52, but it may be configured separately on hardware. Also, for example, the functions of the input mode determination unit 52C, the input signal analysis unit 52, etc. may be realized by software on a single microcomputer.

Although FIG. 59 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the control device 40 also identifies the input of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, in the input key identification unit 15A in the right operation unit 15R, data identifying the input key present in the right operation unit 15R is included in the signal from the input key and transmitted to the control device 40. The same applies to the left operation unit 15L.

Upon receiving the input mode switching signal MC2, the input processing unit 70 goes into an input standby state in preparation for any input related to the recipe data CD from the first server 321.

In FIG. 59, the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but rather than configuring them as separate hardware, each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer.

In addition, while FIG. 59 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the control device 40 also identifies the input of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, in the input key identification unit 15A in the right operation unit 15R, data identifying the input key present in the right operation unit 15R is included in the signal from the input key. The same is true for the left operation unit 15L.

The communication terminal 200 shown in FIG. 60 will be described.
The communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone has a transmission unit and a reception unit 210, a communication control unit 211, a central processing unit (CPU) 212, a ROM and a RAM 213, a speaker 214, a touch-type operation unit 215, a terminal side display unit 216 having a display screen, a cooking appliance database (storage unit) 217, a posture detection unit 218, a remote operation information generation unit 219, and a storage unit 220. The transmission unit and reception unit 210 has an NFC input/output unit 221 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, two paths, wireless communication via the Internet and short-range wireless communication (NFC), can be used.

Reference numeral 222 denotes a voice input unit that converts the voice of a user US or the like into an input signal.
The touch-type operation unit 215, the terminal side display unit 216, and the voice input unit 222 are integrated in hardware to form a display operation unit 225. Note that a search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 222 and performs term search, information search, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the communication terminal device 200, or may be provided in an external cloud server 300, so that the search function is provided outside the communication terminal device 200.

The attitude detection unit 218 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the inclination and orientation of the communication terminal device 200. As a result, a signal that detects the up-down direction of the communication terminal device 200 is output to the central processing unit 212.

The central processing unit 212 receives a detection signal from the attitude detection unit 218 and controls the display direction of the terminal side display unit 216 .
The central processing unit 212 inputs a signal received from the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 to the remote operation information generating unit 219 .

The central processing unit 212 has a recipe data acquisition unit 230, a recipe data transmission unit 231, a terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and a food composition data acquisition unit 233. The recipe data acquisition unit 230, the recipe data transmission unit 231, the terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and the food composition data acquisition unit 233 may be functionally realized as a whole by a single computer program, or may be configured by separate control circuits.

The cooking appliance database 217 holds “notification data” 223 of the cooking appliance 1 in order to generate notification information (including image information) for the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 50 of the cooking appliance 1 .
The cooker database 217 also holds “remote control data” 224 for the control device 40 of the cooker 1 .

Furthermore, the cooking appliance database 217 stores food ingredient and nutrient ingredient data 226 related to the recipe data CD. In this embodiment, information on food ingredients (energy, lipids, proteins, etc.) and nutrient ingredients (potassium, calcium, etc.) is collectively referred to as "food ingredient information" DD.

The notification data 223, remote control data 224, and food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data 226 may be stored in the communication terminal device 200 from the beginning, or may be connected to a cloud server 300, which is an information providing means, via a network NW (201, 202) and downloaded from the cloud server 300 to obtain the food ingredient information DD. In other words, the cooking appliance database 217 does not need to be constructed with fixed storage, and may be in a form in which information is obtained as needed and temporarily stored in a volatile memory.

The cooking appliance database 217 may obtain recipe data CD for various cooking methods that can be performed by the cooking appliance 1, particularly for cooking menus (e.g., "Ratatouille") that can be used in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, from the cloud server 300 or from another communication terminal device 200 via the NFC input/output unit 221.

The remote control information generating unit 224 processes the signal acquired from the cooking appliance 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation unit 225, and generates remote control information for the cooking appliance 1.

The "remote operation information" referred to here includes information regarding input operations corresponding to all cooking modes of the cooking appliance 1, including the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, display information of the central display unit 16M in the linked cooking mode, combined cooking mode, etc., and further display information regarding the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L. However, in all cooking modes, including the linked cooking mode KM3, information that serves as a command to start a heating operation is not included. Therefore, this remote operation information does not cause the cooking appliance 1 to start a heating operation.

The "remote operation information" may not include the display information of the center display unit 16M and the display information of the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L. In addition, command information for the functions that can be set using the function setting key 151KP described above cannot be transmitted from the communication terminal device 200, and cannot be generated by the communication terminal device 200. In other words, the function setting mode of the cooking appliance 1 cannot be activated from the communication terminal device 200.

The central processing unit 212 executes the overall processing of the communication terminal device 200 according to the control programs stored in the ROM/RAM, reading data required in the process of executing the processing from the ROM/RAM, and storing data generated in the process of executing the processing in the ROM/RAM.

The storage unit 220 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can store information about the cooking appliance 1 that is read from the transmission unit and the reception unit 210. For example, it is used to temporarily store the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu that is downloaded (read) from the cloud server 300.

Information on the cooking appliance 1 is obtained from a first server 321 that is directly connected to the cooking appliance 1, but it may also be obtained via a second server 322 that is connected to the first server 321 via a network NW. The first server 321 and the second server 322 are part of the cloud server 300 (see FIG. 57).

When the user US touches a specific portion of the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200, the remote operation information generating unit 219 generates remote operation information based on the touch signal.
The remote operation information is transmitted from the transmitting and receiving unit 210 to the cooking appliance 1 .

If the cooking appliance 1 is already powered and started, the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 treats the received remote operation information as input operation information for the cooking mode. For example, when a remote operation signal related to the linked cooking mode KM3 is received, this causes the standby initial screen 16MH of the central display unit 16M to transition to a selection screen (first specific screen 16M1) for one cooking menu (e.g., hamburger) in the linked cooking mode KM3. However, this does not mean that the cooking appliance 1 will unconditionally operate in response to the remote operation information of the communication terminal device 200. This will be explained in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62.

On the other hand, on the communication terminal 200 side that transmitted the remote operation information, the display on the terminal display unit 216 changes based on the remote operation information. In other words, the contents of the display screen of the terminal display unit 216 on the display operation unit 225 of the communication terminal 200 and the display contents of the central display unit 16M of the cooking appliance 1 change according to similar operation procedures, but the state of the change is not transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 one by one in real time.

Even if the communication terminal device 200 generates remote operation information, it is only after a cooking mode confirmation signal is transmitted that the cooking appliance 1 recognizes the information as a regular remote operation signal. In other words, the remote operation information from the communication terminal device 200 is transmitted all at once when a predetermined confirmation key is pressed on the communication terminal device 200 to confirm the cooking mode.

Therefore, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu (e.g., hamburger) in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes data specifying the heating means from cooking step 1 to the final cooking step, and information on the default control conditions (e.g., heat level, heat value, heating time, etc., but not limited to these) transmitted in a lump. That is, the data also includes detailed control conditions that the user US can set at will on the first specific screen 16M1. As described above, in this embodiment 1, the recipe data is simplified recipe data CD. The simplified recipe data CD does not include information specific to the heating means (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means and information on the heating port), cooking step information, information indicating the order of the heating means to be driven, etc., but is mainly composed of commands and data (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine the control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time.
In other words, the "simplified recipe data" CD mainly consists of setting data (command data) for the control conditions.

The food component data acquisition unit 233 shown in FIG. 60 has data on the components (e.g., energy content, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (e.g., vitamins A, C, iron, minerals, etc.) of various foods. In this second embodiment, the various data are collectively referred to as "food component data."

The "food composition data" of the food composition data acquisition unit 233 does not have to be stored from the time of manufacture of the communication terminal device 200. For example, in Japan, the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology has made the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan 2020 Edition (8th Edition)" available to the public (on the Internet, etc.). Therefore, the communication terminal device 200 may acquire data on specific foods from this data and store it in the food composition data acquisition unit 233 for each food.

When the recipe data CD for a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) is acquired from the cloud server 300, if data on nutritional components, etc. for the food cannot be obtained from the cloud server 300, the food component data acquisition unit 233 can supplement the data on nutritional components, etc. in the communication terminal device 200 and provide it to the cooking appliance 1. This will be explained in detail later.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is an explanatory diagram (list) of operations when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode.
The table in FIG. 61 is divided into three vertical columns and lists the operation procedures, related input keys, display screens, and characteristic items related to the operations.

First, when the operation button (key) 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed, main power is supplied to the control device 40, and if the control device 40 detects no abnormality as a result of its self-diagnosis, the central display unit 16M and input operation unit 15 are activated. The heating power display unit 17 (left heating power display unit 17L, central heating status display unit 17M, right heating power display unit 17R) is also activated.

A standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M.
A two-dimensional code 60B is displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH. When the communication terminal 200 optically reads the two-dimensional code 60B, it can connect to the recipe information providing server 301 that holds various cooking recipe information, i.e., various recipe data CD. Thus, the communication terminal 200 can obtain the recipe data CD for the desired cooking.

In this second embodiment, the communication terminal device 20 can directly communicate wirelessly with the cooking appliance 1. In addition, the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200 are configured to automatically connect to each other when they are within a communication range.

The communication method between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards. A wireless router 340 is installed between the communication terminal 200 and the cloud server 300. A wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) is used between the wireless router 340 and the communication terminal 200.

Since mutual authentication is performed between the communication terminal device 200 and the cooking appliance 1 at first, when the cooking appliance 1 is started, if the cooking appliance 1 transmits a signal for automatic connection (also called a "scan signal"), mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200. The scan signal may also be transmitted from the communication terminal device 200.

When a connection is established between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200, the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200 continue to be able to directly communicate wirelessly with each other. If the communication terminal device 200 moves with the user US and becomes distant from the cooking appliance 1, communication may be temporarily disabled, but the connection will automatically be restored when the communication range (distance) returns.

During the period from when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed until the input key 153M is pressed (to select the collaborative cooking mode KM3), acquisition of recipe data CD from the communication terminal device 200 is basically prohibited.

In addition, during the period from when the main power switch 20 is turned ON until the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, no recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication terminal device 200.

Note that FIG. 62, which will be described later, illustrates an example in which the reception restriction on recipe data CD is not lifted from the point at which input key 180M is pressed, but rather from the point at which input key 153M (or 154M or 155M) is pressed following input key 180M.

Next, we will explain Figure 62.
FIG. 62 shows an example in which the display screen configuration of FIG. 61 is slightly modified.
FIG. 61 shows an example in which, when recipe data CD is being received from an external device, text such as "Receiving recipe from an external device" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH.

In contrast, FIG. 62 shows an example in which the screen switches to a dedicated reception operation display screen 16MM while recipe data CD is being received from an external device. The reception operation display screen 16MM will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

Next, we will explain Figure 63.
FIG. 63 is a plan view showing the initial standby screen 16MH, which shows the state immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned on.

The following describes a case where the cooking menu database (heating cooker database 217) held by the communication terminal device 200 does not contain the cooking item "Ratatouille" desired by the user US. Incidentally, "Ratatouille" is a dish that originated in southern France, in which several kinds of vegetables such as zucchini, onions, and bell peppers are sliced and sautéed in olive oil with tomatoes and herbs.

Acquisition of the recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" by the communication terminal 200 will now be described.
Using the voice input unit 222 or the touch-type operation unit 215, the above-mentioned "Ratatouille" is designated in the terminal-side recipe selection unit 232, and the cloud server 300 is accessed to obtain the recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" in the recipe data acquisition unit 230.

The acquired recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" is temporarily stored in the memory unit 220. The display unit 216 on the terminal side displays a message indicating that the recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" has been successfully downloaded, and prompts the user US to decide whether or not to send it.

When the user US operates the display operation unit 225 (or inputs voice via the voice input unit 222) to instruct the recipe data transmission unit 231 to transmit, the central processing unit 212 transmits the recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" to the cooking appliance 1. Note that together with transmitting this recipe data CD, the central processing unit 212 also transmits "notification data" 223 for the cooking appliance 1 and "remote control data" 224 for the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1.

As shown in FIG. 61, after the input key 153M is pressed, the control device 40 allows the cooking appliance 1 to receive the recipe data CD for each cooking menu in the linked cooking mode KM3. However, as shown in FIG. 61, the display does not immediately switch to the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, the display changes from the standby initial screen 16MH to the reception operation display screen 16MM, and the reception operation of the recipe data CD continues.

The modified example in FIG. 62 shows another example of displaying that the recipe data CD for the above-mentioned "Ratatouille" is being received from the communication terminal 200. As shown in FIG. 62, the initial standby screen 16MH switches to a reception operation display screen 16MM, which indicates that a recipe is being received from outside. The reception operation display screen 16MM will be explained later using FIG. 65.

The limiting section 55 of the cooking appliance 1 can execute the operation of receiving the recipe data CD via the communication section 51 from the point in time when the input key 153M is pressed.
Then, if there is received recipe data CD, it is temporarily stored as a recipe in a predetermined storage area (or a dedicated buffer memory) of the recipe data storage unit 42. Note that reception of the notification data 223 and remote control data 224 is also permitted, and is temporarily stored in the storage unit 42 while being linked to the recipe data CD of "Ratatouille" (processed so that it can be identified in a one-to-one relationship).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64, when the input key 153M is pressed, information (identification information 167) of each cooking menu in the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the display unit 16M. At the stage in FIG. 64, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, not the initial standby screen 16MH.

As shown in FIG. 64, the light-emitting sections 21M corresponding to the input keys 154 to 157 emit light as if they were carrying a star mark. In other words, the cooking menu and control conditions can be changed by the user US using these input keys 154 to 157.

In FIG. 64, CN is the "cooking execution data" that is automatically sent to the cloud server 300 (first server 321) via the network NW (205) immediately after the cooking appliance 1 finishes cooking.

Here, "cooking execution data" refers to useful information that is used by the cloud server 300 to analyze cooking results, long-term history, changes, etc.

In FIG. 64, the cooking execution data CN is depicted as being sent only to the cloud server 300, but it may be set in advance on the cooking appliance 1 side so that it is sent to the communication terminal device 200 as well.

As described above, the communication terminal device 200 is connected to the cloud server 300 via the network NW (201). Recipe data CD can be acquired via this network 201. In addition, if necessary, information on the standard components and nutritional components of the food (ingredient) covered by the recipe data CD is also acquired from the cloud server 300 via this network NW.

Next, we will explain Figure 65.
Fig. 65 shows an example of a specific display screen indicating that the recipe data for "Ratatouille" is being received from the communication terminal 200. As shown in Fig. 65(A) and (B), the initial standby screen 16MH is switched to a receiving operation display screen 16MM indicating that a recipe is currently being received from outside.

FIG. 65(A) is an enlarged schematic diagram showing the reception operation display screen 16MM.
In Figures 65(A) and (B), 16F denotes a plurality of progress marks that appear on a receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation.

In FIG. 65(B), 174 is a reception operation display section, which displays in text the fact that recipe data CD is in the process of being received from an external device.

The progress mark 16F is of two types: a black square mark and a white square mark.
As shown in Figure 65 (A), immediately after the start of the operation of receiving the cooking control data, there is one black square mark, but as the operation proceeds, the number of black square marks increases, and finally there are five black square marks lined up. As the number of black square marks increases, the same number of white square marks disappear.

The progress mark 16F may show the degree of progress by changing the size or color of a single shape, or may be expressed using animation.

Furthermore, instead of the receiving operation display screen 16MM, multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) may be provided, as in the left heating power display unit 17L of embodiment 1, and the progress of the receiving operation may be displayed in multiple stages by the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements. For example, at the beginning of the receiving operation, only one LED may be lit, and the number of lit LEDs may increase as the receiving operation progresses. Alternatively, the progress may be expressed by switching the blinking or color of the LED. This may allow the user US to be informed of the completion of the receiving operation in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the operation of the limiting unit 55 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 65(B), during the operation of receiving recipe data CD via communication section 51, on the cooking appliance 1 side, the receiving operation cannot be stopped midway by input operation section 15.
For example, even if the input keys 152M and 153M are pressed, the operation of the data acquisition unit 53 cannot be interrupted.

Next, we will explain Figure 66.
The recipe data CD stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the cooking appliance 1 is displayed in a first specific screen 16M1 as shown in FIG.

As explained in the first embodiment, 173 is an external recipe identification unit. This makes it easy to know that the linked cooking menu currently displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 has been obtained from an external source.

When a specific (one) linked cooking menu (in this case, "Ratatouille") is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in FIG. 66, the heating operation can be started by touching the input key 151M.

In addition, by operating input keys 156M or 157M, you can select to heat using either the right heating section (right heating port 4R) or the left heating section.

Furthermore, by operating the input key 152M, cooking using the specific linked cooking menu thus obtained from outside (in this case, "Ratatouille") can be canceled. Once a cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the initial standby screen 16MH, and in this state, it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again.

In this way, once the recipe data CD corresponding to one cooking menu previously acquired is cancelled, recipe data CD for another cooking menu can be acquired again (it is also possible to acquire recipe data CD for the same cooking menu again).

Furthermore, if a specific linked cooking menu obtained from outside (in this case, recipe data for "Ratatouille") has not yet finished cooking the linked cooking menu, it cannot be changed to another linked cooking menu (for example, "Hamburger steak") (including cases where the user US forcibly cancels the cooking process midway). To change it, it is necessary to operate input key 152M and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In FIG. 66, the light emitting parts 21M of the input keys 156M and 157M are lit. After selecting either the left heating part specification part 171L or the right heating part specification part 171R with the input keys 156M and 157M, the user US can manually set the control conditions such as the heat level using the input keys 156M and 157M.

Reference numeral 179D denotes the voice input mode display information shown in FIG. 57 of the first embodiment.
This voice input mode display information 179D is not displayed when the input key 154M is "long pressed" in the state of Fig. 75. In other words, it is not displayed from the moment the mode is switched to the voice input mode. This is a point different from the first embodiment.

In this second embodiment, the voice input mode display information 179D is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 from step SG6 onwards, when the recipe data CD has been successfully acquired.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1 is displayed by light-emitting element 27B (see FIG. 16) only before the mode is switched to voice input mode. However, once the mode has already been switched to voice input mode, the mark 154V is not illuminated and displayed (note that in FIG. 75, mark 154V is shown for reference).

In this second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the cooking appliance 1 itself does not have an audio signal receiving unit (such as a speaker or an audio signal receiving circuit), so audio input must be made via the communication terminal device 200 (such as a smartphone or audio input/output device).

Next, we will explain Figure 67.
Figure 67 (A) shows that when cooking in collaborative cooking mode KM3 based on recipe data obtained from outside, the microwave heating output level can be adjusted when progressing to cooking process 2.

As shown in the next Fig. 67(B), the microwave heating output level is displayed in a total of five stages from "strong" to "weak" in the second area 23. Such microwave output levels can be selected by the user US by operating the input keys 156M and 157M.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user US can adjust the heating intensity of the microwaves depending on the finished state of the food to be cooked.

In FIG. 67(A), the second area 23 displays heating power information of 170V, which indicates the microwave output level. The heating power at this point is the default setting in the recipe data CD, and is shown to be "slightly weak." Furthermore, the fact that the user US can adjust this heating power level is also shown as operation support information 170 in the third area 24 integrated with the second area 23.

As shown in FIG. 67(A), the voice input mode display information 179D shown in FIG. 54 of the first embodiment is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. However, this display information 179D is not displayed immediately after the input key 154M is "pressed and held" in the state of FIG. 66. This is different from the first embodiment. The timing at which the display information 179D is displayed is from the point at which the recipe data CD is successfully acquired. In other words, it is from the point at which the display switches to the first specific screen 16M1.

Furthermore, the mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1 is not displayed at the stage of FIG.
67(A) allows input by voice. However, unlike the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 itself does not have a voice signal receiving section (such as a speaker or a voice signal receiving circuit), so voice input must be performed via the communication terminal device 200.

The mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1 is automatically displayed even if the input key 154M is not "pressed and held." In other words, it is displayed at the same time that the heating power information 170V indicating the microwave output level is displayed. Therefore, at this point, the control device 40 has switched to voice input mode 1, which allows voice input via the communication terminal device 200, but at the same time, it is in a combination mode in which touch input using the input keys 156M and 157M is also accepted. These points are significantly different from the first embodiment.

Next, we will explain Figure 68.
FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps of a collaborative cooking menu and operations on the input operation unit in chronological order.
In the example of Figure 68, the collaborative cooking menu is composed of three cooking steps: cooking step 1, cooking step 2, and cooking step 3.

The recipe data CD specifies various control steps in a specific computer program format, and may also specify control conditions such as heat. In the cooking in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 in FIG. 68, cooking step 1 starts upon input of input key 151M, and the heating operation stops when input key 153R (153L) is input.

The computer program included in the recipe data specifies heating pause periods P3 and P5, which will be described later, but the duration of these heating pause periods P3 and P5 is not specified. However, in order to prevent cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, for example, the elapsed time of each cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 may be counted based on the end point of each step, and if, for example, 30 minutes have elapsed, a warning may be issued and the execution of the cooking menu may be forcibly stopped.

In the example of recipe data CD in Figure 68, cooking step 1 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means) HM2, cooking step 2 is performed using the same microwave heating source, and finally cooking step 3 is provided in which the food to be cooked is moved onto top plate 3 and induction heating is performed as a finishing touch to compensate for insufficient heating.

In addition, this cooking device 1 has additional protection measures in place to prevent the cooking mode settings and control conditions from being inadvertently changed in response to an external command signal.

In the "second coordinated cooking menu" example in Figure 68, the second heating means HM2 is operated first, and after the second heating operation is completed, the first heating means HM1 is operated, but the radiant heat heating means 12 may also be operated as the third heating means at the same time as the second heating means HM2.

As shown in FIG. 68, the "second collaborative cooking menu" shown here is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 153M is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu to when the heating cooking operation is started by the input key 151M.

When the input key 153M is operated, if the "permission conditions" as described above are met, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that the first specific screen 16M1 is not shown in FIG. 68.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, one of the linked cooking menus can be selected by operating input keys 154M and 155M. After that, by operating input key 151M, the mode transitions to linked cooking mode and the heating and cooking process of P2 is started.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, if the identification information 167 of the linked cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed in a specified position on the first specific screen 16M1 (default display), there is no need to operate the input keys 154M and 155M.

P2 is the heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source).
This cooking process 1 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 has been opened once during the preparation period P1 and has been closed thereafter. The door open/close signal from the open/close detection unit 10 described in the first embodiment is utilized.

The cooking step 1 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu has elapsed or when the temperature of the food to be cooked has risen to a set value (e.g., 90°C). For example, in one linked cooking menu, heating begins with a microwave output of 500 W. Furthermore, if the user US opens the door 7 at any time, the microwave irradiation is instantly stopped and the heating operation is stopped.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished judging the permission conditions and therefore knows which heating part of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) is in use. In other words, the use status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is known.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in cooking step 3 of the coordinated cooking mode, and occupies this right heating port 4R.

P3 is a heating pause period during which cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) is temporarily stopped and cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started again.

This pause period P3 is a period required for checking the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked and carrying out cooking step 2. For example, in cooking step 1, only frozen food can be heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking step 2, seasonings can be added or another food (such as non-frozen food) that rises in temperature faster than frozen food can be added. This allows for a wider range of cooking possibilities.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 152M is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 of P4.

P4 is a cooking period (cooking step 2) by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means). In this cooking step, the user US can individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M.
Then, when input key 151M is pressed to command the cooking to be stopped, cooking step 2 ends and the process proceeds to a heating pause period P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, removes the food to be cooked from inside the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. The food to be cooked is placed inside a heated object N, such as a metal pot, and placed on the top plate 3.
Then, when the input key 153R for the right heating port 4R is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the process proceeds to a heating cooking period P6 (the "cooking step 3" of induction heating).

This heating pause period P5 is a period required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 2, to add seasonings, or to add another food to be cooked and perform cooking step 3. For example, in cooking step 2, only frozen food can be heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking step 3, a food to be cooked that has been immersed in seasonings or cooking liquid, or that has been cooked separately by preheating, can be added to the same food to be heated. This broadens the range of cooking possibilities.

P6 switches from cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source) to cooking step 3 using the first heating means HM1 (in this case, induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking step 3, when cooking is performed using the right heating port 4R as described above, the user US can individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154R and 155R.

In addition, if cooking step 3 is performed using the left heating port 4L, the user US can individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154L and 155L.

When input key 153R is pressed to command cooking to stop, cooking step 3 ends and the operation of the linked cooking mode ends. In the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time has elapsed, and cooking step 3 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 68, the right operation unit 15R of the right heating port 4R becomes unusable from the point at which the cooperative cooking menu is selected, i.e., the point at which the identification information 167 indicating the name of the cooking on the cooperative cooking menu is displayed on the central display unit 16M, but rather from the point at which the start of cooking is decided using the input key 151M. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set by default, the left heating port 4L will be occupied.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction process.
(1) The input signal from the right operation unit 15R is invalidated. As a result, the right heating port 4R cannot be used in any mode other than the coordinated cooking mode during the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) to the heating cooking period (cooking step 3).
(2) Even when the heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left operation unit 15L can be used (the input signal from the left operation unit 15L is not invalidated).

In this way, when the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the control device 40 transitions from cooking process 1 to occupying only the right heating port 4R for cooking process 3.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating means HM1 as a whole, the use of only a portion (the right side) of the three heating parts is "restricted."

Even after the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the above-mentioned restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
In addition, in the stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that the cooperative cooking mode is in effect, so the execution of other cooking menus is not restricted for the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2. This is also true for the heating pause period P3 to cooking process 2.

Furthermore, even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state before the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature in the heating chamber 6 as indicating that cooking is complete even before cooking has begun.
Therefore, if the temperature in the heating chamber 6 is too high before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) and before the start of cooking process 2, the first specific screen 15M1 displays the message that "the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used immediately due to high temperature."

The periods indicated by the thick arrows in FIG. 68 are the reception restriction period for one recipe data CD and the "additional restriction period" for the additional recipe data CD. These reception restriction periods and "additional restriction periods" are collectively referred to as the "restriction periods" below.

As shown in FIG. 68, the "start" of the "restriction period" is the time when a linked cooking menu (e.g., "Ratatouille") is selected with a specific input key 154M or 155M.

The "starting point" of the "limited period" may be the time when the display of the first specific screen 16M1 begins. In other words, as shown by the large dashed arrow in FIG. 68, the "starting point" may be changed to the time when the linked cooking mode KM3 is selected with the input key 153M. In that case, the starting point of the "limited period" will be up to an earlier point P1A in the first stage (preparation period) P1.

When the input key 151M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the restriction unit 55 performs the following restriction operation.

That is, the limiting unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in Fig. 68, during the "restriction period", changing a specific linked cooking menu A obtained from outside to another linked cooking menu B (e.g. "hamburger steak") is effectively prohibited. To change it, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to temporarily cancel the linked cooking mode KM3 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the "restricted period" indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 68 has begun, the cooking using the specific linked cooking menu A obtained from outside can be cancelled at any time by operating the input key 152M. Once a cancellation operation has been performed in this way, the screen returns to the initial standby screen 16MH, and in this state, it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again.

In addition, once the input key 151M is touched for a specific linked cooking menu A obtained from outside, that is, once a heating start command is given, the control device 40 cannot obtain recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu C.

In other words, once the "restricted period" indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 68 has begun, by operating input key 152M, recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu A can be obtained and cooking can be started using that data, but further recipe data CD cannot be obtained from outside until all cooking steps for this cooking menu A have been completed.

As is clear from the above description, the cooking device 1 according to the second embodiment has the following configuration.
A first heating means HM1 including a first heating section (right heating section) 4R and a second heating section (left heating section) 4L;
a second heating means HM2 capable of heating the food to be cooked in a heating chamber 6 located away from the first heating means HM1 with microwaves;
A control device 40 that controls the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1;
a display unit 16M that displays control information of the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1;
The control device 40 has a number of cooperative cooking menus KM3 for cooking one food item using the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1, the number of which is equal to the number of food items to be cooked,
The control device 40 is configured to carry out the following operations when a command to display an integrated cooking menu is received from the input key 153M.
(1) The relationship between the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1 "not having been used before" and the "permission condition" of "the temperature of the heating chamber 6 being low" is determined. Then, it is determined whether the recipe data CD of the linked cooking menu (for example, "Ratatouille") can be executed.

(2) If it is determined that the collaborative cooking menu can be executed, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

(3) At least one of the linked cooking menus is displayed in a selectable manner on the first specific screen 16M1. To do so, the input functions of the corresponding input keys 154M and 155M are enabled.

(4) When one linked cooking menu is selected, the control conditions (heat, heating time, etc.) to be applied to that cooking menu are displayed (first specific screen 16M1). In this state, it is displayed that the voice input mode is supported (or the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user). Specifically, it displays voice input mode display information 179D, which indicates that voice input is being accepted. Then, it waits for a command to start the linked cooking mode KM3 from the input key 151M.

(5) When a command to start the linked cooking mode is received, microwaves from the second heating means HM2 are supplied to the heating chamber 6, and cooking process 1 is started.

(6) When cooking step 1 is completed automatically or by command of the user US, the heating pause period P3 is entered. Then, a command to resume the linked cooking mode (for cooking step 2) from input key 151M is awaited.

(7) When a command to start the linked cooking mode is received from input key 151M, microwaves from second heating means HM2 are supplied to heating chamber 6, and cooking process 2 is started.

After that, the heating pause period P5 is followed by the heating cooking period P6 (cooking process 3). In this cooking process 3, the control conditions for induction heating using the right heating port 4R can be set by operating input keys 154R and 155R.

As described above, in this embodiment 2, when the predefined permission conditions are met, the first specific screen 16M1 for the coordinated cooking mode is displayed, and this display screen makes it possible to easily proceed with the transition to the coordinated cooking mode KM3 using the relevant right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L and second heating means HM2.
In addition, if the permission conditions are not satisfied, the first specific screen 16M1 itself is not displayed, so there is no concern that the user US may misuse or misunderstand the device. In other words, a highly convenient combined heating cooker can be realized without impairing the operability of the user US.

Furthermore, there is a heating pause period P3 between cooking steps 1 and 2, and the length of this heating pause period P3 is determined by the timing at which the user US issues a cooking restart command using the input key 151M.
That is, in this embodiment 2, the time required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, add seasonings, or add another food and perform cooking step 2 can be secured. This makes it easy to use and expands the cooking repertoire of the user US.

Furthermore, because of the restriction unit 55, once the input key 151M is touched for one specific linked cooking menu A, the control device 40 will not acquire recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu C from the outside via the communication unit 51. Therefore, another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) will not be inadvertently received during linked cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion of the user US due to reception or interference with the operation of the cooking appliance 1.

66 and 67, when the recipe data CD of one linked cooking menu (e.g., ratatouille) is selected and the recipe data CD is acquired from an external source, the control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) to be applied to the cooking menu are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. Furthermore, in this state, to inform the user US that the voice input mode is supported, voice input mode display information 179D is displayed.
Therefore, after confirming that the desired linked cooking menu is selected, the user US can input the control conditions to be applied to that cooking menu by voice, which makes it possible to reduce the number of times the input operation unit 15 is operated compared to touch input.

In addition, even after the input key 151M is touched for one particular linked cooking menu A, if the input key 152M is operated during the cooking process of the linked cooking menu A and the cooking in the linked cooking mode is stopped (cancelled), the control device 40 can obtain the recipe data CD for a new linked cooking menu C via the communication unit 51.

Next, we will explain Figures 69 to 80.
69 to 79 show the display contents of the terminal side display screen (also used as the input operation screen) 216 of the communication terminal 200, and will be described below in order. The "terminal side display screen" 216 will be referred to as the "display screen" 216 hereinafter.

69(A) and (B) are enlarged views of the display screen 216 of the communication terminal device 200. FIG.
The display screen 216 is formed by covering the surface of a liquid crystal display screen or an organic EL display screen with a glass plate.
Although not appearing as physical structures on the upper surface (front surface) of the glass plate, various icons (input keys) 488, 489, 491L, 491M, 491R, 492 to 496, which will be described later, can be visually recognized by displaying them on the display screen 216. Although specific parts of the glass plate itself do not emit light or generate images, in the following explanation, the expression "displayed on the display screen" is used from the standpoint of a user US who visually recognizes the display of characters, figures, and other information.

The "icons" allow the user to perform desired input. In other words, each icon has a capacitance sensing key. When the user touches the icon, the touch-type operation unit 215 (see Figure 60) generates a command signal for the central processing unit 212.

To indicate the presence and function of an icon, a specific function is displayed in text or graphics (at least when it is capable of accepting input). For example, as in the example of Figure 69 (A), text information such as "Left IH operation unit" is displayed at the position of icon 491L.

481 is the menu display section in the initial screen shown in FIG. 69(A). This menu display section 481 changes to a menu selection display section 482 for the left heating section in FIG. 69(B). Also, in FIG. 70(A), it changes to a heating source selection display section 483 called "Select heating source."

Furthermore, the menu display section 481 changes to a range grill control menu selection display section 484 called "RG control menu selection" in FIG. 71(B).
Furthermore, the menu display section 481 is changed to a cooperative cooking menu display section 485, labeled "Select cooperative cooking menu" in FIG. 76(A).

In Fig. 76 (B), the menu display section 481 changes to a preparation information display section 486 called "Next Preparation Guide." In Figs. 77 (A) and (B), the menu display section 481 changes to a linked cooking menu name display section 487 showing "fried chicken," one of the linked cooking menus.

Returning to Fig. 69(A), reference numeral 490 denotes a warning information display section as an initial screen during standby. Before operation starts, the heating chamber 6 may already be hot due to heat from a previous cooking session, and Fig. 69(A) shows an example of a warning about this.
It also shows that the power is already on (the main power switch 20 is closed) based on the data acquired when communication was established with the cooking appliance 1.

In FIG. 69, 491M is a selection section (icon) of the central operation section 15M. By operating the central operation section 15M, cooking can be performed using heating sections other than the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R, as described in the first embodiment.

In Fig. 69, 491L is a selection portion (icon) of the left operation portion 15L, and 491R is a selection portion (icon) of the right operation portion 15R.
An advice display selection section (icon) 492 is provided. When this is touched, the audio notification section 50 notifies the user of reference information for an operation corresponding to the touched situation.

In FIG. 69, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US.
In Figures 69(A) and (B) and other figures, triangular marks (icons) 501 and 502 are screen switching marks.

The next Figure 69 (B) also has a screen switching mark 503. When these marks are touched, the display screen 216 can be switched in a certain order with each touch. Incidentally, when the screen switching mark 502 in Figure 69 (B) is touched, the display screen 216 moves to the right, and the next display screen 480 appears from the left side.

The screen switching marks 501 to 503 may be omitted by providing a scroll function in which the fingertip FG is moved while touching the display screen 216, and the display screen is moved accordingly to switch screens.

In FIG. 69(A), when the left operation section selection section (icon) 491L is touched, the display screen is switched to the display screen 216 shown in FIG. 69(B) without touching the screen switching marks 501 to 504.

In FIG. 69(B), 493 is a control menu display section (icon) for the IH only cooking mode.
There are a total of seven control menus for the IH only cooking mode KM1. Four of them are displayed in the right half of the display screen 216 in Fig. 69(B). These control menu display sections (icons) 493 are "Boil water", "Boil", "Cook rice", and "Boil water + keep warm".

The remaining three control menus are displayed on the left half of the display screen 216: the "Keep Warm" control menu display section (icon) 488, the "Deep Fry" control menu display section (icon) 494, and the "Preheat" control menu display section (icon) 489.

In FIG. 69(B), reference numeral 495 denotes a menu screen display portion (icon) for selecting to return to the initial menu display screen.
Reference numeral 496 denotes a confirmation display section (icon) that is displayed when one of the control menus (for example, "boil water") in Fig. 69(B) is selected. When this is pressed, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "boil water", the screen automatically switches to a control condition setting screen for boiling water.

Next, FIG. 70(A) will be described.
Reference numerals 497A and 497B denote induction heating source selection sections (icons) for selecting the left IH coil 9L or the right IH coil 9R. Reference numeral 497C denotes a heating source selection section (icon) for selecting a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2).

In FIG. 70(A), reference numeral 498 denotes a range grill heat source selection section (icon), and 499 denotes a selection section (icon) for the combined cooking mode.
In FIG. 70(A), when the range grill heat source selection section (icon) 498 is touched, the display screen changes to that of FIG. 70(B).

In FIG. 70(A), 497A is an induction heating source selection section (icon) for selecting the left IH coil 9L. 497B is a selection section (icon) for the right IH coil 9R.

497C is a selection section (icon) for selecting the microwave heating source 189.
When the screen change mark (icon) 503 in FIG. 70(B) is touched, the display screen 216 in FIG. 70(B) changes to FIG.

Next, we will explain Figures 71 (A) and (B).
Reference numeral 500 denotes an RG control menu selection section (icon) showing a range grill (RG) control menu. The range grill (RG) control menu has a total of 10 items such as "warm", "manual range" and "thaw meat".

Figure 71 (A) shows five control menus 500, and Figure 71 (B) shows the remaining five control menus 500.

The large arrows shown in Figures 71 (A) and (B) respectively indicate the rear and front when the display screen 216 is held horizontally. The display screen 216 can be operated without any problems whether it is held horizontally, vertically, or at an angle.

Next, we will explain Figures 72 (A) and (B).
FIG. 72(A) shows the state in which the "warm" control menu 500 has been selected from the range grill (RG) control menu in the state shown in FIG. 71(A).

When the fingertip FG touches an RG control menu selection section (icon) 500, the selection section 500 detects the touch and changes its display color, for example, being inverted to white characters.
When the input confirmation key display section (icon) 496 is touched in the state shown in FIG. 72(A), the display screen changes to the display screen 216 shown in FIG. 72(B).

Figure 72(B) is the default screen of the Range Grill (RG) control menu.
Reference numeral 504 denotes a name display section (icon) of the RG control menu.
The display form and design of the control menu in Fig. 72(B) are similar to those shown in Fig. 21 of embodiment 1. Such a display is possible because of the presence of the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219 (see Fig. 60).

In FIG. 72(B), 505 is the temperature display section (icon) of the RG control menu. In the example of FIG. 72(B), the default value is 80°C, but the next selectable options are 75°C and 85°C, so these are also displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 72(B), the name display section (icon) 504 of the RG control menu displays the next display candidates, "Oven" and "Parboil leafy vegetables," adjacent to it in slightly smaller size.

When the user US wishes to change the microwave temperature setting to 75° C. in the state shown in FIG. 72(B), the user US need only place his/her fingertip FG on the portion indicating 75° C.
Similarly, when changing the control menu's "warm" to "oven" or "pre-boil leafy vegetables," the user simply touches the candidate switching marks (icons) 519, 520 near "oven" or "pre-boil leafy vegetables."

As explained in FIG. 60, the communication terminal 200 is equipped with a voice input unit 222, so the control conditions as shown in FIG. 72 (such as the target heating temperature for the "warm" automatic cooking menu) can be set by voice. In FIG. 72, it is sufficient to say something like "Temperature 85 degrees."

In FIG. 72(B), 506 is a reference image display section. The reference image may be something other than a photograph, and may be an illustration showing an image of the "warm" option in the control menu.

Next, we will explain Figures 73 (A) and (B).
When the orientation of the communication terminal device 200 is changed to the vertical direction, the display screen 216 becomes vertically long as shown in Fig. 73 (A) (B). The display screen 216 may be set to be fixed in the vertical display as shown in Fig. 73 (A) (B).

Switching between FIG. 73(A) and FIG. 73(B) can be achieved simply by touching the screen switching mark (icon) 503.
Next, we will explain Figures 74 (A) and (B).
When the fingertip FG touches the control menu selection section 500 to select the "warm" control menu 500 shown in Fig. 74(A), the display color changes, for example, to reverse to white characters, as shown in Fig. 74(A). When the input confirmation key display section (icon) 496 is touched in this state of Fig. 74(A), the display screen changes to the display screen 216 of Fig. 74(B). Such screen switching may also be commanded by voice using the voice input section 222.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 74(B), if you want to change the (upper heating limit) temperature setting of the "warm" range (microwave heating) to 75°C, you can simply place your fingertip FG on the 75°C display area (temperature display area 505 of the RG control menu). Then, the display screen 216 will change to the state shown in FIG. 75(A).

In FIG. 74(B), 507A is an auxiliary information display section, which is displayed near the reference image display section 506. In FIG. 74(B), the user US is advised to select a set temperature.

Next, we will explain Figure 75(A).
As shown in Fig. 75(A), the set temperature is displayed as having been changed to 75°C. Note that, since this is still a stage before the control conditions have been finalized, the other set temperature of "85°C" remains displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 75(A), the remote control signal transmission (confirmation) key display section (icon) 521 is displayed for the first time.
In this Figure 75 (A), when the transmission key display section 521 is selected, the setting information (recipe data) of the control menu "Warm" of the "Microwave only cooking mode KM1" displayed in this Figure 75 (A) is transmitted all at once to the heating cooker 1 as remote control information.

The state in Figure 75 (A) is the stage where all conditions for executing "Warm" in the RG control menu have been selected, so the heating temperature condition of "75°C" displayed on the temperature display unit 505 is sent to the cooking appliance 1.

In FIG. 75(A), 507B is an auxiliary information display section, which is displayed near the reference image display section 506. In FIG. 75(A), it is shown that the input operation is completed by pressing the transmission key display section 521.

At the stage in Figure 75 (B) where the transmission of the remote control signal (including recipe data CD) has been completed, the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed for the first time. Pressing this key stops the command for the heating operation at the stage in Figure 75 (B). In other words, if a transmission operation to the cooking appliance 1 is in progress, that transmission is stopped midway. Also, if data transmission has already been completed, it reaches the cooking appliance 1 as a cancellation command. Note that once this stop key display section 522 is pressed, the system returns to the first stage, and all remote control conditions must be re-entered.

The communication terminal 200 is provided with a stop key display section (icon) 522 that can immediately send command information to stop heating. This provides a function for ensuring the safety of the cooking appliance 1.

Various input operations have been explained in sequence in Figures 69 to 75 (A), but up to the stage in Figures 69 to 75, the communication terminal device 200 and the first server 321 or the cooking appliance 1 do not always continue (maintain) a state in which they can communicate wirelessly.
For example, even if the communication terminal device 200 is not connected to the cooking appliance 1, the communication terminal device 200 can perform the display and input as shown in Fig. 69 to Fig. 75 by itself. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 75 (A), it is sufficient to connect to the cooking appliance 1 just before pressing the transmission key display unit 521 to transmit. Therefore, even if the communication terminal device 200 performs the input work as shown in Fig. 69 to Fig. 75 (A), it does not hinder the operation of acquiring and transmitting information from outside via the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1.

Next, we will explain Figure 76 (A).
Fig. 76(A) shows the display screen 216 that is displayed when the selection section 499 of the combined cooking mode KM3 shown in Fig. 70(A) is touched. Alternatively, the central operation section selection section 491M in Fig. 69(A) may be touched. However, when the central operation section selection section 491M is touched, the selection screen is also used for the range grill cooking mode (combined cooking mode KM2), so there are a few more touch operations required to select the combined cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 76(A) shows an example in which "fried chicken" is selected as one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
When the user wishes to cook "fried chicken" and touches the linked cooking menu display section (selection section) 500C, the display color changes, for example, to white characters, as shown in FIG. 76 (A).

When the input key display section (icon) 496 is touched in the state shown in FIG. 76(A), the display screen 216 (not shown) for cooking "fried chicken" appears. The display screen 216 in FIG. 76(A) is a display screen showing the stage where "fried chicken" has been selected.

Note that Figure 76(A) only shows the collaborative cooking menu and omits the subsequent illustration of selecting the heating unit and control conditions, but if you select (touch) the collaborative cooking menu selection section (icon) 500C on the display screen 216 in Figure 76(A), you will proceed to the display screen 216 for setting the selected cooking menu (e.g., "fried chicken").

Between Fig. 76 and the next Fig. 77, there is actually a setting display screen 216 for "fried chicken". On this display screen 216, icons (not shown) for selecting the left and right heating parts (IH coils 9L, 9R) as shown in the first embodiment (Fig. 25) may be displayed. Alternatively, the left and right heating parts may not be specified, and the heating ports 4L, 4R may be selected on the heating cooker 1 side that receives the recipe data CD. Also, on this setting display screen 216, as shown in Fig. 75, a transmission key display section (icon) 521 is displayed. Then, the recipe data CD for "fried chicken" can be transmitted all at once.

Figure 76 (B) shows an example of a notification corresponding to "Reference information 1" FA1 that is automatically notified by the heating cooker 1 when the heating control unit 43 detects the progress of the cooking process in the middle of cooking process 1 when cooking "fried chicken" in the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3.

In this second embodiment, the "Reference Information 1" FA1 notified by the cooking appliance 1 notifies two things: opening the door 7 of the heating chamber 6, and then removing the heated food from the heating chamber 6, as shown in FIG. 76(B).

The remote operation information generating unit 224 of the communication terminal device 200 processes the signal acquired from the cooking appliance 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation unit 225 as described above, and generates remote operation information for the cooking appliance 1. This "remote operation information" includes display information for the central display unit 16M in the linked cooking mode, combined cooking mode, etc., and further display information for the right heating power display unit 16R and the left heating power display unit 16L.

For this reason, the display screen 216 of the communication terminal 200 also displays, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), a preparatory work reference image 509 indicating that the door 7 should be opened, and a preparatory work reference image 510 indicating that the food to be cooked should be removed together with the tray, as contents corresponding to the above-mentioned reference information 1FA1.
Reference numeral 511 denotes attention-calling information, and 512 denotes auxiliary information that explains the operation of the user US.

Next, FIG. 77(A) will be described.
The display screen 216 in FIG. 77(A) displays the first cooking step of "fried chicken."
513 is a process information display section. In Fig. 77(A), it is displayed that microwave (range) heating is still continuing. 514 is a display section for the next cooking process information. In the example of this figure, the display section 514 shows that induction heating will be performed next at the left heating port 4L.

515 is a display section for the recommended menu. This display section 515 may include a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) searched for from inventory information previously obtained from the refrigerator 403 (see FIG. 57).

The example in FIG. 77(A) suggests that there is a recommended menu item that can be cooked in the heating chamber 6, which is currently being used for "fried chicken," after that heating chamber is no longer in use. Note that the heating cooker 1 has a function that allows it to obtain inventory information about the refrigerator 403 by wirelessly communicating with the refrigerator 403.

At the stage shown in FIG. 77(A), the recommended menu is not automatically displayed in detail. If the user US touches the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523, which is displayed for the first time at this stage, the details are displayed as shown in FIG. 77(B).

The selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. 77(B) is not displayed on the central display section 16M of the cooking appliance 1. After a certain period of time, the screen in FIG. 77(B) automatically returns to the display screen 216 in FIG. 77(A).

Even at this stage in Figure 77 (A), the stop key display section (icon) 522 is displayed to stop the heating operation by remote control.

In Fig. 77(B), 487 is a display section for the name of the coordinated cooking menu, and in this case, the name of the food to be cooked, "fried chicken", is displayed. 516 is a display section for the recommended menu. The specific contents of the recommended menu are displayed in the display section for the recommended menu 515. It is recommended to defrost and warm the food to be cooked.

In FIG. 77(B), 517 is auxiliary information for the recommended menu, indicating that cooking can be done using the "warm" control menu that utilizes microwave heating.
Reference numeral 518 denotes a cooking reference image for the recommended menu. This may be an illustration (conceptual diagram) instead of a photograph.
At this stage in FIG. 77(B), the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is also displayed.

Next, FIG. 78(A) will be described.
The display screen 216 in FIG. 78(A) shows a state in which cooking step 1 of “fried chicken” has ended and the heating pause period, that is, the transition period TR has begun before moving to cooking step 2.

The transition period TR does not end unless the user US who is actually cooking in front of the cooking appliance 1 presses the input key 151M of the cooking appliance 1.
In other words, the length of the transition period TR depends on the user US.

Therefore, the communication terminal device 200 does not have the function of remotely (via wireless communication) commanding the transition period TR and restarting the cooking process from a remote location, regardless of the operation performed. This is to improve the safety of the cooking device 1. Note that the input key (icon) for selecting to end the transition period TR and start the next cooking process 2 is not displayed at all, as shown in Figures 78 (A) and (B).

513 is the process information display section. In this FIG. 78(A), it shows that microwave heating has finished. 514 is the display section for the next cooking process information. In the example of this FIG. 78(A), it shows that induction heating will be performed next at the left heating port 4L.

515 is a display section for the recommended menu. If there is a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) searched for from the inventory information previously obtained from the refrigerator 403, this display section 515 shows that there is a recommended cooking menu, as shown in FIG. 78 (B).

When the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 displayed on the display screen 216 in FIG. 78 (A) is touched, details of possible cooking menu items that can be performed in parallel with cooking step 2 in the heating chamber 6 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 78 (B).

The selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. 78(A) may also be displayed on the central display section 16M of the cooking device 1. However, if the display screen of the central display section 16M is not of the touch input type, it is necessary to display that an appropriate input key should be pressed.

When the input confirmation key display section (icon) 496 in FIG. 78 (B) is pressed, information on a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) that uses the heating chamber 6 is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1. In other words, the intention to "agree with the recommended menu" is conveyed to the user US who is cooking in front of the cooking appliance 1.

When information on the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1, the owner of the communication terminal device 200 may receive the notification of the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) without being in the kitchen 601 (see FIG. 57). In other words, it is conceivable that another user US is in front of the cooking appliance 1 at that moment. In any case, the user US can know that cooking can be performed simultaneously in parallel by effectively using the heating chamber 6.

Next, we will explain Figures 79 (A) and (B).
A display screen 216 in FIG. 79(A) shows a modified example of FIG. 78(B).
As shown in Fig. 79(A), information on the recommended frozen food (ingredient) and its food component information are displayed in the recommendation menu display section 515. In this case, the data on the food components is the data from the food component data acquisition section 233 as described in Fig. 60.

In other words, at the stage shown in Figure 79 (A), data on food ingredients and food nutritional ingredients held in the cooking appliance database 217 can be displayed.

Even if there is no data on food ingredients, etc. in the cooking appliance database 217, data on food ingredients and food nutritional ingredients (ingredient data DD) can be obtained at any time from the cloud server 300 (food ingredient information server 326 shown in FIG. 57). Also, as explained in FIG. 78(A), there is a transition period TR during which the cooking operation is temporarily paused, so this period can be used to obtain data.

Figure 79 (B) shows the state in which the display content changes when the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 is operated in the state shown in Figure 79 (A). As shown in this Figure 79 (B), the recommended menu display section 515 displays information about the recommended frozen food (ingredient), as well as the standard composition and nutritional composition of that food.

Next, we will explain FIG. 80.
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the communication terminal device 200 when the recipe data CD is acquired from the cloud server 300 (recipe information providing server 301).

When the recipe data CD is received and processed by the communication terminal device 200 (step SL1), in the next step SL2, the food identification information in the recipe data CD is compared with the food ingredient data and nutritional ingredient data stored in the cooking appliance database 217.

For example, for the above-mentioned cooking menu "Ratatouille", it is determined whether or not the cooking appliance database 217 has food component data and nutritional component data.
If there is no corresponding data, the determination result of step SL3 is "No", and the process proceeds to the next step SL4.

In step SL4, a request is made to the cloud server 300 (second server 322) via the network NW to transmit food composition data and nutritional composition data for the specific cooking menu item "Ratatouille."

For example, if the cloud server 300 is configured to include a first server 321 and a second server 322 connected directly to the communication terminal device 200 via a network NW, as described in FIG. 57, this component data provision request X is sent to the second server 322, and then sent from the second server 322 to the first server 321 as a component data provision request X (query signal SN shown in FIG. 57).

In this way, when the first server 321 receives the component data request X, it acquires food component data and nutritional component data from a database (or food component information server 326) such as the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan 2020 Edition (8th Edition)" which the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology has made publicly available (on the Internet, etc.) as described above. Then, it transmits the acquired data (component data DD) to the communication terminal device 200 via the second server 322. In this way, in step SL4, food component data and nutritional component data (component data DD) are acquired from outside.

The food data acquisition unit 233 checks the received food composition data and nutritional component data (step SL5), and if there are no problems, stores the data in the cooking appliance database 217 (step SL6). If the food composition data and nutritional component data cannot be acquired, the process proceeds to step SL8, where a predetermined error process is performed. The details of the error are displayed on the display screen 216.

If the food component data and nutritional component data (component data DD) are stored in the cooking appliance database 217, the determination result of step SL3 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL7. Also, if the food component data and nutritional component data (component data DD) are successfully acquired from outside, the process proceeds to step SL7.

In step SL7, a display is displayed on the display screen 216 waiting for the user US to decide whether or not to transmit the food composition data and nutritional composition data, and the device enters a standby state for transmission to the cooking appliance 1. When the user US performs a specified transmission operation, the food composition data and nutritional composition data (component data DD) are transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 simultaneously with the recipe data CD2 already acquired (for example, for cooking "Ratatouille").

In the above explanation, the user US mainly touches the touch operation unit 215 to acquire and transmit food component data and nutritional component data (component data DD), but this can also be done by voice input.

As described in FIG. 60, the display operation unit 225 has a voice input unit 222, so the user US can obtain the relevant data from outside by, for example, speaking into the voice input unit 222, such as "Get data, ratatouille."

In addition to the operation of acquiring specific recipe data CD (e.g., "Ratatouille") from the cloud server 300, the communication terminal device 200 also has a function that allows the user US to search for various recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance database 217, for example, using food ingredients or food nutrients as keywords.

For this reason, for example, by uttering "Search for cooking menu, calories, low" once or several times to the voice input unit 222, it is possible to preferentially select recipes with low energy amounts (calorie equivalent values) within the range of various recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance database 217. For example, cooking menus can be displayed on the display screen 216 in order from lowest calorie value.

In the above description, the communication terminal device 200 such as a smartphone performs wireless communication 400 with the cooking appliance 1 using Bluetooth (registered trademark). As an alternative method, since the communication terminal device 200 has an NFC input/output unit 221 (see FIG. 60) for short-distance wireless communication, the communication terminal device 200 may be brought directly close to or into contact with an NFC input/output unit (not shown) on the cooking appliance 1 side to input information.

Summary of embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, in the second embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed on the top plate 3;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving commands from a user US;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
a display unit 16 for displaying cooking information and a notification unit 90 having a voice notification unit 50;
A control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type specific input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R for selecting three types of cooking modes (linked, combined, and independent) or cooking menus, and the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16 after starting the display unit 16,
The input operation unit 15 transmits measurement time data MJ (a voice input mode corresponding signal) acquired when the specific input key is touched to the control device 40,
the control device 40, when receiving measured time data MJ (a voice input mode corresponding signal) indicating a “long press” measured by the time measuring unit 15T from the input operation unit 15 during a display period of the standby initial screen 16MH, enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 and accepts a command to set a control condition of the recipe data CD;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from the outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15. In addition, the touch-type input keys on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 of this embodiment 2, as described in Figs. 65 to 67, the display unit (e.g., the first specific screen 16M1) displaying the identification information 167 related to the recipe data CD acquired from the outside automatically displays the voice input mode display information 179D (see Fig. 66) to notify the user US that the device is in a state in which voice input using the communication terminal device 200 is accepted.

Therefore, in the input process before checking the recipe data CD and starting cooking, the user US can easily use voice input. Note that in this second embodiment, voice input is performed using the communication terminal device 200, but a terminal device dedicated to voice input, such as a commonly used smart speaker, may also be used.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, a cooking system relating to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, the cooking system according to the third disclosure is
A cooking device 1 for heating an object to be heated N;
A cloud server 300 (a first server 321, a second server 322, etc.) connected to the cooking appliance 1 via a network NW by wireless communication;
Equipped with
The cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The cooking device 1 has a function of switching between a touch input mode and a voice input mode according to a touch state of a touch-type input key,
The cooking appliance 1 is in a standby state for acquiring the recipe data CD while being switched to the voice input mode,
When the cloud server 300 receives a request to provide the recipe data CD, the cloud server 300 transmits the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The cooking appliance 1 inputs control conditions related to the acquired recipe data CD in the voice input mode.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

According to the cooking system of the third disclosure, cooking can be performed using recipe data CD acquired from outside via a network.
In addition, when recipe data is acquired, the mode is automatically changed to voice input mode, so that when inputting control conditions related to the subsequently acquired recipe data, it is possible to input by voice, which contributes to improving the efficiency of input operations for the user US and reducing the input burden.

Furthermore, the cooking system of the third disclosure includes:
A communication terminal 200 capable of communicating with the cooking device 1 and having a terminal side operation unit (display operation unit) 225 that accepts input from a user US and a terminal side display unit 216 that displays information;
A cloud server 300 connected to the communication terminal 200 via a wireless communication network NW;
Equipped with
The cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting the recipe data CD for the cooking appliance 1 in response to a request from the communication terminal device 200,
The communication terminal 200 has a function of transmitting command information inputted to the terminal side operation unit 225 to a cloud server 300, and a function of displaying information of recipe data CD received from the cloud server on the terminal side display unit 216,
The communication terminal device 200 has a function of narrowing down food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of the cooking menu that is the subject of the recipe data CD to be transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 from a database (cooking appliance database 217) that it holds;
The communication terminal 200 has a function of transmitting, to the cooking appliance 1, the recipe data CD that can be executed and information indicating the amounts of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of the cooking that is the subject of the recipe data CD.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "Ratatouille"), information on the ingredients and nutritional components of the food related to that cooking menu can be easily obtained. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu from information on the amounts of food ingredients and nutritional components depending on the situation such as family health management and dietary restrictions, which can contribute to improving eating habits.

Furthermore, within the range of various recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance database 217, for example, recipes with a low amount of energy (calorie equivalent value) or recipes with a specific nutritional component (for example, high in iron) can be preferentially selected.
Therefore, the range of useful information that can be provided to the user US when selecting a cooking menu is expanded, and operability for the user US can be improved.

This system allows users US to easily check information on food ingredients and nutritional content in advance and select appropriate cooking menus in response to requests such as family health management and dietary restrictions, thereby contributing to improving eating habits.

In the second embodiment, similarly to the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, after the main power switch 20 is turned on, during the initial standby period TP,
(1) Provide common information to the user US during standby.
(2) After the voice input mode is selected, recipe data CD relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (including recipe data of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1) is made receivable.
By controlling the timing of obtaining recipe data CD from the outside, recipe data CD for another cooking menu will not be inadvertently received while selecting a cooking mode or setting control conditions.

Furthermore, the input keys 154M (153L, 153R), which are the selection section for the voice input mode, are also used to acquire the recipe data CD, so it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation sections) on the input operation section 15, and to prevent a decrease in operability for the user US.

In this second embodiment, similar to the cooking device 1 in the first embodiment, the restriction unit 55 is configured to restrict the acquisition of new recipe data CD until the cooking process of the acquired recipe data CD is completed.

This prevents the inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) during coordinated cooking, and allows the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD to be executed stably.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent problems with the operation of the control device 40 and to prevent misunderstandings or confusion on the part of the user US, which may occur if recipe data CD for a different cooking menu is inadvertently received during the cooking process. This improves usability for the user US.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 2, when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed and the operation to obtain the recipe data is started, the display automatically switches to the reception operation display screen 16MM, as described in FIG. 65.

In addition, multiple progress marks 16F are displayed on the reception operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the reception operation, so the user US can easily understand that the operation of obtaining recipe data CD is in progress, which has the effect of preventing unnecessary misunderstandings and operational errors.

In addition to or instead of displaying the progress mark 16F, the progress may be notified by voice from the voice notification unit 51. Furthermore, the progress marks are not limited to those that change in shape or number over time as shown in FIG. 65, and may be in a form in which the display color changes, for example.

Embodiment 3.
Figures 81 to 83 show a cooking device according to embodiment 3. Figure 81 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the central display unit immediately after start-up of cooking device 1. Figure 82 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the central display unit after start-up of cooking device 1. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the central display unit after start-up of cooking device 1. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of embodiments 1 and 2 described in Figures 1 to 80 are given the same reference numerals.

In this third embodiment, the configuration of the cooking device 1 shown in the second embodiment is modified, and the display content of the central display unit 16M and the procedure for selecting the cooking mode are partially modified.

Referring to Figure 81 .
When the main power switch 20 is in the "OFF" state, the central display unit 16M is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON", the control device 40 performs a self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then displays display screen A (initial standby screen 16MH) of FIG. 81.

In the display screen (initial standby screen) 16MH in FIG. 81, 60A is a display message notifying the user that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for directing the user to a dedicated recipe posting site (cloud server 300) via a wide area network NW such as the Internet. 60C is text (two-dimensional information explanation text) explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code.

When the communication terminal device 200 is started and the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read, it is possible to connect to an external recipe data providing server 301 (not shown) that holds information on various cooking recipes. As explained in the first embodiment, the recipe data providing server 301 is provided with a recipe DB (database) 302 (not shown) that holds various cooking recipe data CD.

After display screen 1A is displayed, display screen B is automatically displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 82, after display screen B is displayed, display screens B1 to B3 may be displayed for a fixed time (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds each) at fixed time intervals (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds each). Then, display screen B is displayed again.

On the other hand, the audio notification unit 50 may, when the display screen B shown in FIG. 81 is displayed, or when the display screens B1 to B3 are displayed as shown in FIG. 82, notify the user US of the display contents (displayed information) by audio and guide the user US as to which input keys to operate.

For example, at the time of display screen B1, it would be good to display a message such as "When using both the heating chamber and the induction cooker for coordinated cooking, select key number 1." In this case, "key number 1" refers to input key 153M. "Key number 2" refers to input keys 154M and 155M.

The number "1" may be printed or engraved on the operation surface of the input key 153M on the top surface of the central operation unit 15M. Alternatively, the operation surface of the input key 153M itself may be illuminated so that the number can be easily identified by the user US. A similar configuration may be adopted for the other keys numbered 2 and 3.

As shown in Figures 81 and 82, display areas 525, 526, and 527 for the names of cooking modes are displayed in central display section 16M.
The display section 525 is a display corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display section 526 is a display corresponding to the composite cooking mode KM2, and the display section 527 is a display corresponding to the single cooking mode KM1 of the first heating means HM1.

As shown in FIG. 81, the display screen B shows a list of the display units 525 to 527, and displays guide messages (text information) 530, 531, and 532 that identify the input key that should be operated first, in one-to-one correspondence with each of the display units 525 to 527.

Therefore, the user US can check information common to the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3, such as warning information (standby common information 60N), on the standby initial screen 16MH (display screen A).

Furthermore, since the above-mentioned guide messages 530, 531, and 532 can be viewed on the guide screen B (16MA), the user US can be prevented from becoming confused about how to operate the device before cooking begins, thereby realizing a cooking device 1 that is highly user-friendly and easy to use.

As can be seen from the above explanation, in this third embodiment, explanatory text 533, 534, 535 indicating the contents of each cooking mode are displayed simultaneously with the display units 525 to 527.

Furthermore, when the display screen B is displayed on the guidance screen 16MA, the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user by voice of the input key to be operated.

In Fig. 81, for example, when the input key 153M is touched, a display screen C1 is displayed. This display screen C1 is the second specific screen 16M2.
When another input key 153L or 153R is touched, a display screen C2 is displayed. This display screen C2 is a third specific screen 16M3.

As is clear from FIG. 81, the control device 40 is in the touch input mode from the moment the main power switch 20 is turned on.
When the input key 153M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, the central operation unit 15M determines whether the touch state is a “long press” or a “short press”, and the result of the determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, when one of the input keys 153L and 153R, which are one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press," and the result of this determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Therefore, if any one of the input keys 153M, 153L, and 153R is touched and held down, as shown in FIG. 81, voice input mode 1 (see embodiment 1) is added midway through, allowing input by voice as well.

Next, we will explain Figure 82.
As shown in the display screen B, when the input key 153M is displayed as a specific input key, such as "to key 1," on the initial standby screen 16MH, the input function of the input key 153M is enabled. In other words, during the initial standby period TP, the input keys shown on the display screens B1 to B3 are displayed with their input functions enabled.

Therefore, as shown in display screen B1, when the "number 1 key," i.e., input key 153M, is displayed as a specific input key on the initial standby screen 16MH, the input function of that input key 153M is already enabled.

After going through the above process, when the input key 153M is pressed for the first time, the central display unit 16M switches from display screen B to the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in FIG. 82. However, as described in the first embodiment, if "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not met, a display or audio notification is given to the effect that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected, and the display returns to screen A.

In addition, when the initial standby screen (display screen A in FIG. 60) 16MH is displayed, the voice notification unit 51 may provide guidance to press the input key 180 (see FIG. 11) if "voice input mode 2" is to be used.

The control device 40 is
(1) The point in time when any one of the input keys 153M, 153L, 153R, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched. (2) The point in time when the standby initial screen 16MH (display screen A) is displayed. (3) When the time that has elapsed without any of the input keys 153M, 153L, 153R being operated from any one of the points in time when the voice notification unit 50 notifies the contents of the display screen B by voice exceeds a certain time limit (a first time limit TX, for example, 30 minutes), the main power switch 20 is automatically opened to turn off the main power.

Next, we will explain Figure 83.
During an initial standby period TP after activation, the cooking appliance 1 cannot freely obtain recipe data CD from the communication terminal device 200 .

On the other hand, when one of the input keys 153M, 153L, and 153R, which are one of the voice input switching keys, is pressed, the acquisition period TB begins, and the cooking appliance 1 can acquire the recipe data CD if it is connected to the communication terminal device 200. At this time, it is not necessary that the input key 180 has been pressed first.

When the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, guidance to press the selection section (input key 180) for voice input mode 2 may not be given, but guidance to press input key 180 may be given at the stage of display screen B shown in FIG. 81.

With the above configuration, the user US can obtain information about the input keys to be operated not only visually but also by voice, which is expected to further improve operability.

In this third embodiment, the control device 40 also includes a heating control unit 43, a data acquisition unit 53 that acquires the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 in order to perform heating cooking in the linked cooking mode for a specific food, and a restriction unit 55 that restricts the data acquisition unit 53 from acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 during an "initial standby period" TP (before "cooking step 1") before cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3 is started.

In other words, during the initial waiting period TP shown in FIG. 83, the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of recipe data CD from outside.

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 does not restrict acquisition of recipe data CD after the input key 153M is operated, that is, during the acquisition possible period TB shown in FIG. 83. However, the "restriction" here does not include the meaning of determining whether the permission conditions described above are satisfied, so in reality, if the permission conditions are not satisfied, the result will be restriction.

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 has a function of "restricting" the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the recipe data CD once acquired is applied is completed.

This prevents another cooking menu (including a control menu for a composite cooking mode or a control menu for a single cooking mode) from being accidentally received during cooperative cooking, and enables the cooking menu of the stably received recipe data CD to be executed.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the control device 40 from being affected or the user US from being confused or misled due to the recipe data CD for another cooking menu being inadvertently received during the cooking process.

The above "restricted functions" may be relaxed a little.
For example, when recipe data CD is acquired in a cooperative cooking mode KM3, reception of the recipe data CD may be restricted only to the cooperative cooking mode of the same cooking mode, and not to other cooking modes such as a solo cooking mode.

Summary of embodiment 3.
As described above, in the third embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
A heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving instructions from a user;
a voice signal receiving unit 56 for receiving a command uttered by a user;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data from an external device;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has a plurality of touch-type input keys for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes,
The input operation unit 15 transmits a detection signal of the touch operation of the input key to the control device 40,
After starting up the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 displays information (character information specifying the input key to be operated first) 530, 531, 532 specifying the touch-type input key (e.g., 153M, 153L) corresponding to the cooking mode in a list form on the guide screen 16MA (see FIG. 81 ),
When one of the cooking modes is selected by a specific input key (e.g., 153M, 153L), the control device 40 determines whether a voice input mode is input from the detection signal corresponding to the touch state of the input key, and enables the acquisition of recipe data CD via the communication unit;
the control device 40 receives a voice command to set control conditions for the acquired recipe data CD;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from the outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15. In addition, the touch-type input keys (e.g., 153M, 153L) on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability and reduces the workload of the user US.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the third embodiment is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object placed on the top plate 3;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food in the heating chamber 6;
An input operation unit 15;
A notification unit 90 having a central display unit 16M;
A control device 40,
The control device 40 has an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time lag to perform one cooking operation,
After starting up the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
The standby initial screen 16MH displays at least one of reference information 1 (standby common information 60N) common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and reference information 2 (explanations 525-527, 533-535) showing the contents of a plurality of heating modes KM1-KM3 or the operation of the input operation unit 15 to select the heating cooking mode;
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R for selecting three types of cooking modes (linked, combined, and independent) or cooking menus,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch to the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) based on the touch state of the input keys, and issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1.
After starting up the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 from the input operation unit 15 during the display period of the standby initial screen 16MH, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 and accepts a command to set control conditions by voice of the user US.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from the outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15. In addition, the touch-type input keys (e.g., 153M, 153L) on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability and reduces the workload of the user US.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 3, as explained in Figs. 82 and 83, the guide screen 16MA is temporarily and automatically displayed. This allows the user US to easily select a plurality of cooking modes (KM1 to KM3) and operate the input operation unit 15 to select the cooking mode.

In this third embodiment, similarly to the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the cooking device 1 has a function of displaying a specific notification (displaying standby common information 60N) on the initial standby screen 16MH during the initial standby period TP, while enabling the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD when the selection unit for the voice input mode 1 (such as input key 153M) is selected.

Therefore, after the main power switch 20 is turned on, during the initial standby period TP,
(1) Provide the user US with standby common information 60N.
(2) After the voice input mode is selected, recipe data CD relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (including recipe data of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1) is made receivable.
By controlling the timing of obtaining recipe data CD from the outside, recipe data CD for another cooking menu will not be inadvertently received while selecting a cooking mode or setting control conditions.

Furthermore, the input keys (154M, 153L, etc.) that are the selection section for the voice input mode 1 are also used to acquire the recipe data CD, so it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation sections) on the input operation section 15, and to prevent a decrease in operability for the user US.

In this third embodiment, the same configuration as in the first embodiment can enjoy the various benefits described in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 4.
Fig. 84 shows a cooking device 1 according to embodiment 4, and explains the operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 from when the cooking device 1 is started to immediately before cooking begins. Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing the operation before switching to the linked cooking mode in the cooking device 1. Fig. 86 is a plan view showing the operation of the central operation unit and the central display unit. Fig. 87 is a flow chart showing the operation of the communication terminal. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of the respective embodiments explained in Figs. 1 to 83 are given the same reference numerals.

In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 shown in the first embodiment is modified.
Also, the cooking modes for which recipe data CD is obtained are limited to two, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, which is different from the first to third embodiments.

The cooking device 1 of this embodiment 4 has an audio signal receiving unit 56 and an audio signal analyzing unit 58 as shown in the embodiment 1, and therefore has the function of receiving audio input by itself and decoding it to convert it into command data (command signal). However, the cooking device 1 may not have such a function and an external information processing device (information processing terminal device) may be used. For example, an audio input/output device 1000 (not shown) called a smart speaker may be used.

In this embodiment 4, when the initial standby screen 16MH (described in FIG. 86) is displayed and the recipe acquisition key 453 (described later) is operated, "voice input mode 1" is started immediately afterwards.

Next, we will explain Figure 84.
In Fig. 84, step SU1 is the same as the display of the standby initial screen 16MH explained in Fig. 48, so a duplicated explanation will be omitted. The display contents of the standby initial screen 16MH are slightly different from those in the first to third embodiments, and will be explained in Fig. 86.

As shown in FIG. 84, after the stage where the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display unit 16M (step SU1), in step SU1A, an automatic connection operation with an external device (the communication terminal device 200 or the cloud server 300) is performed, and if the communication connection is successful, the device proceeds to a standby mode for obtaining recipe data CD (step SU1A).

The next step SU1B is one of the steps in the menu of the "function setting mode" that can be changed by the input key 151KP, and some functions can be omitted depending on the previous settings of the user US. Therefore, in Fig. 84, this step is indicated by a dashed frame.
The reason for providing such a function setting mode is to enable a user US who is accustomed to (proficient at) the operation to perform quick operation input.

In the default state where the function settings are not changed using the input keys 151KP, as shown in this figure, the input functions of the input keys 153M and 154M are enabled, and the initial standby screen 16MH is displayed to prompt input from the user.

On the other hand, if the input key 151KP is pressed in advance to cancel the default setting and switch to the "omission mode", some of the operations in step SU1B are omitted after the "function setting mode" is set. In other words, you can proceed to the next step SU1C without waiting for the update of the display information on the standby initial screen 16MH described in FIG. 86. This does not mean that the display of the standby initial screen 16MH itself is omitted.

After step SU1A, the user US can proceed to the recipe data CD acquisition process (step SU1C) by touching one of the input keys 153M and 154M.

As an alternative method, the user US can operate the recipe acquisition key 453 after step SU1A to proceed to the recipe data CD acquisition process (step SU1C).

When the recipe data CD held in the communication terminal 200 is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 by operating the communication terminal 200, the transmission of the recipe data CD is started. The data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 then checks whether the data is in a specified communication format (step SU1C). It then confirms that the data has been received (step SU2).

When the start of obtaining the recipe data CD is confirmed at step SU2, an "input inhibition period" TC starts from step SU2.
When the “input inhibition period” TC starts, the input functions of the various input keys in the input operation unit 15 are disabled by the control device 40 .

For example, the input functions of various input keys are disabled as follows:
(1) The input function of the input key 153M is disabled by the control device 40, so that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected. However, as an exception, the operation button (input key) 20A of the main power switch 20 remains enabled, so that it is possible to cut off the power at any time. Also, as an exception, the input function of the input key 152M is maintained, so that if the input key 152M is pressed at this stage, the acquisition of the recipe data CD is canceled, the recipe data CD is erased, and the process returns to step SU1A.
Furthermore, the input function of the recipe acquisition key 453 is also disabled, and the blinking or continuous light emission of the corresponding light-emitting section 21M also ends.

By disabling these input functions, during the input prohibited period TC, the central operation unit 15 will be in a state where it is not possible to input settings for control conditions, either by touch input or voice input.

During the "input prohibited period" TC, the control device 40 compares the latest state of each component of the cooking device 1 and determines whether the state satisfies permission condition 1 and permission condition 2.

When it is determined that permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 are simultaneously satisfied (SU6), the identification information 167 contained in the recipe data CD acquired from the external device (the communication terminal device 200 or the cloud server 300) is displayed on the central display unit 16M. In this case, the identification information (e.g., "Name: Hamburger") is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SU7).

This Figure 84 omits the description of the step (SU7A) of displaying the food component display screen 16M1A and the food component display screen 16M1B as described in Figure 30.

The "recipe data changeable period" TD begins from the point when the identification information (e.g., "Name: Hamburger") 167 is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1. This recipe data changeable period TD ends when the cooking start input key 151M is pressed.

When the "recipe data changeable period" TD begins, the input functions of the various input keys that were disabled during the "input prohibited period" TC are released by the control device 40.

Therefore, during the "recipe data changeable period" TD, the user US can use input keys 154M, 155M, etc. to adjust the control conditions (heat value, heat level, target temperature, heating time, and other conditions) for the cooking menu targeted by the acquired recipe data CD (for example, "hamburger steak") by voice input. Control condition setting data can also be input by touch input. However, depending on the cooking menu, there may be control conditions that cannot be changed. Then, once input of the control conditions is completed, the system proceeds to the preparation period (standby state) for starting cooking (step SU8).

The cooking device 1 of this embodiment 4 is equipped with an audio signal receiving unit 56 and an audio signal analyzing unit 58, as in the embodiment 1, so that input can be made by voice without relying on an external device such as a communication terminal device 200.

On the other hand, the case where the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking device 1 with that of the step SU3 and determines that the state does not satisfy permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 (step SU4) will be described.

The contents of the standby initial screen 16HM in the central display section 16M are partially changed to display in text a message indicating that the recipe data CD acquired from the external device cannot be executed with the current cooking device 1. The same message is also audibly notified by the audio notification section 50 (step SU5A).

Furthermore, in step SU5A, the communication unit 51 transmits a "notice of non-permission" to the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300 that transmitted the recipe data CD, stating that "the recipe data CD is currently unavailable." Then, the sender of the recipe data CD (communication terminal 200) is notified so that the latest status of the cooking appliance 1 can be known.

From step SU1A to immediately before step SU2 shown in FIG. 84, the restriction unit 55 does not restrict the acquisition of recipe data CD from outside. The restriction unit 55 permits the acquisition of recipe data CD from outside under "certain conditions."

The "certain condition" means, for example, that if recipe data CD has been acquired once from outside, recipe data CD cannot be acquired thereafter (until the cooking process based on the previously acquired recipe data CD is completed).

During the input prohibition period TC from step SU2 onwards, the restriction unit 55 prohibits the user US from changing the control conditions, such as the heat level and heating temperature, by voice input for the recipe data CD that has been acquired.

During the input prohibition period TC, even if the communication terminal device 200 or the cloud server 300 successfully transmits control condition setting data, that data (hereinafter referred to as "unauthorized data") will not be reflected in the heating and cooking of the recipe data CD that has already been acquired. The unauthorized data is automatically erased when the cooking process of the recipe data CD is completed and the main power switch 20 is turned off.

Even if "unauthorized data" is acquired during the input prohibition period TC, this unauthorized data cannot be used when executing a cooking menu based on recipe data CD acquired thereafter.

When the input prohibited period TC ends and the next "recipe data changeable period" TD begins, the heat and other control conditions can be changed by touching the input operation unit 15 or by voice input. However, even in this case, new recipe data CD cannot be obtained from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of one linked cooking menu scheduled to be cooked at this stage is completed. If you want to obtain different recipe data CD and execute a different cooking menu, you need to temporarily cancel the linked cooking mode KM3 with the input key 152M.

With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent another cooking menu (including the control menu for the composite cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) from being inadvertently received during coordinated cooking, and to stably execute the cooking menu of the received recipe data 2.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the control device 40 from being affected or the user US from being confused or misled due to the recipe data CD for another cooking menu being inadvertently received during the cooking process.

Next, we will explain Figure 85.
A basic operation program from turning on the main power to starting cooking preparation is stored in a memory device 41 inside the control device 40.
Since the cooking appliance 1 in FIG. 85 is a built-in type, the power plug (not shown) is always connected to a commercial (AC) power source from the time the kitchen furniture 600 is installed.
Therefore, the user US presses the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 to turn on the power (step SW1 in FIG. 85).

Then, as described in the first embodiment, a predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the control device 40 via a DC power supply conversion section (not shown) of the power supply circuit 57, and the control device 40 is started up.
The control device 40 starts its own diagnosis of whether or not there is an abnormality by its own control program (SW2).

The related circuits of the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 check for the presence or absence of abnormalities in themselves. The data of these check results is collected centrally by the control device 40, which determines the presence or absence of abnormalities.

Step SW2 says "send startup information to outside", which means that the communication unit 51 sends operating status data OS notifying the start of operation of the cooking appliance 1 to a "home control device" (not shown) called an "integrated information management device" or "integrated power control device" (HEMS controller) in a living space such as the kitchen 601 (not shown). Alternatively, the operating status data OS may be sent to the cloud server 300 by connecting to the network NW via an access point such as a wireless router 340 (not shown).

In addition, step SW2 says "obtain information (such as a power consumption regulation command) from outside," which means obtaining command signals (also called "command data") and information from the home control device (not shown), the communication terminal device 200, the cloud server 300, etc., via the communication unit 51.

In step SW2, the communication unit 51 accesses the home control device and acquires information such as cooking menus and recipe data that are useful for health management within the range previously set by the user US. For example, information that the user US of this cooking appliance 1 has previously sent to the cloud server 300 via an Internet line using a communication terminal device 200 or the like can also be acquired immediately after starting up the control device 40. Note that when any information is acquired, the information may be displayed on the common screen (initial screen during standby) 16MH.

If no abnormality is found in the cooking appliance 1, the control device 40 activates the display unit 16. Then, it displays a message that "There is no abnormality, so cooking can be started" (SW3). The display screen at this initial stage is the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH described in FIG. 45 of the first embodiment and the like.
Therefore, the standby common information 60N, such as information indicating that the power is on, is displayed. At the same time as these displays, the audio notification unit 50 notifies the same contents by audio.

Next, after the abnormality determination is completed as described above, the control device 40 activates the display unit 16 and the audio notification unit 50. At this point, the initial standby period TP begins.

The display unit 16 and the audio notification unit 50 then provide notifications and audio guidance to encourage the user to select the heating means (SW4).
In the next step SW4P, it is determined whether a special input key 453 (see FIG. 86) on the central operation unit 15M has been operated. This input key 453 is hereinafter referred to as the "recipe acquisition key." If this recipe acquisition key 453 has been operated by touch, the process proceeds to step SW5. Whether this recipe acquisition key 453 is "long pressed" or "short pressed" does not affect the input to the control device 40, so it does not matter whether it is "long pressed" or "short pressed."

Similar to step SU1B described in FIG. 84, this step SW4P is a step provided by default, and if the input key 151KP is pressed in advance to cancel this default setting and switch to the "omission mode", some of the operations of step SW4P are omitted after the "function setting mode" is set. In other words, the display of the standby initial screen 16MH, the display contents of which are shown in FIG. 86, is omitted. Then, it is possible to proceed to the next step SW5.

In the next step SW5, it is determined whether the recipe acquisition key 453 (see FIG. 86) on the central operation unit 15M has been operated. If this recipe acquisition key 453 has been operated by touch, the process proceeds to step SW6.

If the determination at step SW5 is "No", the process proceeds to step SW11.
In step SW7, it is determined whether or not the input key 153L or 153R has been operated as the third selection means for selecting the "single cooking mode" KM1 using the first heating means (induction heating means) HM1.

To select the "single cooking mode" of the first heating means HM1, the user US must operate either the input key 153L of the left operation unit 15L or the input key 153R of the right operation unit 15R.

In this step SW11, if either the input key 153L or 153R is operated, the result is determined to be "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SW12. If neither the input key 153L nor 153R is operated, the process returns to step SW5.

Step SW14 between step SW5 and step SW11 performs upper limit management of operation time.
The time that has elapsed since the SW4 was pressed is measured, and a check is made to see whether the elapsed time exceeds a time limit TX (e.g., 30 minutes), and if it does, automatic shutdown processing 1 (see step SM6 in FIG. 39 of embodiment 1) is performed.

At the point in time when the answer to step SW11 is "Yes," the voice input mode is started, and the process proceeds to step SW12.
At step SW12, the display of the standby initial screen 16MH is stopped, and instead, a third specific screen 16M3 is displayed (step SW13). The third specific screen 16M3 may be the same as that shown in FIG. 46 in the first embodiment, or may be different.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SW5 that the recipe acquisition key 453 has been operated, the process proceeds to step SW6.
Step SW6 is a process for starting the reception of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2. The contents (data format, etc.) of the received recipe data CD are checked here.

In step SW7, it is determined whether or not the appropriate recipe data CD for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been acquired. If the recipe data CD has been acquired by satisfying the conditions determined by the "permission conditions" as described in the first embodiment, step SW7 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SW8.
At step SW8, the display of the standby initial screen 16MH is stopped, and instead the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.

On the other hand, if step SW7 is "No", the process proceeds to next step SW9.
In step SW9, it is determined whether recipe data CD for the composite cooking mode KM2 has been acquired. In this step SW9, it is determined whether specific permission condition 3 is met even in the composite cooking mode KM2. For example, if heat from the most recently used high-temperature cooking remains and the temperature in the heating chamber 6 is high (e.g., 90°C or higher), the control menu for automatically controlling microwave cooking at the temperature detected by the temperature sensor ("warm" described in FIG. 13) cannot be executed, so the determination is "No."

If the determination at step SW9 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SW10. At step SW10, the display of the standby initial screen 16MH is stopped, and instead the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
If the determination at step SW9 is "No", the process returns to the previous step SW7.

When the process proceeds to step SW8 or SW10, the communication unit 51 transmits a specific signal to the "home control device" (not shown) or the cloud server 300, indicating that the cooking appliance 1 can operate in response to the recipe data CD from the outside. The specific signal is transmitted to the cloud server 300 as a type of the operating state data OS.

Note that after steps SW8, SW10, and SW13, although not shown in the figure, if a command to start the heating operation is received after the input process of the control conditions for heating and cooking, the cooking process for the respective cooking mode will proceed.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the central operation unit 16M and the central display unit 16M.
Fig. 86 shows the stage of step SW5 in Fig. 85. An initial standby screen 16MH is displayed in the central display portion 16M.

In FIG. 86, 453 is the recipe acquisition key. The light-emitting unit 21M corresponding to this recipe acquisition key 453 starts to flash (or emit light continuously) after the connection with the communication terminal device 200 is successful, prompting the user US to perform the "acquisition permission" operation for the recipe data CD.

Meanwhile, the initial standby screen 16MH displays acquisition operation support information 60P to encourage the operation of the recipe acquisition key 453. Furthermore, if the automatic connection with the communication terminal device 200 is successful, there is a possibility that cooking will be performed by receiving recipe data CD, so display information 60P1 for "recipe cooking mode" is displayed. Note that, at this point, the operation to acquire the recipe data CD has not yet started, so it is not possible to display what type of recipe data CD it is.

After starting to acquire recipe data CD, a reception operation display screen 16MM is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH. Although not shown, it is desirable for this reception operation display screen 16MM to display a progress mark 16F as information indicating the progress of reception, as described in FIG. 65 of the second embodiment.

Next, FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing one additional function of the operation of the communication terminal device 200 to acquire recipe data CD from the cloud server 300. Note that the following description will be given on the assumption that the basic internal configuration of the communication terminal device 200 is the same as that shown in FIG. 60 of the second embodiment.

The flow chart shown in FIG. 87 illustrates the steps executed by the control program of the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200.
When recipe data CD is acquired from cloud server 300 (step SL11), operations from step SL12 onwards are started.

It is determined whether a specific optional function has been set in advance by the touch operation unit 215 (step SL12). If this option has not been set, the process ends.

If the option has been set, the process proceeds to step SL13. In step SL13, data on the total amount of food ingredients and the total amount of nutritional ingredients for the "target period 1" that the user US has previously set on the touch operation unit 215 is extracted from the data in the cooking appliance database 217.

For example, if the user US has set "target period 1" to the past day or week, the recipe data CD that the communication terminal device 200 obtained from the cloud server 300 and sent to the cooking appliance 1 during that target period will be the search target.

The recipe data CD that the communication terminal device 200 acquires from the cloud server 300 and transmits to the cooking appliance 1 is stored in the cooking appliance database 217 each time. The "food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data" 226 for each recipe data CD is also stored.

Therefore, the central processing unit 212 reads the "food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data" 226 corresponding to the recipe data CD sent to the cooking device 1, and tally up the cumulative values only for the "target period 1."

Next, a determination is made as to whether the data compilation results in a value that has been set by the user US in advance (step SL14). For example, if the cumulative amounts of "energy (calorie equivalent value)" and "fat" in the food component and nutritional component data 226 exceed the set values, a voice notification is issued by the speaker 214. Alternatively, the notification is displayed on the terminal display unit (display screen) 216 to alert the user US (step SL15).

The optional function shown in FIG. 87 is executed each time recipe data CD is acquired from the cloud server 300, and is desirably notified to the user US before the recipe data CD is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1. The operation shown in FIG. 87 does not require the user US to input the operation each time, and if set in advance, it is automatically executed when the recipe data CD is acquired, so the user US is not forced to perform troublesome operations.

Summary of embodiment 4.
As is clear from the above description, in this fourth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device according to the first disclosure is as follows:
Heating means (first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, etc.) for heating the object to be heated N;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving commands from a user US;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has input keys (151M to 159M, etc.) for selecting cooking contents and a recipe acquisition key 453 for permitting acquisition of the recipe data CD,
When the recipe acquisition key 453 is operated, a command is issued to the control device 40 to start a voice input mode,
After starting up the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 is characterized in that, when the recipe acquisition key is operated while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, it enables the recipe data CD to be acquired via the communication unit 51, and also accepts a command to set control conditions for the recipe data CD in the voice input mode.

Because of this configuration, the timing of acquiring various recipe data CD from outside can be controlled by the recipe acquisition key 453 of the input operation unit 15. In addition, the recipe acquisition key (input key) 453 can be used not only to allow recipe acquisition but also to command switching to voice input mode, so that the troublesome input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload. In addition, because one recipe acquisition key (input key) 453 is used to perform two functions, acquiring recipe data CD and switching to voice input mode, it is possible to avoid overcrowding of the input keys on the input operation unit 15 without increasing the number of input keys.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 according to the fifth disclosure is
The input operation unit 15 has a recipe acquisition key 453 and three types of touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting a cooking mode or cooking menu (linked, combined, independent),
The input operation unit 15 issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 for switching to a voice input mode (voice input mode 1) by operating the recipe acquisition key 453.
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, it is configured to acquire the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 and to accept voice setting commands for the control conditions from the user US.

Because of this configuration, three types of cooking modes (linked, combined, and independent) or cooking menus can be selected by operating the touch-type input keys. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device 1 that can handle a variety of cooking methods.

Furthermore, the recipe acquisition key (input key) 453, as explained in FIG. 85, of the three types of cooking modes (linked, combined, independent), issues a command to switch to the voice input mode uniformly (commonly) for two of the linked cooking mode KM3 and combined cooking mode KM2 (steps SW5, SW6), so that the number of input keys is not increased and overcrowding of the input keys on the input operation unit 15 can be avoided.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of this embodiment 4, when it becomes necessary to operate the recipe acquisition key 453, operation support information 60P for the recipe acquisition key 453 is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, and display information 60P1 for the "recipe cooking mode" is also displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH.
Therefore, the user US can be accurately guided in the operation for acquiring the recipe data CD, so that erroneous operation on the user side can be avoided, and as a result, a cooking device 1 with good operability can be realized.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, the heat cooking system according to the third disclosure is realized with the following configuration.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the third disclosure includes:
A cooking device 1 for heating an object to be heated N;
A communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance 1 via wireless communication;
Equipped with
The communication terminal 200 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the cooking appliance,
The cooking appliance 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
The cooking device 1 has a function of switching between a touch input mode and a voice input mode according to a touch state of a touch-type input key,
The cooking appliance 1 accepts input of a control condition related to the recipe data CD acquired from the communication terminal device 200 in the voice input mode.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

According to the cooking system of the third disclosure, cooking can be performed using recipe data CD acquired from outside via a network.
In addition, when acquiring recipe data CD, the touch input key can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that when subsequently entering control conditions related to the acquired recipe data CD, it becomes possible to enter control conditions by voice, which contributes to improving the efficiency of input operations for the user US and reducing the input burden.

Further, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system of the third disclosure includes:
The communication terminal device 200 has a function of narrowing down food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of the cooking menu that is the subject of the recipe data CD to be transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 from a database (cooking appliance database 217) that it holds;
The communication terminal 200 has a function of transmitting, to the cooking appliance 1, the recipe data CD that can be executed and information indicating food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of the cooking that is the subject of the recipe data CD;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "Ratatouille"), information on the ingredients and nutritional components of the food related to that cooking menu can be easily obtained. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu from information on food ingredients and nutritional components depending on the situation such as family health management and dietary restrictions, which can contribute to improving eating habits.

Furthermore, within the range of various recipe data CD2 stored in the cooking appliance database 217, for example, recipes with a low amount of energy (calorie equivalent value) or recipes with a specific nutritional component (for example, high in iron) can be preferentially selected.
Therefore, the range of useful information that can be provided to the user US when selecting a cooking menu is expanded, and operability for the user US can be improved.

This system allows users US to easily check information on food ingredients and nutritional content in advance and select appropriate cooking menus in response to requests such as family health management and dietary restrictions, thereby contributing to improving eating habits.

Furthermore, the communication terminal device 200 has a function of determining whether any food ingredient or nutritional ingredient exceeds a preset value set in advance by the user US, using data from a database (heating cooker database 217) that holds the food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of the cooking menu that is the subject of the recipe data CD to be transmitted to the heating cooker 1 (see step SL14 in FIG. 86).

Therefore, if the cumulative amount of energy (calorie equivalent value), fat, etc. exceeds the set value, a voice notification is issued by the speaker 214. Alternatively, the notification is displayed on the terminal side display unit (display screen) 216 to alert the user US, which contributes to the user US's dietary restrictions and health management.

Embodiment 5.
FIG. 88 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to embodiment 5. FIG. 89 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 90 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the central display unit and its peripheral parts of the cooking device constituting the cooking system shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 91 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the central display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing the input operation steps and display steps of the cooking device shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 93 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the central display unit in the modified example 1 of the cooking device shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 94 is an operation explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the central display unit of the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 93. FIG. 95 is an operation explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the central display unit of the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 93. FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing a part of the input operation unit and the control device in the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 93. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing modified example 2 of the display operation of the central display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 88. Fig. 98 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a display state in modified example 3, which is yet another modification example 2 shown in Fig. 97. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of the respective embodiments explained in Figs. 1 to 87 are given the same reference numerals.

Referring to Figure 88 .
The fifth embodiment is characterized in that a small portable voice input/output device (a type of information processing terminal device) 1000 is used instead of the communication terminal device 200 shown in the second embodiment.

Another difference from the first to fourth embodiments is that a third server 323 is provided.
The third server 323 is connected to the first server 321 via wired or wireless communication (network NW) 205. The first server 321 has a food component database 321P.

The third server 323 has an inventory information storage unit 324 and an ingredient consumption determination unit 325. The inventory information storage unit 324 stores "inventory data" SD1 transmitted from the refrigerator 403 via the first server 321 and the network NW (205), and the inventory information is updated as needed in response to commands from the first server 321. Note that the input/output unit 324A of this third server 323 is not shown in the figure.

As described in the first embodiment (particularly FIG. 7), the inventory status may be checked at any time and the inventory data SD1 may be updated upon receiving a signal from an information processing device 411 (not shown) called a home gateway 411 or an integrated power control device (HEMS controller) in a living space such as the kitchen 601 (not shown).

The ingredient consumption determining unit 325 obtains ingredient information (inventory data SD1) from the inventory information storage unit 324, and estimates the amount of ingredient consumed from the change in the inventory amount.
The ingredient consumption determination unit 325 performs a determination each time cooking is performed. The determination is made by inputting cooking execution data CN from the cooking appliance 1, comparing the input data with fluctuations in the inventory data SD1 acquired from the inventory information storage unit 324, i.e., information indicating changes in the amount of ingredients (change information), and analyzing the type and amount of ingredients actually consumed by a machine learning method. Note that the machine learning method is not particularly limited, and for example, a known machine learning method such as neural networking is applied.

For example, when the ingredient consumption determination unit 325 obtains data from the cooking appliance 1 on cooking "hamburger" in the linked cooking mode KM3, it compares the cooking implementation data CN on the cooking appliance 1 with the change in the amount of each type of ingredient from the inventory data SD1 stored in the refrigerator 403. If an ingredient (e.g., 300 grams of beef) that was in the refrigerator 403 before cooking cannot be confirmed after cooking in the refrigerator 403's inventory management system (e.g., camera video data for inventory confirmation, a sensor in the corresponding freezer of the refrigerator 403, etc.), it presumes that the beef was used. Note that when making this determination, data comparing general cooking menus with the types of ingredients used is also used.

As shown in FIG. 89, the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 5 includes an audio signal receiving unit 56 as shown in embodiment 1. Since it also includes an audio signal analyzing unit 58, the cooking device 1 itself has the function of processing audio input and selecting recipe data and menus. It also includes an input key 180 for selecting audio input mode 2.

The voice input/output device 1000, which is one of the features of this embodiment 5, is slightly different from the smartphone (communication terminal device) 200 of embodiment 2, and is a device that receives commands from the user US by voice and notifies the user US of information by voice. For example, it is an input terminal device such as a smart speaker or an AI speaker. It does not have a function of acquiring recipe data CD and providing it to the cooking appliance 1 by wireless communication or near field communication (NFC).

When a user US is near the cooking appliance 1 and gives a command to the cooking appliance 1, the voice input/output device 1000 acquires the voice (natural language) uttered by the user US near the cooking appliance 1 as a voice signal.

The voice input/output device 1000 has a microphone (not shown) for collecting the voice of the user US, and a speaker 1001 for emitting voice in return. The speaker 1001 is for informing the user of the results of the voice input, guidance for the next input, etc.
When the user US turns on the voice input/output device 1000, it is connected to a second server 322 connected via a network (wireless communication network) NW. The second server 322 has a voice translation function and a search function. The power supply of the voice input/output device 1000 and the power supply of the cooking appliance 1 are not linked at all and can be turned on and off independently of each other.

When a voice signal (voice data) VS is sent from the voice input/output device 1000, the second server 322 acquires the voice (natural language) uttered by the user US as a voice signal, converts it into a command signal (request B) from the user US, and sends it to the first server 321.

Based on the request B from the second server 322, the first server 321 can ultimately generate a remote control signal RS for the cooking appliance 1. In addition, the first server 321 can provide the cooking appliance 1 with recipe data CD acquired from the recipe data providing server 301.

That is, in this fifth embodiment, the recipe data CD is not provided to the cooking appliance 1 from a communication terminal device 200 such as a smartphone (see the second embodiment, etc.).
Figure 88 shows recipe data CD being transmitted from the first server 321 to the cooking appliance 1. In this case, the recipe data CD includes, for example, command signals, in other words, commands (command data), for setting the time, heat, etc. for a control menu called "warming" of the cooking appliance 1 and a cooking menu called "hamburger steak."
Furthermore, these commands may be generated and transmitted several times or more before one control menu or cooking menu is finalized by the cooker 1. In particular, when the content input by the user's voice is one phrase (for example, "warm"), in order to set lower level command content (for example, heating temperature or heat) required to execute it, the first server 321 generates an operation guidance command (notification command signal) such as "Please set the temperature" to the cooker 1 and causes the cooker 1 to notify the user, and such commands are also included in the "recipe data CD" in FIG.

The first server 321 stores various remote operation data for the cooking appliance 1 in the memory unit 321R, and therefore transmits the necessary operation support data GS1 to the second server 322 whenever necessary in response to the request B from the second server 322. For this reason, the second server 322 transmits operation support data GS2 that can be converted into voice data to the voice input/output unit 1000 in response to the operation support data GS1. A user US who gives commands by voice can confirm the results of his/her own input by the voice emitted from a speaker (not shown) of the voice input/output unit 1000, and can also receive appropriate guidance for the next input. In other words, input can be made by voice in an interactive format, and detailed conditions can be given successively deeper in the control structure.

With the above basic configuration, even if the user US is near the cooking appliance 1, and both hands are occupied with cooking preparations or handling ingredients, limiting the frequency with which the user US can directly touch the input operation unit 15 of the cooking appliance 1, the user can conveniently operate the cooking appliance 1 remotely using natural speech (voice).

Other configurations of the second server 322 are the same as those of the second server 322 described in the second embodiment, so duplicated explanations will be omitted.
As described in the second embodiment, the second server 322 also generates, as one type of the request B, a command to extract the desired recipe data CD from the database of the recipe information providing server 301 .

As described above, one of the features of this embodiment 5 is that the voice input/output device 1000, unlike the communication terminal device 200 of embodiment 2, does not have the function of transmitting the desired recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the voice input/output device 1000 can issue commands to the second server 322 regarding input operations corresponding to all cooking modes including the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2. However, commands that are commands to start a heating operation are not included in all cooking modes including the linked cooking mode KM3. Therefore, it is not possible to issue a command (send a command) to start the heating operation of the cooking appliance 1 from the voice input/output device 1000 via the first server 321. This is for safety reasons.

In addition, command information for various functions that can be set using the function setting key 151KP of the cooking appliance 1 cannot be transmitted from the voice input/output device 1000, nor can it be generated by the first server 321. To switch to the function setting mode, the user US needs to operate the function setting key 151KP of the cooking appliance 1.

The control device 40 shown in FIG. 89 has an execution program for the control menu ("RG continuous cooking") of the combined cooking mode KM2 described in embodiment 1 (particularly, the range grill heating in FIG. 37).

The "RG continuous cooking" is a method of cooking food by combining microwave heating and oven heating. There are two types:
(1) A pattern in which microwave heating is first performed for a fixed period of time, and after that period of time has elapsed, heating is automatically performed by the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b.
(2) A pattern in which microwave heating is performed until the temperature reaches 80°C or a temperature set by the user (however, any one temperature between 80°C and 100°C can be set), and then the oven heating which is scheduled for use is automatically switched over, and heating is performed using the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b for the set time or for the period until the temperature set by the user US is reached.

As described above, in "RG continuous cooking", cooking continues even if the user US does not give a command to start cooking again midway, and the user US does not have to be near the cooking device 1 all the time, which reduces the burden on the user US. Since two heating sources are used, this is also a type of combined cooking mode KM2.

In the RG continuous cooking control menu, the user US cannot select the heat value (watts) during microwave heating, but can select the heating intensity by selecting one of "weak" or "strong", etc.

Such “RG continuous cooking” can be selected by the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15.
In addition, in this "RG continuous cooking", the central operation unit 15M is provided with an order selection key (not shown) so that the user US can select whether to perform microwave heating or oven heating first. Alternatively, the order can be set in a voice input mode.

As explained in the first embodiment, in the fifth embodiment, the input operation unit 15 is provided with an input key 151KP (see FIG. 93). When the input key 151KP is pressed, the control device 40 switches to the "function setting mode."

Next, we will explain Figure 90.
FIG. 90 is a plan view of the central operation unit 15M, which is one of the features of the fifth embodiment.
90, the display screen portion of the central display unit 16M has a fourth area (fourth display area) 28 in addition to the first area 22 to the third area 24. The first area 22, the second area 23, and the third area 24 are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and are display areas whose effective display areas change automatically. However, the fourth area 28 has a fixed area, and is formed long and narrow so as to lie adjacent to the rear of the first area 22 to the third area 24.

The surface of the central display unit 16M is covered with a glass plate, and almost the entire surface, except for the periphery, is a capacitive touch panel that senses the touch of the user's finger. Therefore, this touch panel portion is hereinafter referred to as the "operation panel" 351. Note that if the central display unit 16M is placed below the top plate 3, the glass plate (operation panel 351) can be shared with the top plate 3, but it may also be configured with a separate panel.

The entire touch panel 351 is divided into a "touch-restricted portion" corresponding to the fourth area 28 and portions (touch-recommended portions) that function as the first area 22 to the fourth area 24.
Reference numeral 341 denotes an electrode formed on the back side of the touch restriction portion by deposition, printing, etc. When the touch panel 351 is configured as a part of the top plate 3, the electrode 341 is formed on the back side of the top plate 3 by means of deposition, printing, etc. Note that other touch detection electrodes (not shown) are also arranged in the first area 22 to the third area 24.

The electrode 341 transmits a contact detection signal to a contact detection unit (not shown), and detects from a change in capacitance that the user US has touched the upper part of the electrode 341 (the upper surface of the top plate 3) while the input operation unit 15 is activated by the control device 40.

Even if a heated object N (not shown) such as a metal pan is placed so that it protrudes up to the position of the central display unit 16M (abnormal state), the electrode 341 can detect excessive proximity of the heated object N. Therefore, the control device 40 can detect abnormal placement, such as when the heated object N is abnormally close to or covering the central display unit 16M, and issue an alarm. In particular, when cooking with cooking oil such as tempura, the tempura pan (heated object) becomes hot, so if it is carelessly placed covering the top of the central display unit 16M, the display unit 16M will overheat and may cause a malfunction. However, in this embodiment 5, such a situation can be detected by the electrode 341 and an alarm can be issued to the user.

The electrodes 341 and the contact detection unit (not shown) also function as a safety device to prevent the user from touching the "touch restriction portion." In other words, the user's contact with the top plate 3, which becomes hot during induction heating, can be minimized.

The central heating status display section 17M is divided into two sections in the front-to-rear direction, and the lower section (front side) has a range light-emitting element (LED) 310 behind the section displaying the word "range", a grill light-emitting element (LED) 311 behind the section displaying the word "grill", an oven light-emitting element (LED) 312 behind the section displaying the word "oven", and a central induction light-emitting element (LED) 313 behind the section displaying the word "IH".

As is clear from FIG. 90, the various input keys 154M to 159M provided on the central operation unit 16M in the first embodiment are unnecessary in this fifth embodiment, and are therefore deleted.
Instead, it is provided with a touch panel input device 350, which will be described with reference to FIG. 91 onwards, and a touch gesture determination device 353 that receives operation information on the touch panel.

151M is an input key that commands the start of the cooking process, and is a push-button type mechanical switch (not shown) that is pressed when pressed. Similarly, 152M is an input key that commands the end of the cooking process, and is a push-button type mechanical switch (not shown) that is pressed when pressed. Note that these input keys 151M and 152M may be configured as touch-type input keys as in the first embodiment.

Next, we will explain Figure 91.
The central display unit 16M is automatically activated immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned on.
The display screen of the central display section 16M is the display screen 1 (initial standby screen 16MH) shown in FIG.

Display screen 1A automatically changes to display screen 1A within a few seconds of displaying initial standby screen 16MH. This display screen 1A is called guide screen 1 (16MA1). Guide screen 1 displays instructions 525-527 indicating the area to be touched first in first area 22-third area 24 of central display section 16M to select one of three cooking modes.

The auxiliary information 179A is displayed on the display screen 2 and the display screen 4. The auxiliary information 179A is displayed after switching to the voice input mode.
The auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portion of the identification information 160, 167 displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 or the third specific screen 16M3.

Furthermore, touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R indicating the touch operation portion are displayed together with the character "Select" so as to correspond to the explanatory texts 525 to 527, respectively.

Furthermore, when the user US touches a position on the guide screen 1 (16MA1) where one piece of touch position information 536R is displayed, the screen changes to the display screen 3.
Hereinafter, the display screen 3 is referred to as a "guide screen 2" (16MA2). When the position of one piece of touch position information 536L on the guide screen 2 is touched, the display screen 4 (third specific screen 16M3) is displayed.

In other words, a touch key (sensing unit) is formed in the area of touch position information 536R. Similarly, separate touch keys (sensing units) are formed in the areas of touch position information 536M and 536L.

When the user US touches the display position of the touch position information 536M on the guidance screen 16MA1, it changes to the display screen 2. This display screen 2 is the second specific screen 16M2, and is used for input operations and confirmation of input results when executing the composite cooking mode KM2.

In display screen 2 of FIG. 91, 34T is set temperature information indicating the target temperature ("80°C" in FIG. 90) to which the food to be cooked is heated in the "Warm" control menu. When it is detected that this set temperature has been reached, microwave heating is automatically stopped.

As is clear from FIG. 91, when any one of the three touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R is touched, a guide screen 1 (16MA1), a second specific screen 16M2, a third specific screen 16M3, etc. is displayed according to the touched position.
Therefore, since the user US can see the guide screen 1 (16MA) at the initial stage, confusion over input operations before cooking begins can be eliminated, resulting in a cooking device 1 that is highly easy to operate and convenient to use.

As is clear from the above description, when any one of the touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R where the touch keys are arranged is touched, the control device 40 determines that the linked cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, etc., has been selected in accordance with the touched position. In other words, the display positions of the touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R function as independent touch input keys in their display state.

Next, we will explain Figure 92.
92 show input operations, display operations, voice guidance, etc., subsequent to the standby initial screen 16MH. These operation steps are defined in the respective control programs of the control device 40, the right operation unit 15M, the left operation unit 15L, and the central operation unit 15M, but may be defined integrally in the control program of the control device 40 alone.

For the sake of convenience, the signal processing performed when touching the display sections of touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R will be described below assuming that the processing is performed primarily by the input processing section 70, input signal analysis section 52, and guidance screen analysis section 140 in the control device 40.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed first, and the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user by voice of the gist of the display information on the standby initial screen 16MH (step MT1).

A few seconds after step MT1, guide screen 1 (16MA1) is automatically displayed on central display unit 16M. In addition, in conjunction with the display of guide screen 1, audio notification unit 50 provides guidance to the user US to select one of the three pieces of touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R to select the cooking mode that the user US desires (step MT2). Note that guide screen 1 here refers to guide screen 1 (16MA1) described in FIG. 90.

In step MT2, when touch position information 536L is touched, the input signal analysis unit 52 and the guidance screen analysis unit 140 in the control device 40 detect that a touch operation has been performed at the guidance screen 16MA1 stage (step MT3). Then, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M (the display of guidance screen 1 disappears at the same time) (MT4). The content of this step is also notified by the audio notification unit 50.

When the input signal analysis unit 52 determines in step MT3 that a "long press" of the touch operation has been detected, this determination signal is input from the input signal analysis unit 52 to the input processing unit 70. This input triggers the input processing unit 70 to control the input signal analysis unit 52 so as to correspond to voice input mode 1 (step MT3A). Such processing is also performed in steps MT6A and MT9A, which will be described later.

Then, the user checks the information displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (including the cooking menu, which includes one piece of identification information 167), changes the control conditions and cooking menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 151M (which is a mechanical switch), which transitions to the cooking process of the linked cooking mode KM3 (MT5).

When acquiring recipe data CD from outside, after the display screen 1A (see FIG. 91) is displayed, the command content can be input by voice into the portable voice input/output device 1000, a request B can be issued to the first server 321 via the second server 322, and a command can be issued to send the recipe data CD from the first server 321 to the cooking appliance 1.

In FIG. 91, when the display portion of the touch position information 536L on the central display unit 16M is touched in a "long press" state (step MT3), the input processing unit 70 of the control device 40 starts a voice input mode program and controls the state of the voice signal analysis unit 52 to be in a standby state in preparation for input from the outside (first server 321) (step MT3A).

Also, when the display portions of touch position information 536M and 536R on central display unit 16M are touched in a "long press" state (steps MT6 and MT9), the input processing unit 70 starts a voice input mode program and changes to a standby state in preparation for input from outside (first server 321) (steps MT6A and MT9A).
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92, in the input process for all heating cooking modes, once a touch operation on the display screen 1A (guidance screen 1.16MA1) is detected and voice input mode 1 is activated, the control device 40 can receive and process voice input.

On the other hand, in step MT2, if the display portion of touch position information 536M, which is a touch key portion displayed in guidance screen 1 (16MA1), is touched (step MT6), second specific screen 16M2 is displayed in central display unit 16M (the display of guidance screen 1 disappears at the same time) (MT7). The content of this step is also notified by audio notification unit 50.

After this, the user US checks the information displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 (including a specific text 160 which is the name of one of the control menus of the composite cooking mode KM2), changes the control conditions and control menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 151M (which is a mechanical switch) to move to the cooking process of the composite cooking mode KM2 (MT8).

In addition, in step MT2, when the display portion of touch position information 536R where the touch keys are located and displayed in guidance screen 1 (16MA1) is touched (step MT9), guidance screen 2 (16MA2; see FIG. 90) is displayed in central display unit 16M (the display of guidance screen 1 disappears at the same time) (MT10). The content of this step is also notified by audio notification unit 50.

Then, the user checks the explanatory text 525, 526, 527 indicating the three touch areas displayed on the guide screen 2 (16MA2) and the display areas of the touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R which correspond one-to-one to these, and if the user wishes to use the left heating port 4L, he or she touches the display area of the touch position information 536L (MT11).

Then, the process proceeds to step MT12, where the left display unit (individual display unit) 16L dedicated to the left heating port 4L is activated, allowing the user to select cooking using the left IH coil 9L. This causes a control menu (e.g., "boil water," "keep warm," etc.) using the first heating means HM1 to be displayed. At the same time, information on the default control conditions (heat, target temperature, etc.) is also displayed. Furthermore, the content of this step MT12 is also announced by the audio notification unit 50.

In this step MT12, the display step of the third specific screen 30ST as shown in FIG. 91 is not illustrated, but it may be displayed in the central display section 16M.

After this, the user US checks the information (including the control menu) displayed on the left display unit 16L, changes the control conditions and control menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 153L (which is a mechanical switch) to move to the induction heating cooking process at the left heating port 4L (MT13).

In this embodiment 5, the input key 151L also serves as a start key for the single heating cooking mode KM1 using the left heating port 4L. After pressing this input key 151L, the size of the object to be heated N is detected, and then induction heating operation is automatically started.

Similarly, when the display portion of the touch position information 536R displayed on the guidance screen 2 (16MA2) is touched (MT17), the process proceeds to step MT18, where the right display section (individual display section) 16R dedicated to the right heating port 4R is activated, and a control menu that can be implemented by the right IH coil 9R (for example, "boil water", "keep warm", etc.) is displayed.

At the same time, information about the default control conditions (heat, target temperature, etc.) is also displayed on the right display unit 16R. Furthermore, the contents of this step MT18 are also notified by the audio notification unit 50. Note that in this step MT18, the display of the third specific screen 16M3 as shown in FIG. 91 is not shown, but it may be displayed on the central display unit 16M.

After this, the user US checks the information (including the control menu) displayed on the right display unit 16R, changes the control conditions and control menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 153R (which is a mechanical switch) to move to the induction heating cooking process at the right heating port 4R (MT19).

Furthermore, among the three touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R displayed on the guide screen 2 (16MA2), if the central heating port 4C is to be used, touch the touch position information 536M (MT14).

Then, the process proceeds to step MT15, and a control menu that can be executed by the central heating port 4C (e.g., "keep warm") is displayed on the central display section 16M used by the central heating port 4C (see FIG. 91). In other words, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.

In addition, explanatory text may be displayed, for example, indicating that the set temperature for "Keep Warm" is approximately 80°C and that this "Keep Warm" is a control menu suitable for soup. Furthermore, the content of this step MT15 is also notified by the audio notification unit 50.

After this, the user US checks the information (including the control menu and control conditions) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 displayed on the central display unit 16M, changes the control conditions and control menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 151M (which is a mechanical switch) to move to the induction heating cooking process in the central heating port 4C (MT16).

The recipe data CD can be acquired from the outside (the first server 321, the communication terminal 200, etc.) described in the first embodiment after the steps MT3, MT6, and MT9.
In other words, unless the user US touches any one of the three pieces of touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R, the control device 40 does not acquire the recipe data CD from the outside (the first server 321, the communication terminal device 200, etc.).

Next, we will explain Figure 93.
Fig. 93 shows an example in which the display information and input method of the second specific screen 16M2 shown in Fig. 90 have been changed. The user can easily change the control menu and control conditions by directly touching the first area 22 to the third area 24.

Figure 93 shows the situation immediately before starting cooking using the "RG manual" control menu in the composite cooking mode KM2. The light-emitting element 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is flashing as if it were a star, prompting the user to operate the device.

Further, FIG. 93 will be described.
In the central display section 30, a second specific screen 16M2 displayed during the combination cooking mode KM2 is larger in size than the central display section 16M of the first embodiment.
In addition, in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, a first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (see FIG. 94).

Generally, looking at the standard lineup of TFT LCD modules used in this type of display, sizes such as 3.5 inches, 3.97 inches, 4.3 inches, 4.6 inches, and 5.0 inches are offered. If the one in embodiment 1 is, for example, 3.5 inches or 3.97 inches in size, in embodiment 5, a screen size one or two sizes larger can be used. However, as shown by the arrows in the front-to-back direction in Figure 94, the temperature of the top plate 3 tends to increase the closer it is to the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and central heating port 4C. Therefore, the central display unit 16M is positioned further forward, FR, than in embodiment 1.

In this embodiment 5, the various input keys 154M to 159 described in embodiment 1 can be omitted, allowing the central display section 16M to have a larger display area. Therefore, as shown in Figs. 93 and 94, more information such as heat (heating intensity), target preheating temperature, heating time, and other control conditions can be displayed in the second area 23 and the third area 24.

In Figures 93 and 94, 343 is a menu display section that is displayed as needed in the fourth area 28 located directly above the electrode 341. This menu display section 343 displays the cooking menu (or identification information 167) of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and the name and type of the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2.

In FIG. 93, 29A and 29B are display areas for "control conditions" such as target temperature and heating time. 29C and 29D are candidate display areas that can display the next candidate for "control conditions" such as target temperature and heating time.

As shown in FIG. 93, the display unit 29B displays information on heating time as one of the control conditions. Two selectable candidate heating time information is also displayed simultaneously in the two candidate display units 29D. Note that while FIG. 93 omits the specific candidate times, FIG. 94 displays "180°C" as an example of a candidate temperature and "10 minutes" as an example of a time.

Next, we will explain Figure 94.
FIG. 94 shows the case where the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed.
In Fig. 94, the menu display section 343 is used. If the cooperative cooking menu is not implemented, the display automatically changes to "Menu" as shown in Fig. 94.

As shown in FIG. 94, when the target temperature information 18T displayed in the second area 23 is "180°C", one candidate display section 29C displays target temperature information 18T1 of "185°C". In addition, the other candidate display section 29C displays target temperature information 18T2 of "175°C".

In addition, in the third area 24, if the displayed heating time information 18M is "10 minutes," the two candidate display sections 29D will display heating time information 18M1 (when grilling) of "10 minutes 30 seconds" and heating time information 18M2 of "9 minutes 30 seconds," respectively.

As shown in FIG. 94, the user US can change one of the displayed control menus (e.g., "Oven") of the composite cooking mode KM2 to the next candidate control menu (e.g., "Grill" or "Warm") by moving the fingertip FG forward FR or backward BK while keeping the fingertip FG touching the first area 22 to the third area 24.

Next, we will explain Figure 95.
95 shows a state in which the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. In order to display this first specific screen 16M1, it is necessary to touch the display position of the touch position information 536L described in the guide screen 16MA1 of FIG.

343A is display information of the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 displayed in text on the menu display unit 341. If the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not implemented, the display will automatically show "Menu" as shown in FIG. 94.

In Figures 93 to 95, 21M is a light-emitting element that constitutes part of the light-emitting display unit 27 (see Figures 16 and 58). In the first embodiment, the light-emitting element 21M corresponding to the start selection unit (input key 151M) was also used as the heating stop input key 152M, but in this fifth embodiment, the two input keys 151M and 152M each have their own dedicated light-emitting element 21M.

Before the heating operation starts, this light-emitting unit 21M will light up continuously as normal, and after the heating operation starts, the light can be changed to flashing. Note that the light-emitting unit 21M corresponding to the input key 152M does not light up before the heating operation starts, because there is no need to input a stop command. Once the heating operation starts, the light is emitted in a form such as continuous light or flashing as described above, so that the user can easily confirm it visually.

In FIG. 95, 190 denotes an icon (displaying support information) that is displayed in a speech bubble-like form across the second area 23 and third area 24 of the central display section 16M. The "icon" here refers to a figure that is displayed on the display screen, and touching that part issues a command signal to the control device 40 to display support information. In other words, it is the same as a touch-type input key.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the user US touches the icon 190 with his/her fingertip FG, the cooking process in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 at the time of the touch, cooking instructions and precautions according to the food to be cooked, etc. are displayed in the second area 23 and the third area 24 of the first specific screen 16M1 as text and figures. The cooking instructions and precautions may be notified by voice using the audio notification unit 50. Also, the cooking instructions and precautions may be displayed in the second area 23 and the third area 24 as shown in FIG. 95.

In FIG. 95, the user US touches the first area 23 of the first specific screen 16M1 with the fingertip FG and moves it forward FR or backward BK to select one cooking menu. In other words, the identification information 167, such as "hamburger steak," can be changed to another identification information. In this way, in this embodiment 5, the selection of a cooking menu can be performed while keeping the user's finger in contact with the first specific screen 16M1.

In FIG. 95, 343A is the display information of the coordinated cooking menu indicating that it is a cooking menu for coordinated cooking mode KM3, as described above. If the coordinated cooking menu is not implemented, the display changes to that shown in FIG. 94 (three sections: menu, temperature, and time).

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, we will explain the touch panel input device 350 and the touch gesture determination device 353.

The first area 22 to the third area 24 constituting the operation panel 351 are touch gesture input means that accept touch gesture operations performed by the user. Furthermore, a touch gesture operation is an information input operation using a specific movement of the user's fingertip FG or the like.

Touch gesture operations can include tapping, which is an operation of lightly tapping the surface of the operation panel 351 with a fingertip, flicking, which is an operation of flicking the surface of the operation panel 351 with a finger, and swiping, which is an operation of tracing the surface of the operation panel 351 with a finger (sliding a finger). However, in this embodiment 5, only two touch gesture operations are determined to be valid: a touch gesture operation in which the user's fingertip FG is moved forward and backward, and a touch gesture operation in which the user's fingertip FG is moved left and right. This will be described in more detail later.

Touch gesture operations include dragging the fingertips FG, pinching in by pinching multiple fingertips together on the surface of the operation panel 351 and narrowing the distance between the fingertips, and pinching out by widening the distance between multiple fingers on the surface of the operation panel 351. These are also identified by the operation determination unit 354 as invalid touch gesture operations.

The operation panel 351 accepts a specific touch gesture operation performed by the user and outputs input operation information (hereinafter referred to as "touch information") IP1 corresponding to the touch gesture operation.

A display screen A (not shown) is disposed directly below the operation panel unit 351. The display screen A is disposed so as to overlap the operation panel unit 351.
Furthermore, the display screen A (not shown) displays operation images showing various information (including control conditions such as temperature and heat) related to each of the three menus, namely, the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2, the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1. Operation images related to the guide screen 16MA are also displayed.

In this way, display screen A (not shown) is configured, for example, with a liquid crystal display. Here, display screen A has the functions of guidance screen 16MA, first specific screen 16M1, second specific screen 16M2, and third specific screen 16M1.

As shown in FIG. 96, the touch gesture determination device 353 has an operation determination unit 354 and a notification unit 359.

The operation information input unit 352 receives touch information IP1 output from the operation panel unit 351. The operation information input unit 352 outputs input information IP2 corresponding to the received touch information IP1 to the operation determination unit 354. The input information IP2 is information corresponding to the touch information IP1, and may be the same information as the touch information IP1.

The operation determination unit 354 receives touch information IP1 from the operation information input unit 352, and outputs a selection value signal IP3 as output information to the notification unit 359. The selection value signal IP3 is a selection value signal determined by the operation determination unit 354 based on the touch information IP1. In this embodiment 5, the selection value signal is information that determines the control menu and cooking menu.

The operation determination unit 354 determines the type and content of the touch gesture operation by the user from the received touch information IP1.
Operation determination unit 354 has a gesture mode discrimination unit 355 , a gesture input information determination unit 356 , and a gesture area determination unit 357 .

The reference parameter storage unit 358 stores at least slider mode parameters of the user's gestures. One example of the parameters is a parameter that is determined based on one or a combination of two or more of the amount of movement of the touch gesture operation in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, and the touch time.

The gesture mode discrimination unit 355 identifies the gesture mode of the input information IP2 by referring to various parameters in the reference parameter storage unit 358. The gesture input information determination unit 356 determines the selection value signal IP3 according to the value setting method in the gesture mode identified by the gesture mode discrimination unit 355.

The gesture area determination unit 356 identifies in which of the first area 22 to the third area 24 the user performed a touch gesture operation.

The notification unit 359 receives a selection value signal IP3 from the operation determination unit 354 for each of the first area 22 to the third area 24. Therefore, the notification unit 359 switches the display information for each of the first area 22 to the third area 24, and also outputs to the audio notification unit 50 to notify the user of such switching.

The display unit drive circuit 63 receives a selection value signal IP4 from the touch gesture determination device 353. This selection value signal IP4 has the same content as the selection value signal IP3.

The display unit drive circuit 63 switches the display content of the central display unit 16M according to the determination result of the touch gesture determination device 353. That is, as shown in FIG. 96, the display unit drive circuit 63 outputs an image signal IP5 of an operation image to be displayed on the central display unit 16M to the central display unit 16M.

In FIG. 96, the touch panel input device 350 and the touch gesture determination device 353 are illustrated in the form of a hardware (H/W) configuration. However, the touch gesture determination device 353 shown in FIG. 96 may be functionally realized by a program of a processing device such as a microcomputer that controls the central operation unit 15M and the right operation unit 15R, for example.

For example, a storage unit for storing the touch gesture determination program may be provided in the software storage device of the control device (CPU 15E; see FIG. 17) of the central operation unit 15M, and the touch gesture determination program stored in the storage unit may be executed by the CPU 15E of the central operation unit 15M. Note that the program may be centralized (integrated) in the control device 40, rather than being executed by the central operation unit 15M or the right input operation unit 15R.

In FIG. 96, 362 is a reference information storage unit. This reference information storage unit 362 stores the reference information 164 and additional information 166 described in embodiment 1.

Since the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 5 is configured as described above, when cooking is started, the main power switch 20 is first turned ON. When the control device 40 is started, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before the heating operation starts, and confirms that no abnormalities have occurred. It also starts up the central display unit 16M and displays initial information (displays the initial standby screen 16MH).

Here, referring again to FIG. 94, the operation by the user to perform cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 will be described.
Fig. 94 shows a scene where the user selects "Oven" from the control menu. In Fig. 94, three fingertips FG of the user are drawn at the same time, but this does not show that touch gesture operations are being performed simultaneously with three fingertips FG. It shows that touch gesture operations are being performed three times from the first area 23 on the left to the right in sequence.

When a user performs a touch gesture operation (hereinafter abbreviated as "touch operation") on the first area 22, the operation determination unit 354 of the touch gesture determination device 353 receives input information IP2 corresponding to touch information IP1 from the first area 22 that constitutes part of the operation panel unit 351.

When the control menu "Oven" is displayed in the first area 22, if the user moves the fingertip FG forward FR or backward BK (within a certain speed range) while keeping the fingertip FG in contact with the first area 22, the gesture mode discrimination unit 355 recognizes this as a regular (specific) touch gesture operation, and generates touch information.

If the touch information indicates that an operation has been performed in the forward direction (FR), the operation determination unit 354 changes the display in the first area 22 via the display drive circuit 63. Then, the next option, "grill" or "warm," can be displayed in the first area 22.

Similarly, the target temperature can be selected in the second area 23. In FIG. 94, the default value is "180°C", but this can be changed to the target temperature information 18T1 of "185°C" displayed in the candidate display section 29C. In addition, by touching the rear BK, the target temperature information 18T2 of "175°C" can be displayed in the center.

Similarly, in the third area 24, if a touch gesture operation is recognized by the gesture mode discrimination unit 314, touch information is generated each time, and the display information in the third area 24 can be changed.

In this embodiment 5, the touch gesture operation recognized by the gesture mode discrimination unit 355 is set so that the direction of movement after touching is either forward FR or backward BK, so the display cannot be switched using touch gesture operations such as "pinch in" or "pinch out" as described above.

The reference parameter storage unit 358, which will be described later, stores parameters limited to the slider mode among the user gestures. Therefore, if the slider mode cannot be determined, the display cannot be switched. For example, the touch gesture operations of "pinch in" and "pinch out" described above will result in a result that does not match the parameters based on a combination of the amount of movement in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, or the touch duration, etc.

Incidentally, in FIG. 91, when the display portion of touch position information 536L on guidance screen 1 (16MA1) is touched (step MT3), the control device 40 at that point starts a program for voice input mode and goes into a standby state for input from the outside (first server 321).

Also, when the display areas of touch position information 536M and 536R on central display unit 16M are touched in a "long press" state (step MT3), the control device 40 starts a voice input mode program at that point and goes into a standby state for input from the outside (first server 321).

A situation in which control conditions are set by voice input will now be described.
For example, as shown in FIG. 93, when "RG Manual" is displayed in the control menu and the user US speaks to the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000, "Microwave 10 minutes, grill 5 minutes," the content of the voice is converted into text data by the voice input/output device 1000 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data of the spoken information (voice input signal VS).

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the memory unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts the text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands (command data) that are prepared as standard commands. The "commands" here include instructions to extract recipe data CD for performing one cooking step from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301.

The first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet, so that a query signal (query data) SN is transmitted from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This query signal SN is, for example, a command requesting that the recipe data CD be extracted from the recipe data providing server 301.

The first server 321 is configured so that each individual cooking appliance 1 is preregistered, and a request B (see FIG. 88) for the cooking appliance 1 sent from the second server 322 can identify the user US to which the request should be addressed.

The control unit 321C of the first server 321 decodes the inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits it to the second server 322.
In addition, the operating status data OS transmitted from a large number of heating cookers 1 and the user US ID (identification information) that identifies the user US of each heating cooker 1 are analyzed, and the heating cooker 1 of each user US is identified from the information in the user US identification database held in the memory unit 321R.

Furthermore, the first server 321 also has a function of transmitting recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu obtained from the recipe data providing server 301 to a specific cooking appliance 1. In other words, in accordance with request B issued from the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000 via the second server 322, the first server 321 can provide setting information that changes the control conditions of the specific recipe data CD to the target cooking appliance 1.

Next, we will explain Figure 97.
FIG. 97 shows a modified example of the fifth embodiment described in FIGS. 90 to 96, and is a plan view illustrating the arrangement of the central operating section 40M and various display sections, and also illustrates input operations.

At least the slider mode parameters of the user's gestures are stored in the reference parameter storage unit 358 in the modified example shown in FIG. 97. The slider mode is specified in two directions: forward and backward, and a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward direction (rightward direction RT and a range of ±30 degrees from this rightward direction). In other words, the slider mode is detected within an angle range of 60 degrees. One example of the parameter is a parameter determined based on one or a combination of two or more of the amount of movement of the touch gesture operation in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, or the touch time.

When the name of the control menu for the composite cooking mode KM2, "RG Manual" shown in FIG. 97, is touched and held for a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) or more, it is assumed that the menu (RG Manual) has been selected, and the input operation unit 15 automatically switches to the voice input mode only at this point so that the control information for the menu (RG Manual) can be input by voice.

In the configuration described in FIG. 91, when one of the display positions of touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R on guide screen 1 (16MA1) is touched and held down, it is considered that the touch input key is actually turned on, and the mode switches to "voice input mode 1." However, this "voice input mode 1" is only applied in one cooking mode and only before cooking of that one cooking menu starts.

Even in the modified example of FIG. 97, when the name of the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2, "RG Manual," is touched and a long press is detected and the voice input mode is switched to, the voice input mode is applied only to this "RG Manual" and to the single control menu of this composite cooking mode KM2, "RG Manual." When the heating and cooking operation starts, the voice input mode is automatically released.

In this fifth embodiment, the voice input mode period is limited to only before cooking starts. This is because when cooking starts, the heated object N and the food to be cooked become hot, and the top plate 3 and heating chamber 6 also become hot, so this is to prevent the user from encountering an unintended situation due to inadvertent voice input. In other words, once cooking starts, the operation is controlled by touch and pressing operations of the user US, rather than by voice control.

In other words, the "voice input mode 1" is not applied uniformly (simultaneously) to all cooking modes. In the example of Fig. 91, when the touch position information 536L is touched, only the cooperative cooking mode KM3 proceeds to the input process by the "voice input mode 1".
In other words, the control device 40 is prepared for a situation in which a command for one cooking menu or control menu is received from the outside (first server 321) based on a command input by voice from the user US.

In the variant example 1 shown in FIG. 97, the voice input mode is entered when basic conditions such as specific cooking modes, control menus, heating means, etc. have been finalized, so the voice input mode is entered at a stage where specific control conditions are determined at a lower level than in the example shown in FIG. 91.
This increases the likelihood that the command will be limited to an appropriate range that can be accepted by the control device 40. This is expected to reduce the time required to finalize recipe data, and as a result, the effect of reducing the time required for cooking is increased.

Furthermore, the voice synthesizer 95 may provide voice guidance to assist the user in performing operations. To make such a change, it is necessary to expand or change the gesture determination data of the gesture mode discrimination unit 355 (see FIG. 96) and the parameter information of the reference parameter storage unit 358.

Next, we will explain Figure 98.
98 shows a case where the fingertip FG is moved to the right while touching the first area 30L, and when the fingertip FG is moved to the right in this manner, the gesture mode discrimination unit 355 determines that the display content should be restored to the previous one. Therefore, the reference information 164 shown in FIG. 97 is erased.

The gesture mode discrimination unit 355 and the reference parameter storage unit 358 do not detect touch gestures of the user only in the strict left-right direction and the forward-backward direction perpendicular to this, but are configured to detect the trajectory of the fingertip FG with a certain detection width (a range of 60 degrees as described above). Therefore, even if the fingertip is moved slightly diagonally, the gesture mode discrimination unit 314 can determine that this is a command to cancel the reference information 164. Note that instead of erasing the reference information 164 with a touch gesture to the right in this way, the method may be changed as appropriate, such as automatically erasing it after a certain period of time from the display, or immediately erasing the reference information 164 when the reference information 164 is touched.

Summary of embodiment 5.
As described above, in this fifth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the sixth disclosure is as follows:
Heating means (first to third heating means HM1 to HM3) for heating the object to be heated N;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving instructions from a user;
A communication unit 21 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A control device 40,
The display unit 16 and the input operation unit 15 constitute a touch panel input device 350,
The touch panel input device 350 displays the guide screen 16MA.
On the guide screen 16MA, touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes is displayed at the touch key positions,
When the touch position information 536L, 536M, or 536R is touched, the screen is switched to a first specific screen 16M1 displaying the identification information 167 of the cooking menu or a second specific screen 16M2 displaying the identification information 160 of the control menu,
The touch panel input device 350 includes a touch gesture determination device 353 that determines the form of the touch operation in a state of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2,
This configuration is characterized in that switching to a voice input mode is performed based on the determination result of the touch gesture determination device 353.

Because of this configuration, the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, and 536R can be used to select a cooking mode, etc., to switch to a voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be completed by voice input. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the display unit 16, and the guide screen 16MA1 is displayed next to the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 91 in particular).
This guidance screen 16MA1 displays reference information 1 (standby common information 60N) common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and the guidance screen 16MA1 is configured to display at least one of the contents of the multiple heating cooking modes KM1 to KM3 or reference information 2 (explanations 525 to 527) for selecting the heating cooking mode.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, 536R, the user US can be presented with useful information and guided to the correct input operation. This improves the operability of the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, after the cooking mode or the control menu is selected using the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, and 536R, the acquisition of recipe data CD from outside is permitted.

With this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 5, as explained in Figs. 91 and 92, the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is temporarily and automatically displayed. This allows the user US to easily select from a number of cooking modes KM1 to KM3 and operate the input operation unit 15 to select the cooking mode.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as particularly described in FIG. 95, the first specific screen 16M1 has a first area 22 that displays the identification information 167 of the cooking menu, and a second area 23 that displays the control conditions, and the identification information 167 is selected and displayed in the first area 22 by a touch operation by the user, and the second area is configured to display an icon 190 that displays support information regarding the input operation of the user US when a touch operation is performed.

Therefore, when selecting the cooking menu identification information 167 and operating the cooking menu, the user can view the support information by simply moving the fingertip FG slightly, and can be guided through the operation when the user is unsure of how to input the information.

Furthermore, in the modified examples of Figures 97 and 98, instead of switching to the voice input mode by selecting a heating cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, 536R, the voice input mode is switched to during the process of selecting a cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3 (e.g., "hamburger steak") or a control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "RG manual", "warm"), and the necessary control conditions can be input by voice from that stage.

As a result, when entering specific control conditions, the user can easily switch to voice input mode and continue entering data, further reducing the burden on the user US during input operations.

In this fifth embodiment, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source using the IH coil 9, but it may be a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating the pan.
Also, a fourth heating means HM4 may be further provided. For example, a steam generator (boiler) may be added as the fourth heating means HM4 to supply high-temperature steam to the inside of the heating chamber 6.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 5, it was possible to input voice via the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000, but even if this voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000 is not present, as described particularly in FIG. 89, the cooking appliance 1 is equipped with a voice signal receiving unit 56 and a voice signal analyzing unit 58, so that the user US can directly input voice to the cooking appliance 1.

In addition, a function setting mode can be selected by using the function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 90). In this function setting mode, the receiving function of the voice signal receiving unit 56 in the voice input mode can be disabled, or the function of the voice signal analyzing unit 58 can be disabled, so that the cooking appliance 1 itself does not accept voice input, but only accepts commands via the outside (such as the first server 321). By setting it in this way, when the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000 is used, it is possible to prevent the cooking appliance 1 from accepting and responding to speech (voice) directed to the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000.

Embodiment 6.
Fig. 99 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the central display unit of a cooking device according to embodiment 6. Fig. 100 is an operation explanatory diagram 2 of the central display unit and central operation unit of the cooking device shown in Fig. 99. Fig. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing the input operation steps and display steps of the cooking device shown in Fig. 99. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of each embodiment explained in Figs. 1 to 98 are given the same reference numerals.

The sixth embodiment is an improvement over the fifth embodiment, particularly with respect to the touch panel input device 350 and the touch gesture determination device 353 .
Referring to Figure 99 .
Guide screen 1 (16MA1) displays only two pieces of touch position information 536L and 536R. This is a difference from the fifth embodiment.

When the user US touches a position on the guidance screen 1 (16MA1) where one piece of touch position information 536L is displayed, a voice message stating "Composite cooking mode accepted" is played. Then, one to two seconds later, the second specific screen 16M2 for the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed as shown on the display screen 2.

However, if the position where the same touch position information 536L is displayed is touched twice in succession (for example, within one second), a voice message stating "Linked cooking mode accepted" is then played. In this case, the first specific screen 16M1 (not shown in FIG. 99) is displayed.

To cancel the state of display screen 2 shown in FIG. 99, move fingertip FG to the left while still touching identification information 160 for "warm." When fingertip FG moves to the left in this manner, gesture mode discrimination unit 355 determines that the display content should be restored to the previous one. Therefore, the display returns to the guidance screen 1A (16MA1) stage shown in FIG. 99. Note that when fingertip FG is moved to the left in this manner, gesture mode discrimination unit 355 determines that the display content should be restored to the previous one, which differs from embodiment 5.

Furthermore, when the user US touches a position on the guidance screen 1 (16MA1) where one piece of touch position information 536R is displayed, a voice message stating "Induction heating cooking accepted" is played. Then, one to two seconds later, the guidance screen 2 (16MA2) (shown as "Display screen 4" in FIG. 99) is displayed.

When the user US touches the position on the guidance screen 16MA2 in FIG. 99 where the touch position information 536L is displayed, a voice message stating "Left IH accepted" is played. Then, one to two seconds later, the third specific screen 16M3 for the single cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the central display section 16M as shown on the display screen 4.

In this embodiment 6, when touch position information 536R on guide screen 1 (16MA1) is touched, regardless of whether it is in a "long press" state, all modes are switched to voice input mode. This is one of the features of this embodiment 6.

The configuration shown in Figure 99 is the same as in embodiment 5 except as described above, so duplicate explanations will be omitted.

As is clear from FIG. 99, when one of the two touch position information 536L, 536R is touched, the guide screen 1 (16MA1), the second specific screen 16M2, the third specific screen 16M3, etc. is displayed according to the touched position.
Therefore, since the user US can see the guide screen 1 (16MA) at the initial stage, confusion over input operations before cooking begins can be eliminated, resulting in a cooking device 1 that is highly easy to operate and convenient to use.

Next, we will explain Figure 100.
In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, when selecting the heating cooking mode of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 or the control menu (of the composite cooking mode KM2), if the fingertip FG is kept touching the first area 22 and moved to the right, the screen will move to the next hierarchical input screen (of the control menu and cooking menu).

That is, the display prompting the user to input control conditions and the voice input mode display information 179D indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode are displayed simultaneously.

In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the fingertip FG is moved to the right while touching the first area 30L with the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2, the touch gesture determination device 353 (see FIG. 96) inputs the determination result of the touch state to the input processing unit 70. As a result, the input processing unit 70 determines that a command to switch to the voice input mode has been issued.

In FIG. 100, the display area formed by combining the second area 23 and the third area 24 displays operation support information 170 that prompts the user US to set the control conditions (in this case, the preheating temperature and heating time).

In the case of the collaborative cooking mode KM3, when the identification information 167 is displayed at a predetermined position B in the first area 22 as shown in FIG. 100, even if the fingertip FG is kept touching directly above the identification information 167 (a long press state; in this case, for 5 seconds or more), it is not possible to switch to the voice input mode. This is the same in the composite cooking mode KM2. This point is also fundamentally different from the configuration of the fifth embodiment.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 6, when the identification information 167 is displayed at a predetermined position B in the first area 22, even if the fingertip FG is touched twice in succession directly above the identification information 167, the display of the identification information 167 does not change. In other words, when a cooking menu or a control menu (for the composite cooking mode KM2) is displayed in the first area 22, a short press in the first area 22 is not detected by the touch gesture determination device 353.

Next, we will explain Figure 101.
The operation steps MT21 to MT44 shown in Fig. 101 indicate input operations, display operations, voice guidance, etc., subsequent to the standby initial screen 16MH. These operation steps are defined in the respective control programs of the control device 40, the right operation unit 15M, the left operation unit 15L, and the central operation unit 15M, but may be defined integrally in the control program of the control device 40 alone.

For the sake of convenience, the touch position information 536L and 536R described in FIG. 91 will be explained below assuming that the reception of the touch operation on the display unit is mainly processed by the input processing unit 70, input signal analysis unit 52, and guidance screen analysis unit 140 in the control device 40.

As shown in FIG. 101, when the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed first, and the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user by voice of the gist of the display information on the standby initial screen 16MH (step MT21).

A few seconds after step MT21, guide screen 1 (16MA1) is automatically displayed on central display unit 16M. In addition, in conjunction with the display of guide screen 1, audio notification unit 50 provides guidance to the user US to select one of the two pieces of touch position information 536L, 536R in order to select the cooking mode that the user US desires (step MT22). Note that guide screen 1 here refers to guide screen 1 (16MA1) described in FIG. 99.

When touch position information 536L is touched (step MT23), the input signal analysis unit 52 and the guidance screen analysis unit 140 in the control device 40 detect that a touch operation has been performed at the guidance screen 16MA1 stage. Then, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M (the display of guidance screen 1 disappears at the same time). The content of this step is also notified by the audio notification unit 50. (step MT24).

In the next step MT25, when a touch operation is performed in which the fingertip FG is slid from the first area 22 to the adjacent second area (to the right) within a certain period of time while still touching, the touch gesture determination device 353 determines this touch operation and inputs the determination result to the input processing unit 70. Then, triggered by the input from the touch gesture determination device 353, the input processing unit 70 controls the input signal analysis unit 52 to correspond to voice input mode 1 (step MT26). This type of processing is also performed in step MT31, which will be described later. Note that step MT25A shows a process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal device 200, cloud server 300, etc.

Then, the user checks the information displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (including the cooking menu, which includes one piece of identification information 167), changes the control conditions and cooking menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 151M (which is a mechanical switch), which transitions to the cooking process of the linked cooking mode KM3 (MT27).

In step MT26, the input processing unit 70 can start a program for the voice input mode and control the state of the voice signal analysis unit 52 to be in a standby state in preparation for input (such as input of corrections to control conditions related to the recipe data CD) from the outside (such as the first server 321 or the communication terminal device 200).

On the other hand, if the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected by touching the touch position information 536L in step MT23, the process proceeds to step MT29. In other words, the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is changed to the second specific screen 16M2, and the content of this step is also notified by the audio notification unit 50.

After this, similar to step MT25, the user US checks the information displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 (including specific text 160, which is the name of one of the control menus of the composite cooking mode KM2), and performs a touch operation by touching and sliding (sliding) the fingertip FG within a certain period of time (step MT30) to input control conditions and control menus, and can switch to voice input mode (step MT31). There, the control conditions and control menus can be input by voice and changed as appropriate. Note that step MT30A shows the process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal device 200, cloud server 300, etc.

After that, by pressing the input key 151M, which is a mechanical switch, the process moves to the cooking step of the combined cooking mode KM2 (MT32).

In step MT22, when the display portion of touch position information 536R where the touch keys are located, which is displayed in guidance screen 1 (16MA1), is touched (step MT33), guidance screen 2 (16MA2; see FIG. 99) is displayed in central display unit 16M (at the same time, the display of guidance screen 1 disappears) (step MT35). The content of this step is also notified by audio notification unit 50.

Incidentally, when touching the display portion of touch position information 536R is detected in step MT33, regardless of whether the touch is a "long press" or a "short press," the control device 40 switches to touch input mode (step MT34).

Therefore, at the time when the guide screen 2 (16MA2) shown in FIG. 99 is displayed (step MT35), the mode has already switched to voice input mode, so the user US can look at the explanations 525, 526, and 527 as shown in FIG. 99 and select one of them by voice. For example, a phrase (word) specifying the heating port, such as "right heating," is input by voice (steps MT36, MT39, MT42). Note that step MT36A shows the process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal device 200, cloud server 300, etc.

When the guide screen 2 (16MA2) shown in FIG. 99 is displayed (step MT35), if a touch operation is performed on either the touch position information 536R or 536L, this operation will select the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L.
Therefore, a third specific screen 16M3 like display screen 4 in Figure 99 is displayed on the display sections (right display section 16L, left display section 16L) that correspond one-to-one to the left and right heating ports (steps MT37, MT43).

On the other hand, when the guide screen 2 (16MA2) shown in FIG. 99 is displayed (step MT35), if the touch position information 536M is touched, the central heating port 4C is selected by this operation.
Therefore, a third specific screen 16M3 like display screen 4 in FIG. 99 is displayed on the display section (central display section 16M) corresponding to this central heating port 4C (step MT40).

After this, for example, the user US checks the information (including the control menu) displayed on the left display unit 16L, changes the control conditions and control menu as appropriate by voice input, and presses the input key 153L (which is a mechanical switch), which moves to the induction heating cooking process for the left heating port 4L (step MT38). Similarly, the central heating port 4C and right heating port 4R can also move to the heating cooking process as in steps MT41 and MT44.

Summary of embodiment 6.
As described above, in this fifth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the sixth disclosure is as follows:
Heating means (first to third heating means HM1 to HM3) for heating the object to be heated N;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving instructions from a user;
A communication unit 21 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A control device 40,
The display unit 16 and the input operation unit 15 constitute a touch panel input device 350,
The touch panel input device 350 displays the guide screen 16MA.
On the guide screen 16MA, touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes is displayed at the touch key positions,
By touching the touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R, the screen is switched to a first specific screen 16M1 or a second specific screen 16M2 for selecting one cooking mode,
The touch panel input device 350 includes a touch gesture determination device 353 for determining a form of touch operation on a display portion of a cooking menu (identification information 167) or a control menu (identification information 160) in a state of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2,
This configuration is characterized in that switching to a voice input mode is performed based on the determination result of the touch gesture determination device 353.

Because of this configuration, as explained in FIG. 100, after selecting a cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, 536R, the display portion of the cooking menu (identification information 167) or control menu (identification information 160) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 can be touched (slid rightward) to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the display unit 16, and the guide screen 16MA1 is displayed next to the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 99 in particular).
This guidance screen 16MA1 displays reference information 1 (standby common information 60N) common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and the guidance screen 16MA1 is configured to display at least one of reference information 2 (explanations 525, 527) for selecting the content of the multiple heating cooking modes KM1 to KM3.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, 536R, the user US can be presented with useful information and guided to the correct input operation. This improves the operability of the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, after switching to the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2, the acquisition of recipe data CD from outside is permitted (steps MT25A and MT30A in FIG. 101).

With this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 6, as explained in FIG. 99, the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is temporarily and automatically displayed. Therefore, the user US can easily select from among multiple cooking modes KM1 and KM2 and operate the input operation unit 15 to select the cooking mode.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as particularly described in FIG. 100, the display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24 was configured to display operational support information 170 that requests the user US to set the control conditions (for example, in FIG. 100, the preheating temperature and heating time).

Therefore, when proceeding with the input process, the operation support information 170 can inform the user of the information that needs to be input.
Also, as explained in FIG. 100, after the identification information 167 or 160 is displayed, auxiliary information 179 for voice input mode 1 is displayed in the larger display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24.

The auxiliary information 179 is voice input mode display information 179A that displays in text that the voice input mode is selected and voice input is being accepted.
As a result, the user US can know that the voice input mode is active at the stage of inputting specific control conditions, and can avoid being confused or hesitant about whether or not voice input is possible when inputting control conditions.

In this sixth embodiment, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source using the IH coil 9, but it may be a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating the pan.
Also, a fourth heating means HM4 may be further provided. For example, a steam generator (boiler) may be added as the fourth heating means HM4 to supply high-temperature steam (superheated steam) to the inside of the heating chamber 6. This is particularly convenient when thawing frozen foods in the heating chamber 6.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 6, as explained in Figs. 99 and 100, the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 can be selected in response to touch operations on one display screen (central display section 16M), and switching to the voice input mode is also possible, so there is no need to increase the physical number or area of keys for input operations. This makes it possible to ensure the size and spacing of the touch operation surface, and to avoid impairing operability.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 6, as in the embodiment 5, it was possible to input voice via the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000, but even if this voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000 is not present, the cooking appliance 1 is equipped with a voice signal receiving unit 56 and a voice signal analyzing unit 58, so that the user US can directly input voice to the cooking appliance 1.

As described in the fifth embodiment, the function setting mode can be selected by the function setting key 151KP. In this function setting mode, the receiving function of the voice signal receiving unit 56 in the voice input mode can be disabled, or the function of the voice signal analyzing unit 58 can be disabled, so that the cooking appliance 1 itself does not accept voice input, but only accepts commands via the outside (first server 321, etc.). By setting it in this way, when the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000 is used, it is possible to prevent the cooking appliance 1 from accepting and responding to speech (voice) directed to the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000.

Embodiment 7.
Fig. 102 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to embodiment 7. Fig. 103 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device shown in Fig. 102. Fig. 104 shows the main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 and the operation steps on the external information processing network (first server 321, audio input/output device 1000, etc.) side. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of the respective embodiments described in Figs. 1 to 101 are given the same reference numerals.

The seventh embodiment is significantly different from the first to sixth embodiments in that a steam generator (boiler) 550 is added as a fourth heating means HM4.
The configuration of the first server 321 is also significantly different.
One of the features of this embodiment 7 is that, instead of the communication terminal device 200 shown in embodiment 2, a small portable voice input/output device 1000 as described in embodiments 5 and 6 is used.

First, we will explain Figure 102.
The first server 321 connected to the cooking appliance 1 via the network NW (205) has an inventory information storage unit 1324 and a foodstuff consumption determination unit 1325.
The inventory information storage unit 1324 stores the "inventory data" SD1 transmitted from the refrigerator 403 via the network NW (205), and updates the inventory information as required in response to a command from the control unit 321C of the first server 321.

The first server 321 stores various remote operation data for the cooking appliance 1 in a memory unit 321R, similar to the first server 321 described in the fifth embodiment.
In response to a request B from the second server 322 (for example, provision of support information for inputting control conditions by voice), the control unit 322 transmits necessary operation support data GS1 to the second server 322 as required.

Therefore, the second server 322 transmits operation support data GS2, which corresponds to the operation support data GS1 and can be converted into voice data, to the voice input/output unit 1000. The user US who gives commands by voice can confirm the results of his/her own input from the voice emitted from the voice input/output unit 1000, and can receive appropriate guidance for the next input. In other words, input can be made by voice in an interactive format, and detailed conditions can be given for successively deeper layers in the control structure.

As described in embodiment 1 (particularly FIG. 7), the inventory information storage unit 1324 may receive a signal from an information processing device 411 (not shown) called a home gateway or the like in a living space such as the kitchen 601, and may check the inventory status at any time and update the inventory data SD1.

The ingredient consumption determining unit 1325 obtains ingredient information (inventory data SD1) from the inventory information storage unit 1324, and estimates the amount of ingredient consumed from the change in the inventory amount.
This ingredient consumption determining unit 1325 and the stock information storage unit 1324 have the same basic functions as the ingredient consumption determining unit 325 and the stock information storage unit 324 shown in the fifth embodiment, so a duplicated description will be omitted.

Reference numeral 1301 denotes a recipe data providing unit, which has basically the same functions as the recipe data providing server 301 described in the fifth embodiment. In response to a command from the control unit 321C of the first server 321, the recipe data providing unit 1301 provides recipe data CD that can be executed by the cooking appliance 1.
The audio input/output unit 1000, which is one of the features of the seventh embodiment, is basically the same as the audio input/output unit 1000 described in the fifth embodiment.

Next, we will explain Figure 103.
The steam generator (boiler) which is the fourth heating means HM4 is installed outside the heating chamber 6, and has a function of blowing out superheated steam into the heating chamber 6. The timing of supplying the superheated steam, the supply amount per unit time, the supply time, etc. are controlled by the heating control section 43 of the control device 40.

The cooking device 1 is provided with a voice signal receiving unit 56 that receives voice commands from the user US via a microphone (not shown) that collects the voice of the user US. In other words, the cooking device 1 itself has the function of selecting recipe data CD by voice input and setting the control conditions.

The control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 is different from that in the fifth embodiment. That is, since there is no configuration equivalent to the guide screen analysis unit 140, the guide screen 16MA1 is not displayed.
In this embodiment 7, the control device 40 is similar to that in embodiment 2. That is, the input operation unit 15 includes a central operation unit 15M and left and right operation units 15L and 15R. The central operation unit 15M has touch-type input keys 151M to 159M arranged horizontally in a straight line outside the central display unit 16 and in a position adjacent to the front of the central display unit 16.

The rest of the configuration of the cooking device 1 is the same as that described in the first embodiment, so duplicated explanations will be omitted.

Next, we will explain Figure 104.
In FIG. 104, steps SE1 to SE14 indicate, in chronological order, main operational steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and operational steps on the external information processing network (first server 321) and voice input/output unit 1000 side, respectively.

As in step SE1, the information emitted from the cooking appliance 1 is a type of operating state data OS described in FIG. 57 of embodiment 2.

The first server 321 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that produced the cooking appliance 1, and has a thorough understanding of the special controls and processes that are unique to the cooking appliance 1, and is therefore able to accurately grasp the operating status of the cooking appliance 1 (including both heating and non-heating operations).

In FIG. 104 , when the start switch (input key) 151M (not shown) is pressed to start cooking in various cooking modes such as the collaborative cooking mode KM3 (step SE1), the operating status data OS is sent to the first server 321.
When new operating state data OS arrives, the data recorded in chronological order in storage unit 321R is updated. That is, data on main operations up to the end of cooking is accumulated in chronological order (step SE2).

The operating status data OS includes data indicating the ON/OFF state of the main power switch 20, data indicating the selection process of the combined cooking mode KM3, etc., data on control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and the latest temperature measurement data of the top plate 3 and heating chamber 6, etc.

Next, immediately after step SE2, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M (step SE3).
In the next step SE4, a cooking mode is selected. For example, when the input key 153M is touched to select the linked cooking mode KM3, a first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. Then, when another input key 154M is touched, a cooking menu (e.g., fried chicken) different from the default cooking menu (e.g., hamburger) can be selected.

In step SE4, when input key 153M or 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, the central operation unit 15M (not shown) determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press," and the result of this determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, when one of the input keys 153L and 153R, which are one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press," and the result of this determination (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, which is a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Therefore, if the touch operation of the input key 154M is in a "long press" state, from that point on, the control device 40 changes to "voice input mode 1" (see embodiment 1) (step SE5).
The communication unit 51 of the control device 40 transmits a voice input mode acceptance start notification SF to the first server 321 .
When the control unit 321C of the first server 321 receives this voice input mode acceptance start notification SF, it enters a voice input mode compatible period (step SE6).

The "voice input mode corresponding period" at step SE6 is one of the features of the seventh embodiment.
The "voice input mode compatible period" is a period during which a home electric appliance (in this case, the cooking appliance 1) pre-registered in the first server 321 operates to accept input operations in the voice input mode.
When the "voice input mode compatible period" begins, the first server 321 knows that it will receive a voice input signal from the preregistered voice input/output device 1000. Therefore, the first server 321 may perform standby processing in preparation for voice input in a predetermined data format.

The next steps SE6 and SE7 are one of the features of this seventh embodiment. The first server 321 notifies the voice input/output unit 1000 that the "voice input mode compatible period" has begun (step SE7). This allows the voice input/output unit 1000 to know, albeit indirectly, that the cooking appliance 1 is accepting voice input signals via the first server 321. In other words, the voice input/output unit 1000 can enter a voice input acceptance standby state (preparation mode) without actually checking the state of the cooking appliance 1.

On the other hand, after step SE4, it is also possible to acquire the recipe data CD from the first server 321. An automatic connection operation with the first server 321 is performed, and if the communication connection is successful, the process proceeds to a mode for acquiring the recipe data CD (step SE4A). In this step SE4A, the latest state data of the cooking appliance 1 is transmitted to the first server 321.

At step SE5, the control device 40 has been changed to "voice input mode 1", so when the user US speaks a control menu command such as "warm" for the combined cooking mode KM2, as shown in FIG. 104, the voice input/output unit 1000 receives this spoken information (step SE8).

The speech information uttered by the user US to the voice input/output device 1000 is converted into text data in the voice input/output device 1000 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS1).

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives the text data (voice input signal VS1) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the memory unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts the text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS1) into various commands prepared as standard commands.

A request B is sent from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This request B is, for example, a command to change some of the parameters of the control conditions of the recipe data CD (for example, changing the microwave output from 500 W to 600 W). The first server 321 then requests the provision of operation support data GS1 for the user US.

The first server 321 receives the data converted into the standard command by the second server 322 as the request B and determines the request content from the cooking appliance 1. Then, the first server 321 generates one piece of command information A for the cooking appliance 1 (step SE9).

The command information A is, for example, a notification command to the voice notification unit 50 of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG. 104, for the control menu "warm up", the command information A is, for example, a voice notification such as "Warm up menu accepted. Please set the time". The user US is then recommended to send time setting information for the "warm up" menu. Then, as in step SE8, the control unit waits for more detailed (lower level) condition settings from the user US.

Note that the input process is not necessarily completed with a single voice input from the user US, so steps SE8 and SE9 may be repeated multiple times.

Through the above process, the first server 321 generates a command (command data) for setting the time for the "warm" menu and transmits it to the cooking appliance 1 via the network NW (205) (step SE10). Note that the entire recipe data CD that reflects the control conditions set by the user US may also be transmitted.

The cooking appliance 1 receives information on the "warm" menu, which is one of the recommended cooking menus MB (step SE11).
In this “warm” menu, cooking step 1 is carried out in heating chamber 6 .

Therefore, it is necessary to perform the operations of opening the door 7, placing the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6, and then closing the door 7. The opening and closing of the door 7 is controlled by the opening and closing detection unit 10 (steps SE12 and SE13).
In the "warm" control menu, the heating operation does not start automatically when the door 7 is closed, but goes into a standby state waiting for a command to start heating. The voice notification 50 may, for example, say, "Auto microwave operation accepted. Press the start key to start heating," and prompt the user to input a command to start heating (step SE14).

In the seventh embodiment, the cooking appliance 1 itself has a function of directly processing voice input, so that the voice input/output unit 1000 is not required.
For example, from step SE5 onwards, the user US may simply speak towards the voice signal receiving unit 56.

The cooking device 1 of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration in summary.
That is, it has a first heating means HM1 which inductively heats the object to be heated N on the top plate 3, a heating chamber 6, a microwave heating source (second heating means) HM2 which supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 6, an oven heating source (third heating means) HM3 which heats the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat, a steam generator (fourth heating means) HM4 which supplies high-temperature steam to the inside of the heating chamber 6, an input operation unit 15, an alarm unit 90 which has a display unit 16 and an audio alarm unit 50, a communication unit 51 which wirelessly exchanges information with the outside, and a control device 40.

,
The control device 40 is
After displaying the standby initial screen 16M1 on the display unit 16,
(1) IH only mode in which the first heating means is operated alone; (2) Range only cooking mode in which the second heating means is operated alone; (3) Oven only cooking mode in which the third heating means is operated alone; (4) Steam only cooking mode in which the fourth heating means is operated alone; (5) Composite cooking mode KM2 in which the second heating means and one or both of the third and fourth heating means are operated simultaneously or automatically at different operating times to perform cooking in the heating chamber 6;
(5) An integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the second heating means, both or either one of the third and fourth heating means, and the first heating means are operated sequentially after a transition period TR whose length is determined by a command from a user;
The operating program is capable of executing
The integrated cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 performed before the transition period TR using the heating chamber 6, and a cooking process 2 performed above the top plate 15 after the transition period TR,
The control device 40 has a function of receiving recipe data CD for performing cooking from a first server 321 and transmitting operating state data OS to the first server 321 wirelessly (via a network NW);
The control device 40 is configured to obtain the recipe data CD, and set control conditions for the cooking menu to which the recipe data CD is applied upon receiving command information (commands) from the first server 321 .

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 was configured to automatically switch to voice input mode depending on the touch state of a specific input key (e.g., 154M) on the input operation unit 15.

Summary of embodiment 7.
As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object placed on the top plate 3;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15 having touch-type input keys;
A notification unit 90 having a central display unit 16M;
A control device 40,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a plurality of heat cooking modes KM1 to KM3 or identification information of a control menu on the display unit 16 in a selectable manner,
When the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the touch-type input key (154M, etc.), the input operation unit 15 switches the input mode of the control device 40 to a voice input mode,
During a period in which the cooking mode or the control menu is displayed on the display unit 16M, the control device 40 accepts a voice command from the user US to set control conditions for the cooking mode or the control menu;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the touch-type input key (154M, etc.) can be used to select a cooking mode or the like to switch to a voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be completed by voice input. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, after the cooking mode or the control menu is selected using the touch-type input key (154M, etc.), the configuration allows the acquisition of recipe data CD from outside.

With this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15.

Furthermore, in this seventh embodiment, the heat cooking system according to the seventh disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the seventh disclosure includes:
A cooking device 1 for heating an object to be heated N;
A first server 321 connected to the cooking appliance 1 via a network NW (205);
The first server 321 and a voice input/output device 1000 connected via a network NW (205),
The first server 321 has a function of transmitting command data for setting control conditions for a cooking menu to the cooking appliance 1,
The first server 321 has a function of acquiring data indicating the contents of the voice input received from the user by the voice input/output device 1000,
The cooking appliance 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD from the first server 321 after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
The cooking device 1 has a function of automatically switching from a touch input mode to a voice input mode according to the touch state of a touch input key (such as 154M),
The cooking appliance 1 is configured to receive the command data of the control conditions related to the recipe data CD acquired from the first server 321 in the voice input mode.

According to the cooking system of the seventh disclosure, cooking can be performed using recipe data CD acquired from outside via a network.
In addition, when recipe data CD is acquired, the mode is automatically changed to voice input mode, so that when inputting control conditions related to the subsequently acquired recipe data CD, it becomes possible to input by voice, which contributes to improving the efficiency of input operations for the user US and reducing the input burden.

Further, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the seventh embodiment is as follows:
Heating means (first heating means HM1 to fourth heating means HM4) for heating the object to be heated N;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving instructions from a user;
a voice signal receiving unit 56 for receiving an input command by voice;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
A notification unit 90 having a display screen 16;
A control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key,
After starting up the display unit, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit,
When the control device 40 receives an input command to select the voice input mode from the input operation unit 15 during a period in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 and receives a setting command for control conditions for the recipe data CD;
Furthermore, the control device 40 is characterized in that it transmits, via the communication unit 51, a voice input mode acceptance start notification SF (see FIG. 104) indicating that the voice input mode has been selected.

Therefore, the first server 321 that has received the voice input mode reception start notification SF can set a "voice input mode support period." Then, the first server 321 can prepare (standby process) for receiving a voice input signal from the voice input/output device 1000.

Furthermore, by the audio input/output device 1000 acquiring the information of the audio input mode reception start notification SF, it becomes clear that the cooking appliance 1 is accepting an audio input signal. This allows the audio input/output device 1000 to enter a standby state for receiving audio input (preparation mode) without actually checking the state of the cooking appliance 1, which is expected to shorten the time required for the input process in cooking.

Embodiment 8.
Fig. 105 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to embodiment 8. Fig. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the main operation steps of the control device of the cooking device shown in Fig. 105 and the operation steps on the external information processing network side. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of the embodiments explained in Figs. 1 to 104 are given the same reference numerals.

The eighth embodiment is significantly different from the seventh embodiment in that a start signal and the like are transmitted directly from the cooking appliance 1 to the audio input/output unit 1000 .
The “cloud server” 300 in this eighth embodiment includes at least two servers: a first server 321 and a second server 322 .

Referring to Figure 105 .
Cooking device 1 has infrared (signal) transmitting section 35 (not shown) similar to infrared transmitting section 31 shown in embodiment 1 (FIG. 6).

The voice input/output device 1000 has the same functions as those described in the seventh embodiment, but has an infrared (signal) receiving unit (not shown). The infrared receiving unit receives a start signal and a voice input mode start notification SF (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "signal C") from the infrared transmitting unit 35 (not shown) of the cooking appliance 1 as needed.
The means for transmitting the signal C from the cooking appliance 1 to the audio input/output unit 1000 is not limited to the infrared communication described above, but may be, for example, a power line carrier system or a system in which the signal is directly connected via a signal line (cable, etc.).

Next, we will explain Figure 106.
In FIG. 106, steps SE1 to SE14 indicate, in chronological order, main operational steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and operational steps on the external information processing network (first server 321) and voice input/output unit 1000 side, respectively.

As is clear from FIG. 106, steps SE2A, SE6A, and SE7A are different from those shown in FIG. 104 of embodiment 7, but the other steps are the same, so the same parts are given the same reference numerals and duplicate explanations are omitted.

In FIG. 106, when the main power switch 20 (not shown) of the cooking appliance 1 is turned ON, the cooking appliance 1 starts up (step SE1). This startup causes the control device 40 to transmit an infrared signal from the signal transmission unit (infrared transmission unit) 35 (not shown).

An infrared receiving section (not shown) of the voice input/output unit 1000 receives an infrared signal from the cooking appliance 1, is activated, and goes into a standby mode (step SE2A).
Although FIG. 106 does not show the driving state data OS as described in the seventh embodiment (FIG. 104), similar driving state data OS is transmitted to the first server 321.
Then, when new operating state data OS arrives, the first server 321 updates the data recorded in chronological order in its storage unit 321R.

When selecting a cooking mode in the cooking device 1, if one of the voice input switching keys 153L or 153R (both not shown) is touched and the touch state is determined to be a "long press", the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 changes the voice input mode to "voice input mode 1" (see embodiment 1) from that point on.

A voice input mode start notification SF (signal C) is sent from communication unit 51 of control device 40 to the infrared receiving unit (not shown) of voice input/output unit 1000 (step SE5).
Upon receiving the signal C, the voice input/output unit 1000 starts operation in the voice input mode (step SE6).

The voice input/output device 1000 wirelessly transmits a signal indicating the voice input mode start notification SF (signal C) to the first server 321. As a result, the first server 321 enters a standby mode in preparation for receiving voice input (step SE7A).

These steps SE6A and SE7A are one of the features of this eighth embodiment.
At step SE7A, the first server 321 knows that it will receive an audio input signal from the preregistered audio input/output device 1000. Therefore, the first server 321 can start a standby process in preparation for audio input in a predetermined data format.

By means of step SE6A, the voice input/output unit 1000 directly knows that the cooking appliance 1 is about to start voice input. In other words, it is possible for the user US to enter a voice input waiting state (preparation mode) without actually checking the state of the cooking appliance 1.

After that, as explained in the seventh embodiment, when the user US directly issues a command by voice, this speech information is received by the voice input/output unit 1000 (step SE8), converted into text data by the voice input/output unit 1000, and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS1). From this point onwards, the process is the same as that explained in the seventh embodiment (Fig. 104).

In the eighth embodiment, the cooking appliance 1 itself has a function of directly processing voice input, so that the voice input/output unit 1000 is not required.
For example, after step SE5, the user US may simply speak toward the voice signal receiving unit 56. In this case, the voice input/output unit 1000 is turned off.

The cooking device 1 of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration in summary.
That is, it has a first heating means HM1 which inductively heats the object to be heated N on the top plate 3, a heating chamber 6, a microwave heating source (second heating means) HM2 which supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 6, an oven heating source (third heating means) HM3 which heats the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat, a steam generator (fourth heating means) HM4 which supplies high-temperature steam to the inside of the heating chamber 6, an input operation unit 15, an alarm unit 90 which has a display unit 16 and an audio alarm unit 50, a communication unit 51 which wirelessly exchanges information with the outside, and a control device 40.

,
The control device 40 has a function of receiving recipe data CD for executing cooking from the first server 321 and transmitting a signal C to the voice input/output device 1000 in the form of an infrared signal.
The control device 40 is configured to acquire the recipe data CD, and set control conditions for the cooking menu to which the recipe data CD is applied upon receiving command information (commands) from the first server 321 .

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 was configured to automatically switch to voice input mode depending on the touch state of a specific input key (e.g., 154M) on the input operation unit 15.

Summary of embodiment 8.
As described above, in this eighth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the eighth disclosure is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object placed on the top plate 3;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15 having touch-type input keys;
A notification unit 90 having a central display unit 16M;
A signal transmitting unit 35 (infrared signal transmitting unit) (not shown),
A control device 40,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a plurality of heat cooking modes KM1 to KM3 or identification information of a control menu on the display unit 16 in a selectable manner,
When the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the touch-type input key (154M, etc.), the input operation unit 15 switches the input mode of the control device 40 to a voice input mode,
The control device 40 transmits a voice input mode start notification SF (signal C) from the transmission unit 35 (infrared signal transmission unit) (not shown) to the outside,
During a period in which the cooking mode or the control menu is displayed on the display unit 16M, the control device 40 accepts a voice command from the user US to set control conditions for the cooking mode or the control menu;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the touch-type input key (154M, etc.) can be used to select a cooking mode or the like to switch to a voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be completed by voice input. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, after the cooking mode or the control menu is selected using the touch-type input key (154M, etc.), the configuration allows the acquisition of recipe data CD from outside.

With this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 8, the heating and cooking system according to the ninth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the ninth disclosure includes:
A cooking device 1 having a signal transmission unit 35 (not shown) and a communication unit 51 and heating an object to be heated N;
A first server 321 connected to the cooking appliance 1 via a network NW (205);
The first server 321 and a voice input/output device 1000 connected via a network NW (205),
The first server 321 has a function of transmitting command data for setting control conditions for a cooking menu to the cooking appliance 1,
The first server 321 has a function of acquiring data indicating the contents of the voice input received from the user by the voice input/output device 1000,
The cooking appliance 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD from the first server 321 after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
The cooking device 1 has a function of automatically switching from a touch input mode to a voice input mode according to the touch state of a touch input key (such as 154M),
The cooking appliance 1 transmits a signal C indicating the state of the voice input mode from the signal transmission unit 35 (not shown) to the voice input/output unit 1000 without passing through the network NW,
The cooking appliance 1 is configured to receive the command data of the control conditions related to the recipe data CD acquired from the first server 321 in the voice input mode.

According to the cooking system of the ninth disclosure, cooking can be performed using recipe data CD acquired from outside via a network.
In addition, when recipe data is acquired, the mode is automatically changed to voice input mode, so that when inputting control conditions related to the subsequently acquired recipe data, it is possible to input by voice, which contributes to improving the efficiency of input operations for the user US and reducing the input burden.

Furthermore, the voice input/output unit 1000 receives the signal C indicating the voice input mode and can quickly transition to preparation for receiving a voice input signal (standby processing: standby state), which is expected to reduce the time required for the input process in cooking.
Incidentally, the eighth embodiment may be slightly improved so that the voice input mode start notification SF (signal C) is not transmitted from the communication unit 51 of the control device 40 to an infrared receiving unit (not shown) of the voice input/output unit 1000 but transmitted to the first server 321, and the presence of the signal C finally reaches the voice input/output unit 1000. With this configuration, the voice input/output unit 1000 can receive the notification from the first server 321 and enter a standby mode in preparation for receiving voice input from the user US.

Embodiment 9.
FIG. 107 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to embodiment 9, and is an explanatory diagram showing the process of communication (information exchange) between a communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 such as a smartphone and a cooking appliance 1. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a terminal side display screen of a communication terminal used in the cooking system of FIG. 107. FIG. 109 is an operation explanatory diagram showing the recipe data reception process of the central operation unit and central display unit of a cooking appliance used in the cooking system of FIG. 107. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the operation steps between the cooking appliance and an external information processing network in chronological order. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in the configurations of the embodiments described in FIG. 1 to FIG. 106 are given the same reference numerals.

This embodiment 9 is significantly different from the embodiments 1 to 8 in that, when recipe data CD is provided from the communication terminal device 200 to the cooking appliance 1, the processing for sending recipe data CD that is not permitted by the cooking appliance 1 side is improved.

The following describes Figure 107. Note that Figure 107 does not show the network environment, such as the cloud server 300 and the first server 321 described in the first to eighth embodiments, and instead describes the relationship between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200.

In FIG. 107, steps SE21 to SE37 show, in chronological order, the main operational steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and the operational steps of the communication terminal device 200, which is part of an external information processing network.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 107 is an example in which cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 using the third heating means HM3, and the main power switch 20 (not shown) of the cooking device 1 is turned ON again within a short time after the cooking is completed. In other words, the temperature of the heating chamber 7 is still high (for example, 100°C or higher) due to the effects of the previous cooking.

When the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the cooking device 1 starts up (step SE21). This startup causes the control device 40 to check whether there are any abnormalities in the cooking device itself, and if there are no abnormalities, it starts up the display unit 16 and displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the central display unit 16M (step SE22).

This Figure 107 does not show the driving status data OS as described in embodiment 7 (Figure 104), but similar driving status data OS is sent to the first server 321 (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 107, after the stage where the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed (step SU1), in step SE23, an automatic connection operation with the communication terminal device 200 is performed, and if the communication connection is successful, the device proceeds to a standby mode for acquiring recipe data CD (preparation for acquisition) (step SE23).

In the next step SE24, a heating cooking mode is selected. For example, when input key 153M is touched to select linked cooking mode KM3, a first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. Then, when another input key 154M is touched, a cooking menu (e.g., fried chicken) different from the default cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) can be selected.

In step SE4, when input key 153M or 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, the central operation unit 15M (not shown) determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press," and the result of this determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Therefore, if input key 154M is touched without touching input key 153, and the touch operation is in a "long press" state, from that point on, the control device 40 changes to "voice input mode 1" (see embodiment 1) (step SE25).
A voice input mode acceptance start notification SF is sent from communication unit 51 of control device 40 to communication terminal 200. As a result, communication terminal 200 becomes ready to transmit recipe data CD (step SE26).

After this, as described in the second embodiment, the user US directly inputs the command content by voice to the voice input unit 222 (see FIG. 60) of the communication terminal device 200, or, as shown in FIG. 108, operates the touch operation unit 215 (see FIG. 60) to input information specifying the recipe data CD.

As shown in FIG. 107, the user US selects "warm" (see FIG. 19) in the combined cooking mode KM2 and transmits this (step SE27).
The "warm" control menu is a menu for heating food placed in the heating chamber 6 by microwaves, and the food is cooked while the temperature of the food is monitored in real time without contact by the group of temperature sensors 30 including the infrared sensor 13. Therefore, as explained in the first embodiment, if the internal temperature of the walls of the heating chamber 6, etc. is high from the beginning, the control device 40 does not execute this control menu.

The control device 40 determines whether the "permission conditions" are satisfied in step SE28 (step SE28).
As explained in the first embodiment (particularly step SM60 in FIG. 41), in the case of the combined cooking mode KM2, it is determined whether or not "permission condition 3" is satisfied. The "permission condition 3" here refers to determining whether or not the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6, as a result of checking the temperature sensor group 30, exceeds a threshold value (reference value), for example, the temperature detection range (80° C. or less).

If the "permission condition 3" in step SE28 is judged to not satisfy the "permission condition," a "non-permission process" is performed at this stage (step SE29).
The "disallowance process" here refers to a process of displaying a message such as "The recipe has been received, but the heating chamber is too hot to cook with" on the initial standby screen 16MH, or of issuing a similar notification by the audio notification unit 50.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 9, the contents of the above-mentioned "non-permission process" are transmitted to the communication terminal device 200 (step SE29).

The communication terminal device 200 then displays the details of the "non-permission process" on the display unit 216 of the terminal (step SE30). This state is explained in detail in the next Figure 108.

The user US touches the touch operation unit 215 of the display operation unit 225, or uses the voice input unit 222 to make voice input to cancel the "Warm" option in the control menu or to change the control conditions, etc. (step SE31).

Next, when the user US touches the touch operation unit 215 or uses the voice input unit 222 to issue a command to send the "warm" control menu item (step SE32), the cooking appliance 1 receives a new command from the communication terminal unit 200 (step SE33).

That is, in step SE33, the control menu for "warming (manual)" is now received as recipe data CD. After this, as described in step SE28, the control device 40 determines whether the "permission conditions" are met.

"Warming (Manual)" satisfies "Permission Condition 3" even if the temperature in the heating chamber 6 exceeds 100°C. Therefore, if the heating time data is included in the recipe data CD in step SE33, the command to execute this recipe data CD is executable by the cooking appliance 1.

Although not shown in FIG. 107, the cooking appliance 1 sends a reception notification to the communication terminal device 200 indicating that the recipe data CD has been "received without problem" immediately after the determination of "permission condition 3" after step SE33, which can be easily confirmed by the transmitting side.

At the same time, the cooking device 1 displays a second specific screen 16M2 corresponding to the "Warm (Manual)" control menu on the central display unit 16M, and the second specific screen 16M2 indicates that the recipe data CD for "Warm (Manual)" has been received, and is also notified by the audio notification unit 50.

In the cooking appliance 1, the cooking process for the received "warm (manual)" menu is carried out in the heating chamber 6, so it is necessary to open the door 7, place the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6, and then close the door 7 again. The opening and closing of the door 7 is performed by the opening/closing detection unit 10 (steps SE34 and SE35).

The opening and closing of the door 7 is displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 or is notified by the audio notification unit 50 to prompt the user US to take action.
In addition, in the "warm" control menu, the heating operation does not start automatically when the door 7 is closed, but goes into a standby state waiting for a command to start heating. The voice notification 50 may, for example, say, "Auto microwave operation accepted. Press the start key to start heating," and prompt the user to input a command to start heating (step SE36).

After that, when the input key (start key) 151M is touched, the heating and cooking operation actually starts (step SE37).

Next, the operation of the communication terminal 200 of FIG. 108 will be described.
FIG. 108 shows a scene corresponding to the second embodiment, particularly to FIG.
The same components as those shown in FIG. 75 are designated by the same reference numerals and duplicated explanations may be omitted.

The state shown in FIG. 108(A) is a scene in which the user US selects the "warm" automatic cooking menu. The (maximum heating) temperature setting of the range (microwave heating) has been changed to 75°C.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), the set temperature is displayed as having been changed to 75° C., and in this state, the remote control signal transmission (confirmation) key display section (icon) 521 is displayed for the first time.
In Fig. 108(A), when the transmission key display section 521 is selected, the setting information (recipe data) of the control menu "warm" of the "microwave only cooking mode KM1" displayed in Fig. 108(A) is transmitted all at once as remote operation information to the cooking appliance 1. This corresponds to step SE27 in Fig. 107.

When the transmission of the remote control signal (recipe data CD) is completed, the cooking appliance 1 judges whether "permission condition 3" is satisfied at step SE28 in FIG.
As explained in Figure 107, if the heating chamber 6 has reached a high temperature (e.g., 100°C or higher) due to previous heating, this does not satisfy "permission condition 3", so as explained in step SE29 of Figure 107, the heating cooker 1 transmits the contents of the "non-permission processing" to the communication terminal unit 200.

FIG. 108(B) shows the stage when such a "non-permission process" is received.
In Fig. 108(B), 541 is a voice input mode display section showing that the communication terminal device 200 is set to the voice input mode. At the stage of Fig. 108(B) where the voice input mode display section 541 is displayed, the user US can input by voice by directly speaking to the voice input section 222.

In FIG. 108(B), 542 is reference information extracted by the central processing unit 212 of the communication terminal device 200 with reference to the information in the cooker database 217 in accordance with the contents of the "non-permission process" from the cooker 1, and is a type of operation support data GS (see FIG. 57). When the cooker 1 notifies the cooker 1 of the "non-permission process" (step SE29 in FIG. 107), the cooker 1 may transmit a unique error code (such as a simple number) to the communication terminal device 200, and the central processing unit 212 may compare the error code with the error code in the cooker database 217 and display the reference information 542.

In the example of Fig. 108(B), it is shown that heating is possible using "manual heating" where the user individually specifies the heating time, rather than the "warm" control menu which detects the temperature of the food being cooked and automatically stops heating. In other words, it is recommended that the user set the "time" as a control condition.

In FIG. 108(B), 543 is an error notification indicating that a notification of "non-permission processing" has been received from the cooking appliance 1. This error notification is shown both when it occurs due to conditions on the cooking appliance 1 side, such as the above-mentioned "permission condition 3," and when there is a communication failure on the network NW.

In FIG. 108(B), 507C is an auxiliary information display section that is displayed near the reference image display section 506 in FIG. 108(A).
In the example of FIG. 108(B), the reason for the "non-permission process" from the cooking appliance 1 is simply explained in text.

In the state shown in FIG. 108(B), if the user US utters a phrase such as "microwave 10 minutes," the communication terminal device 200 can receive this voice information, extract recipe data CD with a control menu of "microwave manual" and a heating time of 10 minutes, and transmit it to the cooking appliance 1. An example of this is step SE32 in FIG. 107. Note that if the communication terminal device 200 cannot decode the voice information of the user US by itself, it may transmit the voice data to a cloud server (second server 322, etc.) as described in the second embodiment, and use the data provided by the cloud server 300.

Next, we will explain Figure 109.
109 is an operation explanatory diagram showing a recipe data receiving process of the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M. This diagram corresponds to FIG. 65 in the first embodiment.

Figure 109 shows the process of receiving recipe data CD from the communication terminal device 200. For all heating cooking modes, including the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the contents of the receiving operation display screen 16MM are the same, as shown in Figure 109 (A).

In other words, immediately after starting to receive recipe data CD from the outside, the standby initial screen 16MH switches to a reception operation display screen 16MM, which indicates that the reception operation is in progress, as shown in FIG. 109 (A).

Numeral 16F denotes a plurality of progress marks that appear on the receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation. Numeral 174 denotes a receiving operation display section that displays in text that recipe data CD is in the process of being received from the outside.
Reference numeral 174 denotes a reception operation display section which displays in text the fact that recipe data CD is currently being received from the outside.

The progress mark 16F is of two types: a black triangle and a white triangle.
As shown in FIG. 109(A), immediately after the start of the reception operation of recipe data CD, there is one black progress mark 16F, but as the reception operation progresses, the number of black progress marks 16F gradually increases, and eventually there are five black triangular progress marks 16F lined up.

If the recipe data CD is determined to be "unpermitted processing" as a result of the determination of the permission conditions, as shown in FIG. 109(B), the reception operation display section 174 changes to a non-permission display 174F indicating that the reception operation has failed.
174A is reception support information. In FIG. 109B, the reason for the non-approval of the recipe data CD was that the peak cut power setting value among the permission conditions was less than 5000 W, so a remedy is displayed and the user US is prompted to change the setting using the function setting key 151KP.

Note that in Figures 107 and 108, an example is described in which "permission condition 3" is used as the criterion for determining "non-permission processing" of the cooking device 1, but this is the case for the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, and other conditions may be added to the criteria for determining "permission conditions."

For example, like the "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" described in the first embodiment, it is possible to add that the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 is in use. In other words, if the heating chamber 6 is already being used for some kind of cooking, it is possible to set it to perform "non-permission processing." Also, when using the first heating means to heat the object N on the top plate 3, the use or non-use of the first heating means HM1 may be added to the judgment criteria.

Furthermore, as explained in the first embodiment, the maximum power consumption setting value may be added as a criterion for "disallowance processing" of the cooking appliance 1. As explained in the first embodiment, the control device 40 can use the function setting key 151KP to perform "peak cut setting" (select one of four maximum power consumption levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W). Therefore, for example, if the maximum power consumption is not set to 5000W or more, the power threshold value used in the criterion may be set so that the recipe data CD for the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 are disallowed.

Note that, from the stage in FIG. 108(A) to the stage in FIG. 108(B), the communication terminal device 200 and the cooking appliance 1 do not always continue (maintain) a state in which data can be exchanged wirelessly. Similarly, the cooking appliance 1 and the cloud server (first server 321, second server 322, etc.) 300 do not always continue (maintain) a state in which wireless communication is possible. The cooking appliance 1 may connect automatically whenever necessary, or may connect in response to an operation by the user US.

Next, we will explain Figure 110.
Fig. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the operation steps of the cooking appliance 1, the external cloud server 300, and the communication terminal device 200. This diagram shows step SE32 and subsequent steps shown in Fig. 107. Note that although the control menu is "Microwave manual", the operation described below is the same for the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

In FIG. 110, when a "microwave manual" command is sent from the communications terminal (information processing terminal) 200 (step SE32), the contents of this command are sent from the cloud server 300 to the cooking appliance 1.

If the cloud server 300 is configured in such a way that the first server 321 is connected to the cooking appliance 1 via the network 205 as described in the second embodiment, the command is received by the first server 321 (step SE32A).

The first server 321 transmits the command to the cooking appliance 1 via the network 205 (step SE32B).
In this ninth embodiment, the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 is attached to the outer wall surface or the like of the cooking appliance 1 in the form of an adapter, and will be referred to as a "communication adapter" below.

When the communication adapter 51 receives the command, it acquires status information of the cooking appliance 1. This status information is information that indicates the status of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, for example, it is information that indicates the status of the first heating means HM1 confirmed by the heating control unit 43.

For example, the communication adapter 51 acquires information (step SE32C) such as the fact that the power of induction heating is zero but that the device is in a standby state immediately before heating starts, and that the device is receiving a temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30. Note that within the communication adapter 51, such state confirmation operations are repeated many times at regular intervals to collect the latest accurate data.
In this manner, information as to whether the cooking appliance 1 is in a state conforming to the content of the received command is collected by the communications adapter 51 and transmitted to the first server 321 (step SE32D).

The first server 321 determines whether the content of the command sent in step SE32B matches (is identical to) the content of the command received from the communications adapter 51 in step SE32D (step SE32E). If it is determined that there is no discrepancy between the content of the sent command and the content of the received command, the first server 321 transmits the determination result to the communications terminal device 200 (step SE32F). If the determination results in no discrepancy, it is determined that communication was successful.

When the communication terminal device 200 receives the judgment result ("communication successful") from the first server 321 (step SE32G), it displays that fact on the terminal display unit 216 (step SE32H). The notification may also be made through the speaker 214. Note that in FIG. 110, steps SE34 and SE35 indicate that the opening and closing operations of the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 have been detected by the opening/closing detection unit 10, as explained in FIG. 107, but this timing does not have to be as shown in FIG. 110. For example, step SE34 may occur before step SE32C.

Summary of embodiment 9.
As is clear from the above description, in this ninth embodiment, a cooking device 1 according to the tenth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device according to the tenth disclosure is as follows:
A heating chamber 6;
A heating means for heating the object to be heated (N);
an input operation unit 15 for receiving instructions from a user;
A communication unit 51 for wirelessly communicating with the outside;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has a plurality of input keys (151M, 152M, 153L, 153M, 153R, 154M) and the like.
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode by operating specific input keys 153L, 153M, 153R, and 154M among the input keys,
The control device 40 is configured such that after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 receives a command to obtain recipe data CD by the specific input key, and when the control device 40 receives the recipe data CD, the control device 40 determines whether or not at least one of the states of the heating chamber 6 or the heating means satisfies the permission conditions, and if the permission conditions are not satisfied, the control device 40 transmits a notification of non-permission processing from the communication unit 51.

Because of this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from the outside can be controlled by the specific input key of the input operation unit 15. In addition, the touch-type specific input key on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability and reduces the workload of the user US.

Furthermore, when the cooking appliance 1 receives recipe data CD from the outside, it selects recipe data CD that can be executed by the cooking appliance 1 according to predefined permission conditions, and further notifies the communication terminal device 200, which is the sender of recipe data CD that is deemed incompatible by the selection, so that it is possible to prevent the communication terminal device 200, which is the sender, from misunderstanding that the recipe data CD has been normally accepted. This can therefore improve the convenience and operability for the user US.

Furthermore, in this ninth embodiment, the cooking device according to the tenth disclosure is realized in the following form.
That is,
Heating means (first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, etc.) for heating the object to be heated N;
A heating chamber 6 in which food to be cooked is accommodated;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving instructions from a user;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (151M to 159M, etc.) for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key,
After starting up the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
When the control device 40 receives a command to start the voice input mode from a specific input key (153L, 153M, 154M, etc.) of the input operation unit 15 during a period in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51,
The heating cooker 1 is characterized in that, when the control device 40 receives the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, it determines whether the heating chamber 6 or the heating means meets predetermined "permission conditions," and if the "permission conditions" are not met, it performs "disapproval processing" and transmits information indicating the disapproval processing from the communication unit 51.

Because of this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from the outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15. In addition, the touch-type input keys on the input operation unit 15 can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in one embodiment of the cooking appliance 1 related to the tenth disclosure, when the cooking appliance 1 receives recipe data CD from the outside, it selects recipe data CD that can be executed by the cooking appliance 1 according to predefined permission conditions, and further notifies the communication terminal device 200, which is the sender of recipe data CD that is deemed incompatible by the selection, thereby preventing the communication terminal device 200, which is the sender, from misunderstanding that the recipe data CD has been normally accepted. This can therefore improve the convenience and operability for the user US.

Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 109, in one embodiment of the cooking device 1 related to this tenth disclosure, if the recipe data CD is determined to be "unauthorized processing" based on the determination of the permission conditions, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the reception operation display unit 174 changes to a non-permission display 174F indicating that the reception operation has failed, so that the user can immediately know that the recipe data CD has not been properly accepted on the cooking device 1 side either.

At that time, reception support information 174A is also displayed, so the user US can immediately understand how to deal with the problem, reducing the burden on the user US, thereby improving operability in this respect as well.

In this ninth embodiment, a heating and cooking system related to the eleventh disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the eleventh disclosure includes:
A cooking device 1 having a heating chamber 6 and a heating means;
and an information processing terminal 200 connected to the cooking device 1 by wireless communication.
The information processing terminal 200 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The input operation unit 15 of the cooking device 1 has a plurality of input keys (151M, 152M, 153L, 153R, 154M, etc.), and a voice input mode can be selected by operating a specific input key (153L, 153R, 154M, etc.) among the input keys,
The cooking device 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD when the specific input key is operated after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
When the cooking device 1 receives the recipe data CD, it determines whether or not at least one of the heating chamber 6 and the heating means satisfies the permission conditions, and when the permission conditions are not satisfied, it transmits a notification of non-permission processing from the communication unit 51 to the information processing terminal device 200 (step SE27 of FIG. 107 ),
When the information processing terminal 200 receives the notification of the non-permission process, the information processing terminal 200 displays information 543 indicating the non-permission process on the terminal side display unit 216;
The configuration was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD that can be executed by the cooking appliance 1 can be selected according to the permission conditions that are determined in advance.
Furthermore, since the notification is sent to the communication terminal 200 that is the sender of the recipe data CD that is determined to be non-conforming by the screening, it is possible to prevent the communication terminal 200 that is the sender from misunderstanding that the recipe data CD has been normally received. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience and operability for the user US.

Furthermore, in order to determine whether the recipe data CD is inappropriate for the cooking appliance 1, the latest physical data such as the operating status of the heating means and the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is collected in advance from the cooking appliance 1 and transmitted to the information processing terminal 200, and the information processing terminal 200 does not determine whether the recipe data CD is inappropriate.
This eliminates the need for communication time delays due to the sending and receiving of such physical data, and the need to aggregate data to send it to the information processing terminal 200 on the cooking appliance 1 side, which contributes to simplifying the overall system and enabling faster processing and the start of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating and cooking system disclosed in the eleventh disclosure, when the information processing terminal device 200 receives a notification of the denial process, it is configured to display reference information 542 for dealing with the denial process on the terminal display unit 216.

This configuration allows the user US to recognize the conditions under which the recipe data CD can be normally accepted by the communication terminal device 200 that is the sender of the recipe data CD, thereby improving the convenience and operability of the user US.

Furthermore, in the heating and cooking system disclosed in the eleventh disclosure, when the information processing terminal device 200 receives a notification of the denial process, an auxiliary information display section 507C indicating the reason for the denial process is displayed on the terminal side display section 216.

This configuration allows the user US to recognize the reason why the recipe data CD was not properly received by the communication terminal device 200 that sent the recipe data CD, thereby improving the convenience and operability for the user US.

Furthermore, as described in FIG. 110, the heating and cooking system of this embodiment 9 has a function of determining whether the transmission of a "command" for setting the control conditions (e.g., heat, temperature, heating time, etc.) for one cooking menu or control menu from the information processing terminal device 200 is successful or unsuccessful.

That is, the communication result is determined by the operation of the first server 321, which acquires status information on the cooking appliance 1 (steps SE32C and SE32D) and compares the acquired data to determine whether the communication was successful (step SE32E).

Then, information indicating such communication results is transmitted to the information processing terminal 200 via the network 205 (step SE32F), so that the judgment result can be known on the information processing terminal 200.

Therefore, in the cooking system disclosed in the eleventh aspect, the user US who transmits the recipe data CD can know on the information processing terminal device 200 at hand whether the command has been reliably received by the cooking appliance 1. This is expected to have the effect of preventing the user US from misunderstanding or being uneasy about operation.

The cooking system having the function of determining whether communication is successful, as described in FIG. 110, can also be applied to the second embodiment, the seventh and eighth embodiments, etc.

Other embodiments.
In order to explain each circuit, part, and each component of the device that constitutes the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal device 200, data has been described by attaching symbols such as recipe data CD1 and recipe data CD2, but these two may be substantially the same data. For example, one recipe data (e.g., recipe data CD for hamburger steak) that is initially held in the cooking device 1 and recipe data (e.g., recipe data CD for hamburger steak) acquired from the outside via the communication unit 51 may have the same content.

In addition, the communication terminal 200, such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal (a small, portable personal computer), does not necessarily need to provide the recipe data acquired from the cloud server 300 to the cooking appliance 1, but may generate and store the recipe data itself.

In addition, in the composite cooking mode KM2 in each embodiment described so far, when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected, a control menu (for example, a heating operation pattern called "defrost") is basically selected, and recipe data CD for a specific food item is not selected. However, the user US may use the cloud server 300 to select one piece of recipe data CD for the composite cooking mode KM2 that can be applied to the cooking appliance 1, and have the cooking appliance 1 acquire it using an information processing terminal device 200 (1000) such as a communication terminal device. This is the same for the single cooking mode KM1.

In the above explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the data is expressed with symbols such as "recipe data 1" and "recipe data 2", but this can mean that the contents of the two recipe data are different from each other, or that they are the same, and the difference in the symbols (1, 2, etc.) should not be interpreted as meaning that the data is different. Similarly, in some cases, different symbols are used, such as recipe data CD1 and CD2, but this is done for the sake of explanation, and does not mean that the contents of the data are different from each other just because of the difference in symbols.

The circuits, parts, and components of the devices illustrated in the above embodiments 1 to 9 are conceptual in function and do not necessarily have to be physically configured as illustrated. Furthermore, the functions of each of the devices and circuits, particularly the control device 40, heating control unit 43, first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, third heating means HM3, fourth heating means HM4, and memory device 41, can be distributed and integrated, and the specific form is not limited to that illustrated, and all or part of them can be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit depending on the function, operating status, etc.

The functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 are realized by a processing circuit. The processing circuit that realizes each function may be dedicated hardware or a processor that executes a program stored in a memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, the functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 are realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device 41, which is a memory. The processor realizes the functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device 41.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43. The storage device 41 is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, EEPROM, etc.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs in the recipe data storage unit 41 shown in FIG. 14 may not be stored in the cooking appliance 1 but in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the cooking appliance 1 obtains the necessary data and program information by accessing the external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operating programs of the control device 40, the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 may be updated to appropriately modified or improved programs at the request of the user US or at the request of the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. In this case, for example, the modified or improved programs may be obtained through the communication unit 51.

One of the heating parts (IH coils 9L, 9M, 9R) of the first heating means HM1 for cooking on the top plate 3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, a gas flow valve is configured to be controlled by the control unit.
Further, a part or the whole of the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner or an induction heating source.

In the first to ninth embodiments, the input operation unit 15 has been described mainly as a "contact input" operation unit in which the user US touches the input keys or operation panel 351 to give an input command, and a press (push button) operation unit, but it may also be a "non-contact input" operation unit that detects the movement of the user US's fingers or hand in a non-contact manner to input.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may be changed to a voice input method that recognizes and inputs the voice of the user US. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and a voice receiving unit for receiving the voice of the user US and converting it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation unit.
Alternatively, a mechanical switch such as a contact type or a pressure type may be used in combination with the voice input method.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may give commands to the cooking appliance 1 via an input terminal device equipped with a voice input function, such as a smart speaker or an AI speaker (see embodiment 8).

In the first to ninth embodiments, the nutritional data DD is displayed on the central display unit 16M, but it may be displayed on a display screen in another position (for example, the right display unit 16R or the right heat display unit 17R) depending on the display screen of various cooking menus.
In addition, the standby initial screen is displayed on the central display section 16M, but if there is another display section, it may be displayed on that display section. For example, on the right display section 16R for the right heating port 4R, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed immediately after the input key 153R is operated. This can also be applied to the left display section 16L.

In addition, in the first embodiment (Figure 30), the two types of main food ingredients and nutritional ingredients are displayed on two screens, the food ingredient display screen 16M1A and the nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B, but these two display screens may be displayed together (on one screen).

The user US may also press the function setting key 151KP to switch to the function setting mode and limit the displayed nutritional components and food components to only specific nutritional components. Furthermore, the user may press the input key 180 to switch to the voice input mode 2 and input by voice, narrowing the range to only specific nutritional components and food components.

Furthermore, when all the heating and cooking steps are completed or during the heating pause periods P3 and P5 (see FIG. 32) of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, either the food component display screen 16M1A or the nutritional component display screen 16M1B, or both, may be displayed in response to a command from the user US or automatically.

The smart speaker or AI speaker can wirelessly communicate with a support server equipped with a voice translation function and a search function in a network environment, such as the cloud server 300, to transmit and receive information at any time. The voice (natural language) uttered by the user US near the cooking appliance 1 can be acquired as a voice signal, which is converted by the support server into a command signal from the user US, and ultimately a command signal can be generated for the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, even if the user US is near the cooking appliance 1, and both hands are occupied preparing food or processing ingredients, limiting the frequency with which the user can directly touch the input operation unit 15, the user can conveniently operate the cooking appliance 1 with natural speech (voice).

In the first to fourth and seventh to ninth embodiments, the means for selecting the various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, the second specific screen 16M2, and the third specific screen 16M3 was the input operation unit 15, but as shown in the fifth and sixth embodiments, it may be provided within the display screen of the central display unit 16M or the left and right display units 16L and 16R, which are the display means.

For example, the aforementioned Patent Publication No. 5833699, which proposes a technique for composite cooking, proposes a technique in which a composite cooking display screen is displayed, the names of the composite cooking menus are displayed on the display screen, and the user US directly touches the menu selection section with their finger to select a menu.

Therefore, the menu of cooking options available in the composite cooking mode KM2 or the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the names of the food to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc. may be displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2, and the user US may directly touch the display portion (also called the "icon" portion) with his/her finger to select the menu of the collaborative cooking mode, etc.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 receives command signals and recipe data CD transmitted from outside the cooking appliance 1, and the cooking appliance 1 transmits each operation signal and command signal to the outside (operating status data OS). However, information indicating the progress of cooking process 1, cooking process 2, such as the start and end of cooking process 2, may also be transmitted each time. With this configuration, the user US can know the progress information (operating status data OS) via the communication terminal device 200, etc., improving convenience.

In addition to the cooking appliance 1, a home gateway having a function of receiving search results data on the inventory of the refrigerator 403 may be arranged as an information management device, and the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 403 may be connected by a wireless communication means (LAN) or a wide area network such as the Internet, so that the cooking appliance 1 can obtain inventory information on the refrigerator 403 and use it for cooking.

As a configuration of the communication terminal device (information processing terminal device) 200 such as a smartphone, the display information, display form, design, etc. of the terminal side display unit (terminal side display screen) 216 and the central display unit 16M of the cooking appliance 1 are similar to each other, as described particularly in FIG. 60, but the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219 for such display are not necessarily required. For example, the first server 321 or the second server 322 may be provided with functions equivalent to the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219, and when the communication terminal device 200 receives an input (including a voice input), it may transmit the input to the cloud server 300 such as the first server 321, and obtain the necessary response information from the cloud server 300.

The cooking appliance 1 receives the recipe data CD and other data from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. directly or via a wireless router, but the cooking appliance 1 may receive the data via another relay device. For example, the remote control of another home appliance (e.g., a hot water supply device) installed in the kitchen may be used as the relay device. Such a remote control is convenient because it is usually always connected to a power source. In this case, it is desirable for the relay device to have a built-in storage device that temporarily stores various data including commands transmitted from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. Then, the various data transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 is configured to be temporarily stored in the storage device.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The cooking device and cooking system disclosed herein can be widely used not only in the kitchens of ordinary homes, but also in kitchens in public facilities, stores, etc.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Cooking device 2 Body 3 Top plate 4 Heating port 4L Left heating port 4C Center heating port 4R Right heating port 5 Exhaust port cover 6 Heating chamber 7 Door 8 Handle 9 IH coil 9C Center IH coil 9L Left IH coil 9R Right IH coil 10 Open/close detector 11 Microwave oscillator (magnetron)
12 Radiant heat heating means 12a Upper radiant heat heating means 12b Lower radiant heat heating means 13 Infrared sensor 14 Thermistor sensor 15 Input operation section 15L Left operation section 15M Central operation section 15R Right operation section 16 Display section 16F Progress mark 16L Left display section 16M Central display section 16M1 First specific screen 16M1A Food ingredient display screen 16M1B Nutrition ingredient display screen 16M2 Second specific screen 16M3 Third specific screen 16MA Guidance screen 16MH Common screen (initial screen during standby)
16MM Receiving operation display screen 16R Right display section 17 Heating power display section 17L Left heating power display section 17M Center heating status display section 17R Right heating power display section 20 Main power switch 20A Button (key) for operating the main power switch
21 Light emitting section 21L Light emitting section 21M Light emitting section 21R Light emitting section 22 First display area 23 Second display area 24 Third display area 25A to 25C Display information 26 Light emission control section 27 Light emitting element (light emitting element group)
28 Fourth display area 29A-29B Display section 29C-29D Candidate display section 30 Temperature sensor group 30A Temperature sensor 31 Infrared transmitter 32 Bottom wall 33 Installation space 35 Infrared transmitter 40 Control device 41 Display data storage section 42 Recipe data storage section 43 Heating control section 50 Audio notification section 51 Communication section (wireless communication module)
52 Input signal analysis unit 53 Data acquisition unit 54 Permission condition determination unit 55 Restriction unit 56 Audio signal receiving unit 57 Power supply circuit 58 Audio signal analysis unit 59 Human detection sensor 60A Display text 60B Two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code)
60C Two-dimensional information explanation 60E Caution display 60H Recommendation 60N Common information during standby 60P Acquired operation support information 70 Input processing section 90 Notification section 151L-155L Input keys 151M-159M Input keys 151R-155R Input keys 160 Control menu identification information 161 Control menu identification information 162 Control menu identification information 164 Reference information 165 Additional information 166 Additional information 167 Identification information 168 Identification information 169 Identification information 170 Operation support information 171L Heating section identification section 171R Heating section identification section 172 Process information 173 External recipe identification section 174 Receiving operation display section 174A Receiving support information 174F Non-permission display 175 Guidance information 176 Receiving operation display section 179D Display information (voice input mode)
180 Input key (voice input only mode selection section)
190 Icon 200 Communication terminal (smartphone) (information processing terminal)
201 Network 202 Network 203 Network 204 Network 205 Network 206 Network 210 Transmitter/receiver 211 Communication controller 212 Central processing unit (CPU)
213 ROM/RAM
214 Speaker 215 Touch operation unit 216 Terminal display unit (terminal display screen)
217 Cooking appliance database 218 Orientation detection unit 219 Remote operation information generation unit 220 Memory unit 221 NFC input/output unit 222 Voice input unit 223 Notification data 224 Remote control data 225 Display operation unit 226 Food ingredient/nutritional ingredient data 230 Recipe data acquisition unit 231 Recipe data transmission unit 232 Terminal side recipe selection unit 233 Food ingredient data acquisition unit 300 Cloud server 301 Recipe data provision server 302 Recipe database 310 Light emitting element for microwave oven (LED)
311 Grill light emitting element (LED)
312 Light emitting element for oven (LED)
313 Central IH light emitting element (LED)
314 High temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314a Heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
314b IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
321 First server 321A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
321C Control unit 321P Food component database 321R Memory unit 322 Second server 322A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
322C Control unit 322R Memory unit 323 Third server 324 Stock information memory unit 325 Food ingredient consumption determination unit 326 Food composition information server 340 Wireless router (access point)
341 Electrode 343 Menu display unit 350 Touch panel device 351 Operation panel 353 Touch gesture determination device 354 Operation determination unit 355 Gesture mode determination unit 356 Gesture input information determination unit 357 Gesture area determination unit 358 Reference parameter storage unit 359 Notification unit 362 Reference information storage unit 402 Home appliance 403 Refrigerator 404 Television receiver 405 Air conditioner 406 Air purifier 407 Ventilation device (range hood)
408 Electric rice cooker (electric rice cooker)
409 Microwave oven 410 Lighting equipment 411 Home gateway 413 Air purifier 414 Power meter 415 Power line (main line)
Description of the elements 416: Environment detection unit 417: External server 419: Wide area communication network 421: Input unit 422: Temperature monitoring device 423: Central control unit 424: Power amount control unit 425: Communication unit 426: Memory device 427: Connection port 428: Duct 429: Electric fan 430: Hood 431: Communication unit 432: Intake port 433: Air outlet 434: Odor sensor 435: Box-shaped main body 436: Blowing fan 437: Filter 438: Communication unit 439: Vertical wall 440: Air guide plate 441: Main body 443: Temperature detection unit 444: Temperature determination circuit 445: Alarm device 446: Communication unit 447: Light receiving unit 481: Menu display unit 482: Menu selection display unit 483: Heating source selection display unit 484: Control menu selection display unit 485 Collaborative cooking menu display section 486 Preparation information display section 487 Collaborative cooking menu name display section 488 Control menu display section (icon)
489 Preheat control menu display section (icon)
490 Warning information display section 491L Input key (icon)
491M Input key (icon)
491R Input key (icon)
492 Input Key (icon)
493 Input key (icon)
494 Input key (icon)
495 Input key (icon)
496 Input Keys (icons)
497A Induction Heating Source Selection Unit (icon)
497B Induction Heating Source Selection Section (icon)
497C Microwave Heating Source Selection Section (icon)
498 Range grill heat source selection section (icon)
499 Collaborative cooking mode selection section (icon)
500 RG control menu selection section (icon)
501 Mark (icon)
502 Screen switching mark 503 Screen switching mark 504 RG control menu name display section (icon)
505 RG control menu temperature display (icon)
506 Reference image display section 507A Auxiliary information display section 507B Auxiliary information display section 509 Preparation work reference image 510 Preparation work reference image 511 Caution information 512 Auxiliary information 513 Process information display section 514 Cooking process information display section 515 Recommended menu display section 516 Auxiliary information of recommended menu 517 Auxiliary information of recommended menu 518 Cooking reference image of recommended menu 519 Candidate switching mark (icon)
520 Candidate switching mark (icon)
521 Send key display section (icon)
522 Stop key display section (icon)
523 Detail display indicator (icon)
525-527 Display unit 530-532 Guidance text 550 Boiler (steam generator) (fourth heating means HM4)
600 Kitchen furniture 601 Kitchen 800 Refrigerator (fridge-freezer)
933 Food component data acquisition unit 1000 Voice input/output device (information processing terminal device)
1301 Recipe data providing unit 1324 Stock information storage unit 1325 Food consumption determination unit CD Recipe data (cooking condition data)
CD1 to CD8 Recipe data CN Cooking execution data DD Food composition information NW Network OS Operation status data SD1 Inventory data TB Acquisition period TB1 Recipe data acquisition period TB2 Acquired recipe data cancellation period TB3 Acquired recipe data change period TMC Touch input mode selection section TX First time limit (first limit period)
US user.

Claims (3)

A first heating means;
A second heating means;
A first input operation unit that receives a user's command regarding the first heating means;
A second input operation unit that receives a user's command regarding the second heating means;
A communication unit that receives recipe data from an external device;
A notification unit having a display unit;
A control device,
The first input operation unit has a touch-type input key A for selecting cooking contents,
The second input operation unit has a touch-type input key B for selecting cooking contents,
The input key A and the input key B are dual-purpose keys that support both voice input and touch input,
the one-input operation unit instructs the control device to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key A;
the two-input operation unit instructs the control device to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key B;
The voice input mode is a voice input mode 1, and the voice input mode 1 can be selected from a voice input mode 1A in which touch input is restricted and a voice input mode 1B in which touch input is maintained,
when receiving a command to start the voice input mode from the second input operation unit, the control device enables acquisition of recipe data related to the second heating means via the communication unit, and accepts a command to set control conditions for the recipe data;
canceling the voice input mode setting for the second input operation unit when a command is given from the second input operation unit to start cooking using the recipe data;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The cooking device according to claim 1 , wherein the control device does not simultaneously accept a command to start the voice input mode for the second input operation unit and a command to start the voice input mode for the first input operation unit. The cooking device according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the control device validates the touch input of either the input key A or the input key B , whichever occurs first, and does not start an input process using the other input key until input of control conditions for the cooking mode or the control mode is completed and a cooking start command is received by operating a start key.

Images